ENGINEERING DESIGN STANDARDS FOR WATER RESOURCE …dnhiggins.com/docs/RFB 744 Technical Specs.pdf · 2015. 12. 1. · Spec. Standard: 06/30/14 01015-1 Revision: 11/02/15 SECTION 01015

ENGINEERING DESIGN STANDARDS FORWATER RESOURCE FACILITIES

RFB 6000000744

C-4 CANAL BANK IMPROVEMENTS

AND FLOOD PROTECTION BERM

PALMETTO (PHASE 1)

MIAMI-DADE COUNTY, FLORIDA

PROJECT ID#: 100016

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

_______________________________G. Mark Brockway, P.E.FL Engineering Certificate No.: 28331

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGES

TOC-1

DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 Summary of Work 301015 Definitions and Standards 201020 Measurement and Payment 101050 Field Engineering 301065 Permits and Fees 101071 Standard References 901200 Project Meetings and Reports 301300 Submittals 801310 Cost Loaded Construction Schedules 801320 Construction Videos and Photographs 201410 Testing and Quality Control 301510 Temporary Utilities and Facilities 501530 Temporary Barriers and Controls 401531 Manatee Protection 301580 Project Identification and Signs 201590 Field Offices and Sheds 301600 Equipment and Materials 501630 Product Options and Substitutions 201700 Contract Closeout 401730 Operation and Maintenance Information 2

DIVISION 2: SITE WORK

02050 Demolition 302100 Site Preparation 202110 Clearing and Land Preparation 302114 Tree Removal 402200 Earthwork 802215 Protection of Existing Structures 502221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 302277 Articulated Concrete Block Matt System 302278 High Performance Turf Reinforcement Mat 602401 Dewatering 302431 Catch Basins, Frames and Grates 202434 HDPE Culverts 402435 Turbidity Control and Monitoring 702436 Environmental Protection 1202513 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 202735 Well Abandonment 202821 Security Fencing 602920 Sodding 3

DIVISION 3: CONCRETE

03100 Concrete Formwork and Accessories 1203200 Concrete Reinforcement 403300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2203410 Precast Concrete Products 1103600 Grout 8

SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGES

TOC-2

DIVISIONS 4 THROUGH 6: NOT USED

DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07920 Sealants and Caulkings 3

DIVISION 8: NOT USED

DIVISION 9: FINISHES

09900 Protective Coatings 10

DIVISIONS 10 THROUGH 15: NOT USED

DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL

16450 Grounding 2

END OF DIRECTORY

C-4 CANAL BANK IMPROVEMENTSAND FLOOD PROTECTION BERMPALMETTO (Phase 1)

Corrected Final DesignTechnical Specifications

Prepared by:South Florida Water Management DistrictOperations, Engineering and Construction DivisionEngineering and Construction BureauDesign Engineering Section

November, 2015

Project ID. NO. 100016

South Florida Water Management District3301 Gun Club Road West Palm Beach, Florida 33406•561-686-880 FL WATS 1-800-432-2045 www.sfwmd.gov• •

MAILING ADDRESS: P.O. Box 24680 West Palm Beach, FL 33416-4680•

Spec. Standard: 05/03/10 01010-1 Revision: 11/02/15

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: This SECTION summarizes the WORK of the Project as covered in detail in the completeContract Documents. This is a general summary and is not intended to be complete and all inclusive of therequired WORK items.

1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

A. The C-4 Canal Bank Improvements and Flood Protection Berm Palmetto (Phase 1), project is located in

Miami-Dade County, FL and includes the construction of approximately 5,960 linear feet of earthen bermon the north bank of the C-4 Canal in segments from SW 97th Avenue to SW 94th Avenue, SW 92nd Avenueto SW 87th Avenue and SW 82nd Avenue to the Palmetto Expressway.

B. The flood protection berm is to be constructed to a finished top elevation of 8.3 feet NGVD, with highperformance turf reinforcement mat (HPTRM) installed on the canal-side bank as shown on the ContractDrawings. Construction of the drainage system (inlets, culverts and headwalls) and boat ramp may requireexcavation in the existing limerock stratum.

C. The Construction of the flood protection berm is to be accomplished by the cut and fill of in-situ materialsas well as demucking and providing and placing Select Fill. Delivery tickets for all Select Fill materialdeliveries shall be submitted to the DISTRICT Project Manager or the DISTRICT’s designatedrepresentative.

D. The WORK also includes the demolition of encroaching fencing, trees, and structures within the limits ofthe construction. It also includes the installation of guardrails, fencing and the construction of a boat ramp,irrigation sleeves and an integrated drainage system featuring a stormwater collection swale with FDOTType F inlets, drainage outfalls, concrete endwalls, in-line check valves, finish grading, and sodding.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and distribute door-hanger notifications to residents/property ownerswithin the defined work areas, two (2) weeks prior to commencement of work activities. Defined workareas shall comply with paragraph 1.07B herein. The door-hanger notification shall be submitted to theDISTRICT for review and approval prior to use.

F. The CONTRACTOR’s Project Manager or designated representative shall maintain communication withthe residents as needed to ensure all site security concerns are addressed, encroachment removals arecoordinated, and any removed encroachment material such as fencing is made available to theresident/property prior to the CONTRACTOR’s disposal. These items include but are not limited toprecast walls, fencing (chain-link, wood slat, metal slat, etc.), sheds, and pavers.

G. C-4 Canal historical surface water elevations from 1/8/1993 to 2/16/2011 measured at DISTRICTMonitoring Station T5, located on the C-4 Canal, approximately 1/2 mile east of the Project area, generallyas follows: 7.6 ft NGVD29 maximum, 3.4 ft NGVD29 average and 2.0 ft NGVD29 minimum. Additionalinformation about canal stages measured at Monitoring Station T5 can be obtained from the DISTRICT’sDBHYDRO database.

H. Access to the project site can be achieved from multiple locations as identified in the Contract Documents.

1. The FP & L Easement.

2. SW 92nd Avenue.

3. SW 82nd Avenue (Central Blvd.)

I. Barge use is anticipated for this project due to limited access points and clearance conflicts. TheCONTRACTOR shall procure all necessary support equipment at no additional cost to the District. (Bargewidth cannot be wider than ½ the width of the C-4 Canal)


1.03 RELATED CONTRACT ACTIVITIES: The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate bankprotection/stabilization to protect the job site and maintain a safe work area during construction as well asprovide a safe canal bank for DISTRICT staff after construction to maintain. The CONTRACTOR shall sodall disturbed areas after grading. The CONTRACTOR shall submit an embankment protection plan to theDISTRICT for approval prior to commencement of construction activities. See General Terms & ConditionsArticle 6.13.

1.04 WORK PERFORMED BY OTHERS: The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and schedule work, withinDISTRICT right-of-way, with other entities including all municipal agencies, electric utilities, phone andfiber-optic utilities, gas utilities, etc. to allow those entities access to operate, maintain, and/or repair theirexisting facilities within or adjacent to the Project Area, for routine operation as well as emergency work.Specific timing and requirements for this access and work will be communicated to the DISTRICT’s ProjectManager by the CONTRACTOR.

1.05 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES:

A. During the period of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining the canalbank in a condition that allows for continuous vehicle access along the canal bank from all accesspoints described in paragraph 1.02 (H). See General Terms & Conditions Article 6.11.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall remove the floating turbidity barrier from the canal when directed by theDISTRICT, at any time during the period of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall not place thefloating turbidity barrier back into the canal until directed by the DISTRICT. Notice from theDISTRICT to remove the floating turbidity barrier may be limited to as little as 4 hours.

C. Staging area noted on the Drawings shall be restored to preexisting conditions or better at thecompletion of the project.

D. Acquisition of additional temporary construction staging area(s), as may be required, , shall beobtained by the CONTRACTOR at the CONTRACTOR’s sole expense; the DISTRICT reserves theright to review and approve/disapprove the temporary staging lease agreement prior to execution.

1.06 DISTRICT'S USE OF PREMISES:

A. Partial DISTRICT Occupancy: The DISTRICT reserves the right to occupy and to place and installequipment in areas of the Project, prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy doesnot interfere with completion of the WORK. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shallnot constitute acceptance of the WORK.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure the area is accessible to DISTRICT staff at all times duringconstruction.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCE, COORDINATION ACTIVITIES AND SCHEDULED DATES:

A. General: The CONTRACTOR will coordinate its work with other adjacent CONTRACTORS,landowners and DISTRICT activities, with specific attention to access and staging areas.

B. Project sequencing:

1. All work, including but not limited to demolition, site preparation, drainage installation,rough/fine grading, HPTRM installation, and sodding shall not exceed 500 LF at any time. TheCONTRACTOR shall install and maintain silt fence, orange construction fence and floatingturbidity barrier, as noted in the Contract Documents, for the entire duration of the project oncedemolition and site preparation begins for each property. The CONTRACTOR shall maintainthe sod within completed areas in accordance with SECTION 02920.

1.08 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS: See General Terms & Conditions Article 2.02

1.09 LIST OF DRAWINGS:

A. Contract Drawings:


1. Project ID No. 100016 – C-4 Canal Bank Improvements and Flood Protection Berm – Palmetto(Phase 1) Sheets 1-59, inclusive.

B. Reference Materials:

1. Boundary and Topographic Survey of a Portion of the C-4 Canal Located in Sections 3 and 4,Township 54S, Range 40E, Miami-Dade County, FL prepared by Woolpert, Inc., dated 2008.

2. Topographic Survey of a Portion of the C-4 Canal Located in Sections 3 and 4, Township 54S,Range 40E, Miami-Dade County, FL prepared by Woolpert, Inc., dated 2013.

3. Subsurface Exploration Report – C-4 Canal Bank Improvements Project – Palmetto FloodProtection Berm prepared by Ardaman & Associates, Inc., dated August 8, 2014.

4. Geotechnical Design and Construction Recommendations – C-4 Canal Bank Improvements –Quick Start Floodwall – North Bank of C-4 Canal between SW 92nd & 94th Ave., prepared byVertical V - Southeast, Inc., dated January 6, 2011.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01015 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Definitions:

1. A substantial amount of the Technical Specification (specification) language constitutesdefinitions for terms found in other areas of the Contract Documents including the Drawings,which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of allrequirements necessary.

2. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined in the General Terms & Conditions.Definitions and explanations are not necessarily either complete or exclusive but are general forthe WORK.

3. The term “DISTRICT”, as defined in the General Terms & Conditions and used in thesespecifications, is further defined as the District or District’s authorized representative, whichmay include, but is not limited to, the Design Engineer, Project Manager or ConstructionManager.

B. General Requirements: General requirements are the provisions or requirements of Division 1SECTIONs which apply to the entire WORK of the Contract.

1.02 FORMAT AND SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS:

A. Format Explanation: The format of principal portions of these specifications can be described asfollows, although other portions may not fully comply and no particular significance will be attachedto such compliance or noncompliance.

1. SECTIONs and DIVISIONs: For convenience, the basic unit of the specification text is a"SECTION", each unit of which is named and numbered. These are organized into relatedfamilies of sections, and various families of sections are organized into "DIVISIONs", whichare recognized as the present industry consensus on uniform organization and sequencing ofspecifications. The SECTION title is not intended to limit meaning or content of SECTION,nor to be fully descriptive of requirements specified therein, nor to be an integral part of thetext.

2. SECTION Numbering: Used for identification and to facilitate cross-references in the ContractDocuments. SECTIONs are placed in numeric sequence; however, the numbering is notsequential, and listing of SECTIONs in Table of Contents at the beginning of the TechnicalSpecifications must be consulted to determine numbers and names of specification SECTIONsin these Contract Documents.

3. Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each SECTION. The SECTION number isshown with the page number at bottom of each page to facilitate location of the text.

4. Parts: Each SECTION of these specifications generally has been subdivided into three (3) basicparts for uniformity and convenience (Part 1 "General", Part 2 "Products", and Part 3"Execution"). These parts do not limit the meaning of the text within. Some SECTIONs maynot contain all three parts when not applicable, or may contain more than three parts to addclarity to organization of the SECTION.

5. Imperative Language: Used generally in specifications. Except as otherwise indicated,requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR. For clarityof reading, at certain locations contrasting subjective language is used to describeresponsibilities which must be fulfilled by the CONTRACTOR or, when so noted, by others.


6. Specialists Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires that specific work beassigned to specialists or expert entities who must be engaged for performance of those units ofwork. These must be recognized as special requirements over which the CONTRACTOR hasno choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with, and are not intended tointerfere with, normal application of regulations, union jurisdictions and similar conventions.Nevertheless final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of requirements remains withthe CONTRACTOR.

7. Trades: Except as otherwise specified or indicated, the use of titles such as "carpentry" inspecification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited orunionized tradesperson of corresponding generic name (such as "carpenter"), nor that thespecified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradespersons of that correspondinggeneric name.

B. Specification Content: Because of methods by which this Project specification has been produced,certain general characteristics of contents and conventions in use of language are explained as follows:

1. Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying requirements varies throughoutthe text, and may include "prescriptive", "compliance with standards", "performance","proprietary", or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of work hasno bearing on requirements for another unit of work.

2. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two (2) or more industrystandards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards orrequirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, notify theDISTRICT for a decision, as specified in the General Terms & Conditions.

3. Abbreviations: Throughout the Contract Documents are abbreviations implying words andmeanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Specific abbreviations have beenestablished, principally for lengthy technical terminology, and in conjunction with coordinationof specification requirements, with notations on the Drawings and in schedules. These arenormally defined at first instance of use. Organizational and association names and titles ofgeneral standards are also abbreviated.

1.03 DRAWING SYMBOLS:

A. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on the Drawings are those symbols generallyrecognized in the construction industry for the purposes indicated. Refer instances of uncertainty tothe DISTRICT for clarification.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS - APPLICABILITY:

A. Applicable standards of the construction industry have the same force and effect, and are made a partof the Contract Documents by reference, as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as ifpublished copies were bound herewith. Referenced standards referenced directly in the ContractDocuments or by governing regulations have precedence over non-referenced standards which arerecognized in industry for applicability to work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01020 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. LUMP SUM CONTRACT: Unless indicated on the Contract Documents, all work indicated on theContract Drawings and specified in the Bid Documents and Contract shall be included in the ContractSum indicated on the Bid Form. The following is a description of the WORK listed in the Bid Form andis not intended to be complete and all-inclusive of the required work items. The WORK shall include allmiscellaneous and ancillary items necessary to construct a complete and functional Project.

1. Bid Item A. C-4 Canal Bank Improvements And Flood Protection Berm - Palmetto (Phase 1), TotalProject, Lump Sum

1.02 BASIS FOR PAYMENTS:

A. The above descriptions generally outline the scope of work required for those elements of the WORK tobe paid for under each lump sum item listed in the Bid Form. Those lump sum amounts shall be furtherdistributed in accordance with subvalues identified in the approved Cost Loaded Schedule specified inSECTION 01310 and the GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS.

1.03 PAYMENTS: Payments shall be in accordance with the provisions of the GENERAL TERMS &CONDITIONS.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL (See General Terms & Conditions Article 4.05 "Reference Points.")

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall engage a Professional Engineer of the discipline required, registeredin the State of Florida, to perform engineering services for temporary facilities including thedesign of shoring systems, shores, earth and water retaining systems, forms, temporary erectionsupports, and similar items provided by the CONTRACTOR as part of its means and methodsof construction.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall engage a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the Stateof Florida to perform the necessary layout, survey control and monumentation.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide two (2) sets of As-Built Drawings depicting all elevationsboth NAVD88 (North American Vertical Datum 88) and NGVD29 (National Geodetic VerticalDatum 29). The NAVD88 elevation shall be italicized, bracketed, and underscored. Refer to2.03.A.5 for datum offset requirements.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. SECTION 01300 - Submittals

2. SECTION 01700 – Contract Closeout

3. SECTION 02200 – Earthwork

1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01300.

PART 2 - CONTRACTOR CONSTRUCTION STAKING

2.01 DESCRIPTION: In connection with this WORK, CONTRACTOR shall:

A. Perform all construction layout and reference staking necessary for the proper control and satisfactorycompletion of the WORK.

B. Run a level circuit between vertical control points indicated to check benchmarks noted on theDrawings and establish new benchmarks where necessary.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:

A. The CONTRACTOR’s personnel performing the construction staking shall work under the directsupervision of a Florida registered Professional Surveyor and Mapper. Submit name and address offirm responsible for surveying to the DISTRICT prior to start of survey activities.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely and completely responsible for the accuracy of the line and gradeof all features of the WORK. Any errors or apparent discrepancies found in previous surveys,drawings, or specifications shall be called to the attention of the DISTRICT by the CONTRACTOR forcorrection or interpretation prior to proceeding with the WORK.

C. Field notes shall be kept in standard, bound field notebooks in a clear, orderly, and neat mannerconsistent with standard surveying practices.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the placement and preservation of adequate ties andreference to all control points, whether established by him or found on the Project, necessary for theaccurate reestablishment of all base lines or centerlines shown on the Drawings. All land ties (i.e.section corners, fractional section corners, and similar items) that may be disturbed or destroyed duringconstruction shall be carefully referenced and replaced under the supervision of a ProfessionalSurveyor and Mapper.


E. The supervision of the CONTRACTOR’s construction staking personnel shall be the responsibility ofthe CONTRACTOR; any deficient layout or construction WORK which may be the result ofinaccuracies in his staking operations or of his failure to report inaccuracies found in WORKpreviously done shall be corrected at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

F. Station Identification: On linear elements of construction (such as levees, canals, and similar items)the CONTRACTOR shall place temporary identifying signs at intervals no greater than 500 feet using4 foot sections of one inch by 4 inches lumber driven into the ground. The signs shall identify thestation at that location.

2.03 SURVEYING STANDARDS

A. All vertical elevations shall commence from a minimum of two (2) National Geodetic Survey (NGS)second order or better published benchmarks.

B. All elevations shall be established to NGS third order standards and certified to those standards by aProfessional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida.

C. All level runs shall be double run (forward and back) or looped into two (2) NGS second order orbetter published benchmarks.

D. A Site benchmark shall be set if one does not exist. The benchmark shall consist of a minimum of two(2) 80-pound bags of concrete mix, a ferrous piece of material able to be located with a magneticlocator, and a survey cap (supplied by the DISTRICT) stamped with the Site designation or DISTRICTapproved alternative.

E. All elevations shall be established in NGVD29 with the datum offset for conversion to NAVD88.Datum offsets shall be made using the CORPSCON 6.0.1 or the most recent version. The datumconversion to NAVD88 shall be made from the closest bench mark. The NAVD88 conversions shall beaccurate to 0.01 feet.

F. State Plane Coordinates (NAD 83/99) shall be established at all benchmark locations with a positionalaccuracy of +/- three feet.

G. A DISTRICT benchmark description sheet shall be completed for each set benchmark.

H. If there are no second order or better published benchmarks within six miles of the site, contact theDISTRICT Surveying & Mapping Section representative at (561) 682-6688 prior to commencement.

I. Contact the DISTRICT Survey & Mapping Section prior to commencement to check for previouslyestablished site benchmarks that may be suitable to use.

2.04 RECORDS AND SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittal:

1. Provide DISTRICT a copy of the designs described in Paragraph 1.01 signed and sealed by theFlorida registered Professional Engineer.

2. Provide DISTRICT the data required for the firm responsible for surveying as required inParagraph 2.02 A.

3. Provide DISTRICT one (1) copy of the Preliminary Surveyor’s Report (MS Word 2007), andtwo (2) copies of the final signed, sealed and certified Surveyor’s Report to the DISTRICT.

a. At a minimum, the report shall include: an overall Project description, location sketches,field notes, equipment used, pictures and an NAD 83/99 state plane coordinate (RTK) oneach new bench mark (if applicable).

b. A CD containing: Surveyor’s name and logo, Surveyor’s Report, digital pictures,benchmark description sheets and any other associated data.

B. Records: At the end of the Project, submit to the DISTRICT two (2) copies of a certified As-Builtsurvey showing the location and elevations of the completed WORK. These are part of the recorddocuments required in SECTION 01700.


C. Cross-sections: Cross-sections shall be submitted as specified in SECTION 02200.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01065 PERMITS AND FEES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work:

1. Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all permits andlicenses related to the WORK as provided for in the General Terms & Conditions.

2. The CONTRACTOR will be issued copies of all permits obtained by the DISTRICT at the pre-construction conference. A copy of the permits shall be posted at the Site at all times duringconstruction. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with thepermits and shall abide by the permit conditions at all times. Refer to Article 6.08 of theSupplemental Conditions for the list of permits that DISTRICT has obtained or is in the processof obtaining.

3. The WORK shall be conducted, and shall result in construction of the improvements of theProject, in full accordance with the conditions of the permits granted for the Project.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01071 STANDARD REFERENCES

Wherever used in the project manual, the following abbreviations will have the meanings listed:

AA Aluminum Association Incorporated818 Connecticut Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20006

AABC Associated Air Balance Council1518 K Street NWWashington, DC 20005

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association2700 River Road, Suite 118Des Plaines, IL 60018

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials444 North Capitol Street, NW, Suite 225Washington, DC 20001

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association2025 M Street, NW Suite 800Washington, DC 20036

ACI American Concrete Institute38800 Country Club DriveFarmington Hills, MI, 48331

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies600 18th Street NBirmingham, Al 35203

AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association

AGA American Gas Association400 N. Capital Street, NW Suite 450Washington, DC 20001

AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association500 Montgomery Street, Suite 350Alexandria, VA 22314

AHA American Hardboard Association1210 West Northwest HwyPalatine, IL 60067

AISC American Institute of Steel ConstructionOne East Wacker Drive, suite 700Chicago, IL 60601

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute1000 16th Street, NWWashington, DC 20036


AITC American Institute of Timber Construction333 West Hampden AvenueEnglewood, CO 80110

ALSC American Lumber Standards CommitteeP. O. Box 210Germantown, MD 20874

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.30 West University DriveArlington Heights, IL 60004

ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.25 West 43rd StreetNew York NY 10036

APA American Plywood AssociationP.O. Box 11700Tacoma, WA 98411

API American Petroleum Institute1220 L Street, NWWashington, DC 20005

AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating and Refrigeration Institute1814 North Fort Myer DriveArlington, VA 22209

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers345 East 47th StreetNew York, NY 10017

ASCII American Standard Code for Information InterchangeUnited States of America Standards Institute10 East 40th StreetNew York, NY 10016

ASE American Standard Safety Code for Elevators,Dumbwaiter and EscalatorsAmerican National Standards Institute/ASME A17.1/CSA B441430 BroadwayNew York, NY 10018

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning EngineersUnited Engineering Center1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.Atlanta, GA 30329

ASME American Society of Mechanical EngineersThree Park AvenueNew York, NY 10016

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials1916 Race StreetPhiladelphia, PA 19103


AWPA American Wood Preservers AssociationP.O. Box 361784Birmingham, AL 35236

AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau7962 Conell CourtP. O. Box 5283Lorton, VA 22079

AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute1945 Old Gallows Road, Suite 150Vienna, VA 22182

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute46179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120Potomac Falls, VA 20165

AWS American Welding Society550 NW Lejune RoadMiami, FL 33126

AWWA American Water Works Association6666 West Quincy AvenueDenver, CO 80235

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association355 Lexington Avenue, 17th FloorNew York, NY 10017

BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators17926 HalsteadHomewood, IL 60430

CBMA Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association2120 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115

CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America(Formerly called: Overhead Electrical Crane Institute) (OECI)8720 Reds Oak Bloulevard, Suite 201Charlotte, NC 28217

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute933 North Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, IL 60173

CSA Canadian Standards Association155 Queen Street, Suite 1300Ottawa, Ontario, CA K1P6L1

DEMA Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association122 East 42nd StreetNew York, NY 10017


DHI Door Hardware Institute14150 Newbrook Drive, Suite 200Chantilly, VA 20151

DIS Division of Industrial SafetyCalifornia Department of Industrial Relations2422 Arden WaySacramento, CA 95825

EEI Edison Electric Institute701 Pennsylvania Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20004

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance2001 Eye Street, NWWashington, DC 20006

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association25 North BroadwayTarrytown, NY 10591

EPA Environmental Protection AgencyRegion 4Sam Nunn Atlanta Federal Center61 Forsyth Street, SWAtlanta, GA 30303-3104

ESO Electrical Safety Order, California Administrative Code, Title 8, Chap. 4, Subarticle 5Office of Procurement, Publications SectionP. O. Box 201918141 Elder Creek RoadSacramento, CA 95820

FAC Florida Administrative Code

FEDSPEC Federal SpecificationsGeneral Services Administration Specification and Consumer InformationDistribution BranchWashington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197Washington, DC 20407

FEDSTDS Federal Standards (see FEDSPECS)

FM Factory Mutual Research1151 Boston-Providence TurnpikeNorwood, MA 02062

GANA Glass Association of North America800 SW Jackson Street, Suite 1500Topeka, Kansas 66612

HEI Heat Exchange Institute1300 Summer AvenueCleveland, OH 44115


HI Hydraulic Institute1230 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115

HPVA Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association1825 Michael Faraday DriveReston, VA 20190

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials5001 E. Philadelphia StreetOntario, CA 91761

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials5360 South Workman Mill RoadWhittier, CA 90601

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers AssociationP. O. Box PSouth Yarmouth, MA 02664

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute10600 West Higgins Road, Suite 607Rosemont, IL 60018

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.3 Park Avenue, 17th FloorNew York, NY 10016-5997

IES Illuminating Engineering Societyc/o United Engineering Center120 Wall Street Floor 17New York, NY 10005

ISA Instrument Society of America67 Alexander DriveResearch triangle Park, NC 27709

ISO International Organization for Standardization1, ru de Varembé,Case Postale 56CH-1211 Genna 20,Switzerland

JIC Joint Industrial Council7901 Westpark DriveMcLean, VA 22101

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association401 Michigan AvenueChicago, IL 60611

MILSPEC Military SpecificationsNaval Publications and Forms Center5801 Tabor AvenuePhiladelphia, PA 19120


MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.127 Park Avenue, N.E.Vienna, VA 22180

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers800 Roosevelt rd bldg C, Suite 312Glen Ellyn, IL 60137

NACE National Association of Corrosion EngineersP. O. Box 986Katy, TX 77450

NEC National Electrical CodeNational Fire Protection Association470 Atlantic AvenueBoston, MA 02210

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association3 Bethesda Metro Center, Suite 1100Bethesda, MD 20814

NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc.272 Turtle RoadP. O. Box 87ACumberland Center, ME 04021

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association1300 N. 17th Street, Suite 1752Rosslyn, VA 22209

NESC National Electric Safety CodeAmerican National Standards Institute1430 BroadwayNew York, NY 10018

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association3050 Old Centre Avenue, Suite 102Portage, MI 49024

NFP National Forest Products Association (Formerly National LumberManufacturer's Association)1619 Massachusetts AvenueWashington, DC 20036

NFPA National Fire Protection AssociationBatterymarch ParkQuincy, MA 02269

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber AssociationP. O. Box 34518Memphis, TN 38184-0518

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology100 Bureau Drive, Suite 1070Gaithersburg, MD 20899-1070


NSF National Sanitation FoundationP.O. Box 130140789 N. Dixoboro RoadAnn Arbor, MI 48113

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health ActU.S. Department of LaborOccupational and Health AdministrationSan Francisco Regional Office200 Constitution AvenueWashington, DC 20210

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute200 W. Adams Street, Suite 2100Chicago, IL 60606

PPIC The Plumbing & Piping Industry Council, Inc.135 Calle Catalina PlaceHouston, TX 77007

RIS Redwood Inspection ServiceCalifornia Redwood Association818 Grayson Road, Suite 201Pleasant Hill, CA 94523

RLM Reflector and Lamp Manufacturers Standard Institute

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association1400 K StreetWashington, DC 20005

SAE Society of Automotive Engineers400 Commonwealth DriveWarrendale, PA 15096

SBC Standard Building CodePublished by SBCCI

SMC Standard Mechanical CodePublished by SBCCI

SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International1116 Brown-Marx BuildingBirmingham, AL 35203

SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association805 Sterick Bldg.Memphis, TN 38103


SDI Steel Door Institute30200 Detroit roadWestlake, OH 44145

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning ContractorsNational Association, Inc.4201 Lafayette Center DriveChantilly, VA 20151

SPC Society for Protective Coatings40 24th Street, 6th FloorPittsburgh, PA 15222

SPI Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.1667 K Street, NW Suite 1000Washington, DC 20006

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection BureauP.O. Box 10915Pensacola, Fl 32524

SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings(formerly called: Steel Structures Painting Council)40 24th Street, 6th FloorPittsburgh, PA 15222-4656

SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works ConstructionBuilding News, Inc.3055 Overland AvenueLos Angeles, CA 90034

TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association3251 Corte Malpaso, Suite 507Camarillo, CA 93012

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.2600 NW Lake RoadCamas, WA 98607

USBR Bureau of ReclamationU.S. Department of InteriorEngineering and Research CenterDenver Federal Center, Building 67Denver, CO 80225

USACE United States Army Corps of EngineersJacksonville DistrictP. O. Box 4970Jacksonville, FL 32232-0019

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau6980 SW Varns StreetP. O. Box 23145Tigard, OR 97223


WWPA Western Wood Products Association(Formerly called: West Coast Lumbermen's Association (WCLA))522 SW 5th Avenue, Suite 500Portland, OR 97204

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS AND REPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Summary of Work: This SECTION includes the following administrative and proceduralrequirements:

1. Project Meetings:

a. Preconstruction conference

b. Progress meetings

2. Schedules and Reports:

a. Initial coordination submittals

b. Construction Schedules

c. Special reports


1. SECTION 01300 – Submittals

1.02 SUBMITTALS: All submittals shall be made in accordance with SECTION 01300.

1.03 PROJECT MEETINGS:

A. Pre-construction Conference

1. The DISTRICT will administer a pre-construction conference within ten (10) days after theEffective Date of the Agreement, to review items stated in the following agenda and to establisha working understanding between the parties as to their relationships during conduct of theWORK.

2. The Pre-construction conference shall be attended by:

a. The CONTRACTOR and his Project Superintendent

b. Representatives of principal Subcontractors and Suppliers

c. Engineer and his Resident Project Representative if any

d. The DISTRICT or its representative

e. Other affected parties determined by the DISTRICT

3. Agenda:

a. Projected Construction Schedules

b. Critical Work sequencing

c. Designation of responsible personnel

d. Project coordination

e. Procedures and Processing of:

i. Field decisions

ii. Substitutions

iii. Submittals


iv. Change Orders

v. Applications for payment

f. Procedures for testing

g. Procedures for maintaining record documents

h. Use of Premises:

i. Office, work and storage areas

ii. The DISTRICT's requirements

i. Construction facilities, controls, and construction aids

j. Temporary utilities

k. Safety and first aid

l. Security

m. Requirements of any permits obtained by the DISTRICT and/or the CONTRACTOR

4. Location of Meeting: South Florida Water Management District’s Miami Field Station, 9001NW 58th Street, Miami, FL 33178

B. Progress Meetings:

1. The DISTRICT will administer a progress meeting a minimum of twice each month (every two(2) weeks) and at other times requested by the DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR, Engineer andall Subcontractors active on the Site shall be represented at each meeting. The CONTRACTORmay request attendance by representatives of his Suppliers and other Subcontractors, or otherentities concerned with the Project or involved with the planning, coordination or performanceof future Project activities. All participants in the meeting shall be familiar with the Project andauthorized to conclude matters relating to the WORK.

2. The CONTRACTOR and each Subcontractor shall be prepared to report on and discuss thecurrent construction progress, any anticipated future changes to the Construction Schedule, andadvise if their current progress, and anticipated future schedules are compatible with theWORK.

3. If one Subcontractor is delaying another, the CONTRACTOR shall direct such changes as arenecessary for those involved to mutually agree on the Construction Schedule changes in thebest interest of construction progress.

4. Agenda

a. Review of construction progress since previous meeting

b. Field observations, interface requirements, conflicts

c. Issues which may impede the Construction Schedule

d. Off-site fabrication

e. Delivery schedules

f. Submittal schedules and status

g. Site utilization

h. Temporary facilities and services

i. Hours of Work

j. Hazards and risks

k. Housekeeping


l. Quality and Work standards

m. Change orders

n. Documentation of information for payment request

o. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule, if necessary

p. Revisions to the Construction Schedule

q. Progress and schedule during the succeeding WORK period

r. Review proposed changes for:

i. Effect on the Construction Schedule and on the Completion Date

ii. Effect on the other contracts of the Project

s. Other business

5. Location of Meetings: South Florida Water Management District’s Miami Field Station, 9001NW 58th Street, Miami, FL 33178

6. Reporting: After each meeting, minutes of the meeting will be distributed by the DISTRICT toeach party present and to parties who should have been present.

C. Special Reports:

1. When an event of an unusual and/or significant nature occurs at the Site, a special report shallbe prepared and submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the DISTRICT. List the chain of events,persons participating, the response by CONTRACTOR's personnel, an evaluation of the resultsor effects, and similar pertinent information.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. This SECTION includes definitions, descriptions, transmittal, and review of "Compliance" and"Miscellaneous" Submittals.


1. SECTION 01310 – Cost Loaded Construction Schedule]

1.02 GENERAL INFORMATION:

A. Definitions:

1. Compliance Submittals include Shop Drawings, product data, and samples which are prepared bythe CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, MANUFACTURER, or Supplier and submitted by theCONTRACTOR to the DISTRICT as a basis for approval of the use of Equipment and Materialsproposed for incorporation in the WORK or needed to describe installation, operation,maintenance, or technical properties.

a. Shop Drawings include custom-prepared data of all types including drawings, diagrams,performance curves, material schedules, templates, instructions, and similar information notin standard printed form applicable to other projects.

b. Product data includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems notcustom-prepared for this Project, other than the designation of selections from availablechoices.

c. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products,and WORK; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of WORK; either forlimited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a special form of samples which are too large to be handled in the specified mannerfor transmittal of sample Submittals.

2. Miscellaneous Submittals are those technical reports, administrative Submittals, certificates, andguarantees not defined as Shop Drawings, product data, or samples.

a. Technical reports include laboratory reports, tests, technical procedures, technical records,CONTRACTOR's design analysis and CONTRACTOR's survey field notes for constructionstaking, before cross-sections and after cross-sections.

b. Administrative Submittals are those nontechnical Submittals required by the ContractDocuments or deemed necessary for administrative records. These Submittals includemaintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, Project photographs, physical work records,statements of applicability, copies of industry standards, as-constructed data,security/protection/safety data, and similar type Submittals.

c. Certificates and guarantees are those Submittals on Equipment and Materials where a writtencertificate or guarantee from the MANUFACTURER or Supplier is called for in theSpecifications.

d. Reports as required by Contract describing CONTRACTOR's means and methods for itemssuch as dewatering, earth and water retaining, erosion/turbidity control, and safety plans.

3. Refer to ARTICLE 1.03 and 1.04 of this Part for detailed lists of documents and specificrequirements.

B. Quality Requirements:


1. Submittals such as Shop Drawings and product data shall be of the quality for legibility andreproduction purposes. Every line, character, and letter shall be clearly legible. Drawings such asreproducibles shall be useable for further reproduction to yield legible hard copy.

2. Documents submitted to the DISTRICT that do not conform to these requirements shall be subjectto rejection by the DISTRICT, and upon request by DISTRICT, CONTRACTOR shall resubmitconforming documents. If conforming Submittals cannot be obtained, such documents shall beretraced, redrawn, or photographically restored as may be necessary to meet such requirements.CONTRACTOR's (or his Subcontractor's) failure to initially satisfy the legibility qualityrequirements will not relieve CONTRACTOR (or his Subcontractors) from meeting the requiredschedule for Submittal of Shop Drawings and product data.

C. Language and Dimensions:

1. All words and dimensional units shall be in the English language.

2. Metric dimensional unit equivalents may be stated in addition to the English units.

D. Submittal Completeness:

1. Submittals shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials of construction,and other information specified to enable the DISTRICT to review the information effectively.

2. Where standard drawings are furnished which cover a number of variations of the general class ofequipment, each such drawing shall be individually annotated to describe exactly which parts ofthe drawing apply to the equipment being furnished. Use hatch marks to indicate variations thatdo not apply to the Submittal. The use of "highlighting markers" is not an acceptable means ofannotating Submittals. Such annotation shall also include proper identification of the Submittalpermanently attached to the drawing.

3. Reproduction or copies of Drawings or portions thereof will not be accepted as completefabrication or erection drawings. The CONTRACTOR may use a reproduction of the DISTRICT-prepared Contract Drawings for erection drawings such as to indicate information on erection or toidentify detail drawing references. Where the Drawings are revised to show this additionalCONTRACTOR information, the DISTRICT's title block shall be replaced with aCONTRACTOR's title block and the DISTRICT's professional seal shall be removed from theDrawing. The CONTRACTOR shall revise these erection drawings for subsequent DISTRICTrevisions to the Contract Drawings.

1.03 COMPLIANCE SUBMITTALS:

A. Items shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. MANUFACTURER's specifications

2. Catalogs, or parts thereof, of manufactured equipment

3. Shop fabrication and erection drawings

4. General outline drawings of equipment showing overall dimensions, location of majorcomponents, weights, and location of required building openings and floor plates

5. Detailed equipment installation drawings, showing foundation details, anchor bolt sizes andlocations, baseplate sizes, location of DISTRICT's connections, and all clearances required forerection, operation, and disassembly for maintenance.

6. Schematic diagrams for electrical items, showing external connections, terminal block numbers,internal wiring diagrams, and one-line diagrams

7. Bills of material and spare parts list

8. Instruction books and operating manuals

9. Material lists or schedules


10. Performance tests on equipment by MANUFACTURERs

11. Concrete mix design information

12. Samples and color charts

13. All drawings, calculations, catalogs or parts thereof, MANUFACTURER’s specifications and data,samples, instructions, and other information specified or necessary:

a. For DISTRICT to determine that the Equipment and Materials conform with the designconcept and comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.

b. For the proper erection, installation, operation and maintenance of the Equipment andMaterials which the DISTRICT will review for general content but not for substance.

c. For the DISTRICT to determine what supports, anchorages, structural details, connections,and services are required for the Equipment and Materials, and the effects on contiguous orrelated structures and Equipment and Materials.

B. Compliance Submittal Action Stamps:

1. The DISTRICT's review action stamp or designation, appropriately completed, will appear on allCompliance Submittals of CONTRACTOR when returned by the DISTRICT. Review statusdesignations listed on DISTRICT's action stamp are defined as follows:

a. "ACCEPTED AS SUBMITTED": Signifies Equipment or Material represented by theSubmittal conforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the ContractDocuments and is acceptable for incorporation in the WORK. CONTRACTOR is to proceedwith fabrication or procurement of the items and with related WORK.

b. "ACCEPTED AS NOTED”: Signifies Equipment and Material represented by the Submittalconforms with the design concept and complies with the intent of the Contract Documentsand is acceptable for incorporation in the WORK subject to the condition that as constructed itshall be in accordance with all notations and/or corrections indicated. CONTRACTOR is toproceed with fabrication or procurement of the items and with related WORK in accordancewith DISTRICT's notations.

c. "RETURNED FOR REVISION": Means that deviations from the requirements of theContract Documents exist in the Submittal. CONTRACTOR is to resubmit revisedinformation responsive to DISTRICT's annotations on the returned Submittal or written in theletter of transmittal. Fabrication or procurement of items represented by the Submittal andrelated WORK is not to proceed until the Submittal is approved.

d. "NOT ACCEPTABLE (SUBMIT ANEW)": Signifies Equipment and Material represented bythe Submittal does not conform with the design concept or comply with the intent of theContract Documents and is disapproved for use in the WORK. CONTRACTOR is toresubmit Compliance Submittals responsive to the Contract Documents.

e. "PRELIMINARY SUBMITTAL": Signifies Submittals of such preliminary nature that adetermination of conformance with the design concept or compliance with the intent of theContract Documents must be deferred until additional information is furnished.CONTRACTOR is to submit such additional information to permit layout and relatedactivities to proceed.

f. "FOR REFERENCE ONLY": Signifies Submittals which are for supplementary informationonly; pamphlets, general information sheets, catalog cuts, standard sheets, bulletins andsimilar data, all of which are useful to the DISTRICT in design, operation, or maintenance,but which by their nature do not constitute a basis for determining that items representedthereby conform with the design concept or comply with the intent of the ContractDocuments. The DISTRICT reviews such Submittals for general content but not forsubstance.


g. "DISTRIBUTION COPY (PREVIOUSLY ACCEPTED)": Signifies Submittals which havebeen previously accepted and are being distributed to CONTRACTOR, DISTRICT, ResidentProject Representative, and others for coordination and construction purposes.

C. Schedule and Log of Compliance Submittals:

1. Prepare for the DISTRICT, a schedule and log for submission of all Compliance Submittalsspecified or necessary for DISTRICT's review of the use of Equipment and Materials proposed forincorporation in the WORK or needed for proper installation, operation or maintenance. Submitthe schedule and log with the procurement schedule and WORK progress schedule. Schedulesubmission of all Compliance Submittals to permit review, fabrication, and delivery in time so asto not cause a delay in the WORK of CONTRACTOR or his Subcontractors or any othercontractors as described herein.

2. In establishing schedule for Compliance Submittals, allow fifteen (15) working days inDISTRICT's office for reviewing original Submittals and ten (10) working days for reviewingresubmittals.

3. The schedule shall indicate the anticipated dates of original submission, and shall be prepared inaccordance with SECTION 01310.

4. Schedule all Compliance Submittals required prior to fabrication or manufacture for submissionwithin 90 days of the Notice to Proceed Schedule Compliance Submittals pertaining to storage,installation and operation at the Site for DISTRICT's acceptance prior to delivery of theEquipment and Materials.

5. Resubmit Compliance Submittals the number of times required for DISTRICT's "ACCEPTED ASSUBMITTED." However, any need for resubmittals in excess of the number set forth in theaccepted schedule, or any other delay in obtaining acceptance of Submittals, will not be groundsfor extension of the Contract Time, provided the DISTRICT completes its reviews within thetimes stated above.

D. Transmittal of Compliance Submittals:

1. All Compliance Submittals of Equipment and Materials furnished by Subcontractors,MANUFACTURERs, and Suppliers shall be submitted to the DISTRICT by CONTRACTOR inelectronic and hard copy format as indicated below.

2. After checking and verifying all field measurements, transmit all Compliance Submittals to theDISTRICT for acceptance as follows:

a. Identify each Compliance Submittal by Submittal Number, Project name and number,Contract title and number, and the Specification SECTION and article number markedthereon or in the letter of transmittal. Unidentifiable Submittals will be returned for properidentification.

b. Check and stamp Compliance Submittals of Subcontractors, Suppliers, andMANUFACTURERS with CONTRACTOR's approval prior to transmitting them to theDISTRICT. CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval shall constitute a representation to theDISTRICT that CONTRACTOR has either determined and verified all quantities,dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, or heassumes full responsibility for doing so, and that he has coordinated each ComplianceSubmittal with the requirements of the WORK and the Contract Documents.

c. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of DISTRICT in the letter of transmittalany deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

d. Provide all Submittals in electronic format, compatible with Adobe Professional, Version 8 (orhigher), and submitted as a single file, using PDF bookmarks and/or chapters to identifydivisions within the Submittal package.


e. In addition to the electronic copy, the CONTRACTOR shall provide one (1) hard copy foreach Submittal. Both the electronic and the hard copy Submittals shall include the requiredtransmittal sheet and written confirmation by the CONTRACTOR that the electronicSubmittal is complete and identical to the submitted hard copy. Note that the Submittalreceipt date will be the date that the hard copy is received by the DISTRICT.

f. Submittals with file sizes greater than ten (10) megabyte (MB) shall be transferred to anexisting DISTRICT File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site, coupled with an electronic notificationto the DISTRICT of the transfer. One (1) hard copy of the Submittal shall be provided by theCONTRACTOR. The Submittal receipt date will be the date that the hard copy is received bythe DISTRICT. The FTP address, and associated password information, will be provided bythe DISTRICT Project Manager.

g. Make all modifications noted or indicated by DISTRICT and return revised prints, copies, orsamples until accepted. Revised Submittals must be complete and conformed, including allpages/sheets with the required revisions and any additional or replacement pages/sheets.Direct specific attention in writing, or on revised Submittals, to changes other than themodifications called for by the DISTRICT on previous Submittals. Subsequent review cyclesfor returned or revised Submittals shall replicate the process described in items d. through f.above.

h. If the DISTRICT’s review action is “ACCEPTED AS NOTED”, the Submittal will bestamped as such, and electronically transmitted back to the CONTRACTOR. Upon receipt ofthis notification from the DISTRICT, The CONTRACTOR shall resubmit one (1) conformedhard copy with an electronic PDF file format to the DISTRICT for final distribution. If theSubmittal is required to be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in theState of Florida, it shall be signed and sealed at this time. Submittal will not be consideredfinal until all copies have been received by the DISTRICT. Submittal will be stamped“DISTRIBUTION COPY (PREVIOUSLY ACCEPTED)” by the DISTRICT. Prints ofaccepted Submittals transmitted for final distribution will not be further reviewed and are notto be revised. If errors are discovered during manufacture or fabrication, correct theSubmittal and resubmit for review.

i. Following completion of the WORK and prior to final payment, furnish those drawingsnecessary to indicate "AS CONSTRUCTED" conditions, including field modifications, in thenumber of copies specified. Furnish additional copies for insertion in equipment instructionbooks as required. All such copies shall be clearly marked "AS BUILT DRAWING."

j. WORK requiring a Compliance Submittal shall not be commenced or shipped until theSubmittal has been stamped "ACCEPTED AS SUBMITTED" or "ACCEPTED AS NOTED"by the DISTRICT.

k. Keep a copy or sample of each Compliance Submittal in good order at the Site.

3. Copies of the equipment CONTRACTOR’s erection drawings and other Compliance Submittalsrequired for the installation of equipment furnished by others under separate Contract forinstallation under this Contract will be transmitted to CONTRACTOR by the DISTRICT in thefinal distribution of such Submittals.

4. Information to MANUFACTURER’s District Office: MANUFACTURERS and Suppliers ofEquipment and Materials shall furnish copies of all agreements, drawings, specifications,operating instructions, correspondence, and other matters associated with this Contract to theMANUFACTURER’s district office servicing the DISTRICT. Insofar as practicable, all businessmatters relative to Equipment and Materials included in this Contract shall be conducted throughsuch local district offices.

E. DISTRICT's Review:


1. The DISTRICT will review and return Compliance Submittals to CONTRACTOR withappropriate notations. Instruction books and similar Submittals will be reviewed by theDISTRICT for general content but not for substance.

2. The DISTRICT's acceptance of Compliance Submittals will not relieve CONTRACTOR from hisresponsibility as stated in the Section 00700 – General Terms and Conditions.

F. Instruction Books / Operation & Maintenance Manuals:

1. Equipment instruction books and manuals shall be prepared by the MANUFACTURER and shallinclude the following:

a. Index and tabs

b. Instructions for installation, start-up, operation, inspection, maintenance, parts lists andrecommended spare parts, and data sheets showing model numbers

c. Applicable drawings

d. Name of contact person, phone number, and address of the nearest authorized service facility

e. Attached to the above shall be a notice of the exact warranty effective dates, beginning andending.

f. All additional data specified

2. Information listed above shall be submitted electronically in a PDF file format and also be boundinto hard-back binders of three-ring type. Sheet size shall be 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches. Bindercolor shall be yellow for Electrical and Electronics and brown for Miscellaneous Equipment.Capacity shall be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches, but sufficient to contain and utilize sheets with ease.

a. Instruction Books/Operation & Maintenance Manuals shall contain the following:

i. Equipment name

ii. MANUFACTURER’s name

iii. Project name

iv. Contract number

v. Reference to applicable Drawing No. & Technical Specifications Section

b. Format: The overall manual should be constructed around certain types of structures orequipment in the Project, and not merely assembled by technical specification section, so thatall pertinent data needed by personnel to operate or maintain the equipment or structure is inone (1) manual (as far as is practical). The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with theDISTRICT as to how the manuals are to be assembled.

G. Samples:

1. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the following:

a. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices

b. Full range of color, texture, and pattern

1.04 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS:

A. Miscellaneous Submittals are comprised of technical reports, administrative Submittals, and guaranteeswhich relate to the WORK, but do not require DISTRICT’s approval prior to proceeding with theWORK. Miscellaneous Submittals may include but are not limited to (at DISTRICT's discretion):

1. Welder qualification tests

2. Welding procedure qualification tests


3. X-ray and radiographic reports

4. Field test reports

5. Concrete cylinder test reports

6. Certification on Materials:

a. Steel mill tests

b. Paint lab tests

c. Cement tests

7. Soil test reports

8. Temperature records

9. Shipping or packing lists

10. Job progress schedules

11. Equipment and Material delivery schedules

12. Progress photographs

13. Warranties and guarantees

14. Fire protection and hydraulic calculations

15. Surveying field notes, preliminary and final Surveyor’s Reports

16. Pump tests

17. Traffic control plan

18. Technical Reports

19. Written Certificates and Guarantees

B. Transmittal of Miscellaneous Submittals:

1. All Miscellaneous Submittals furnished by Subcontractors, MANUFACTURERS, and Suppliersshall be submitted to DISTRICT by CONTRACTOR in the form of one (1) hard copy with anelectronic PDF file format, unless otherwise specified.

a. Identify each miscellaneous Submittal by Project name and number, Contract title andnumber, and the specification section and article number marked thereon or in the letter oftransmittal. Unidentifiable Submittals will be returned for proper identification.

b. Check and stamp Miscellaneous Submittals of Subcontractors, Suppliers, andMANUFACTURERS with CONTRACTOR's approval prior to transmitting them to theDISTRICT. CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval shall constitute a representation to theDISTRICT that CONTRACTOR has either determined and verified all information, or heassumes full responsibility for doing so, and that he has coordinated Miscellaneous Submittalwith the requirements of the WORK and the Contract Documents.

c. At the time of each submission, call to the attention of the DISTRICT in the letter oftransmittal any deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

d. Make all modifications noted or indicated by DISTRICT and return revised prints, or copiesuntil accepted. Direct specific attention in writing, or on revised Submittals, to changes otherthan the modifications called for by the DISTRICT on previous Submittals. After Submittalshave been accepted, submit copies thereof for final distribution.

2. Test Reports:


a. Responsibilities of CONTRACTOR and DISTRICT regarding tests and inspections ofEquipment and Materials and completed WORK are set forth elsewhere in these ContractDocuments.

b. The party specified responsible for testing or inspection shall in each case, unless otherwisespecified, arrange for the testing laboratory or reporting agency to distribute test reports in theform of one (1) hard copy with an electronic PDF file format to the following parties:

i. DISTRICT

ii. Resident Project Representative

iii. CONTRACTOR

iv. MANUFACTURER or supplier

C. DISTRICT'S Review:

1. DISTRICT will review Miscellaneous Submittals for indications of WORK or materialdeficiencies within fifteen (15) working days in DISTRICT's office for original Submittals and ten(10) working days for reviewing resubmittals.

2. DISTRICT will respond to CONTRACTOR on those Miscellaneous Submittals which indicateWORK or material deficiency.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SUBMITTAL LOG: CONTRACTOR shall maintain an accurate Submittal Log and a Distribution List forthe duration of the WORK, showing current status of all Submittals and Distributees at all times in a formacceptable to the DISTRICT. CONTRACTOR shall make the Submittal Log available to the DISTRICT forits review on request, and shall bring a copy of the Submittal Log to all Progress Meetings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01310 COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (Construction Schedule): The WORK under thisContract shall be planned, scheduled, executed, and reported by the CONTRACTOR. TheCONTRACTOR shall adhere to established technical standards for CPM (Critical Path Method)scheduling using the computerized PDM (Precedence Diagram Method), unless otherwise directed bythe DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR is required to provide all Construction Schedules in electronicformat.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed Cost Loaded Construction Baseline Schedule (BaselineSchedule) showing all WORK required under the Contract and scheduled within the time constraintsset forth under the Contract. The DISTRICT will review and comment on the Baseline Schedulesubmittal as per 2.03. Upon acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall not change the accepted BaselineSchedule without prior concurrence of the DISTRICT. The Baseline Schedule shall be updated toshow actual progress. Any proposed changes in the schedule activities, original duration, logic,activity constraints, other than progress, shall be incorporated into a request for a revision to theaccepted Baseline Schedule and submitted for review and acceptance.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating its own schedules (includingsubcontractors) as well as the construction activities of others as required to fully execute the WORK.

1.02 SOFTWARE/INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall use the latest version of Oracle/Primavera P6 Professional ProjectManagement (P6) for creating and updating all Construction Schedules and reports. No otherscheduling software programs will be accepted.

B. To ensure compatibility for DISTRICT asset accounting, the DISTRICT will provide Activity Codes(for all Asset and Non-asset Activities), and assist the CONTRACTOR in developing a WorkBreakdown Structure (WBS) to be entered into the scheduling software as referenced in Section 2.02.The Construction Schedule (i.e. the accepted Baseline Schedule and all Schedule Updates) shall beused as the basis for payment.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK covered by this SECTION with personnel havingsubstantial experience in the use of the latest version of P6 scheduling software on constructionprojects which required the development and maintenance of the schedule throughout the Projectduration.

B. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to work with each subcontractor and supplier to obtaininformation pertinent to the planning and updating of their respective activities in the schedules.

1.04 DEALING WITH SUBSTITUTES:

A. All versions of the CONTRACTOR’s Construction Schedule shall be based solely on the WORK asawarded, and shall exclude any substitute proposals, even if the CONTRACTOR pursues a substitutionin accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

B. The DISTRICT’s final determination on any proposed substitutions may not be made until after theCONTRACTOR’s Construction Schedule is prepared and accepted. Accepted proposed substitutionsshall be identified in the schedule as Change Orders.

1.05 USE OF FLOAT:

A. Total Float is the amount of time a scheduled activity can be delayed without delaying the completionof the WORK beyond the contractually required end date. Contract Float is the number of days


between the CONTRACTOR’s anticipated date for early completion of the WORK, or specified part,and the corresponding Contract Time. Total Float and Contract Float belong to the Project and are notfor the exclusive benefit of any party. Contract Float and Total Float shall be available to theDISTRICT, consultants, or the CONTRACTOR to accommodate changes in the WORK or to mitigatethe effect of events which may delay performance or completion. The DISTRICT will monitor andoptimize the use of float for the benefit of the Project.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust or remove any float suppression techniques (e.g., preferentialsequencing, out-of-sequence activity relationships, crew movements, equipment use, form reuse,extended durations, imposed dates, etc.) as a prerequisite to a request for an increase in Contract Priceand/or Contract Time. Use of constraints should be minimized and require approval by the DISTRICT.

1.06 EARLY COMPLETION: An early completion schedule is one which anticipates completion of all or aspecified part of the WORK ahead of the corresponding Contract Time. Since Contract and Total Floatsbelong to the Project, the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any extension in Contract Time or recoveryfor any delay incurred because of extensions in an early completion date until all Contract Float is used orconsumed and performance or completion of the WORK extends beyond the Contract Time. The acceptedBaseline Schedule must have a single longest path with zero Total Float. Multiple longest paths are notacceptable.

1.07 NON-COMPLIANCE: The DISTRICT may refuse to recommend/authorize a progress payment in the eventof the CONTRACTOR’s failure, refusal or neglect to provide the required schedule information, since thiswill preclude the proper evaluation of the CONTRACTOR’s progress. Remedies for the CONTRACTOR’sfailure, neglect or refusal to comply with the requirements of this SECTION are in addition, and not limitedto, those provided under other sections of the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL CRITERIA:

A. All Construction Schedules shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and reflect theCONTRACTOR’s plans, means and methods, techniques and sequences for performing of the WORK.

B. The Construction Schedules shall break down the WORK into distinct activities withinterdependencies to the extent required to clearly depict the planned approach for completion of theWORK and to effectively manage the execution of the WORK.

1. The Construction Schedules shall divide the WORK into manageable and logical segments andspecify the progression from the Notice to Proceed (NTP) to Substantial Completion (SC) toFinal Completion (FC) within Contract Time.

2. The Construction Schedule is to include, at minimum, appropriate time allowances forsubmittals, procurement, coordination with others, construction, start-up/check-out (ifapplicable), operational and performance testing (if applicable), commissioning (if applicable),and Contract Close-Out.

3. Site-related activities shall not reflect a combination of work located in separate structures,work corresponding to different divisions of the specifications, work performed by first andsecond tier subcontractors or rough-in and finish work of the same trade.

4. The NTP activity shall be the first activity in the schedule and shall be a Start Milestone, withan assigned 7-day, no holiday calendar. The SC and FC activities shall be Finish Milestones,with assigned “Finish on or Before” constraints, with the Contract SC and FC dates assigned tothe constraints, with a 7-day, no holiday calendar.

5. Primavera Settings:

a. Constraints – Mandatory Starts or Finishes, Start on or Finish on and Late as Possibleconstraints cannot be used in the Construction Schedules.

b. Calculation Settings – Default settings must be used, except that Critical activities mustbe defined as Longest Path activities.


c. Activity Types – Resource Dependent & WBS Summary activity types cannot be usedexcept as directed by the DISTRICT. Most activity types will be set to Task Dependent.

d. Percent (%) Complete Type must be set to Duration.

e. Duration Type must be set to Fixed Duration & Units.

f. There must not be any Curve applied to an activity if the Status % Complete method isgoing to be used to calculate the actual cost.

6. The CONTRACTOR’s Construction Schedule shall include preparation, review and acceptance ofShop Drawings, material fabrication and material deliveries. The first submittal review andacceptance activity durations shall be fifteen (15) working days. Resubmittal review andacceptance cycles shall have activity durations of ten (10) working days. The CONTRACTORshall include only the first submittal review and acceptance cycle for each submittal in theConstruction schedule. If more than one cycle for a submittal occurs, the CONTRACTOR shalladd that cycle to the schedule at the time it occurs. Additional submittal, review and acceptancecycles will require a revision to the Baseline Schedule.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule any requirements (such as submittal reviews) of the DISTRICT,the DESIGN CONSULTANT and others (performing WORK for the DISTRICT) indicated in, orrequired by the Contract Documents. The Construction Schedule shall incorporate appropriateactivities and WORK sequences based upon the Contract Documents.

2.02 RESOURCE AND COST LOADING:

A. Each activity in the Contract Schedule shall be assigned a dollar value in accordance with the physicalvalue of that work in relationship to the Activity Codes/WBS. The total budget value of all activitiesshall equal the Contract Price. The CONTRACTOR shall also indicate the estimated duration for eachconstruction activity.

B. The Major Categories for the WORK being performed shall be broken down by the following AssetTemplates and entered as a separate Activity Code:

1. Canals:

a. Land Improvements

i. Erosion, Sediment & Turbidity Control

ii. Demolition

iii. Canal Bank Regrading

iv. Inlets

v. Culverts with Endwalls, Sand-Cement Rip Rap and In-Line Check Valves

vi. Boat Ramp

vii. Guardrail

viii. Vehicle Gates

ix. Chainlink Gates and Fencing

x. Signs

xi. Sodding

C. The WBS for the logical construction sequencing, at a minimum shall consist of the following:

1. General (e.g., NTP, SC, FC, General Conditions, Bonds & Insurance, Punchlist)

2. Submittal Preparation

3. Submittal Review and Acceptance – If there are engineering costs associated with a submittal,those costs must be approved by the DISTRICT before they can be cost loaded in theConstruction Schedule. Once approved, a separate activity named “Submittal Accepted” withzero (0) days duration can be added with the cost loading applied. No payment will be madefor submittals until the review and acceptance process has been completed for that submittal.

4. Fabrication & Delivery - If there are costs associated with the Fabrication and Delivery, then aseparate cost loaded Delivery Activity must be added with one (1) day duration, and assigned


to its appropriate Activity Code/WBS. The DISTRICT will only pay for materials oncedelivered and stored in a manner that complies with all the Contract Documents.

5. The WBS for the remaining construction related work shall be broken down in sufficientdetail for conveying the sequence at which the CONTRACTOR intends to construct theProject.

D. Schedules where activities are not assigned both an Activity Code and WBS will not be accepted.

E. Cost Resource Loading:

1. A single unique resource for the cost loading of all activities shall be created in the resourcedictionary.

2. The resource type for costs shall be “Nonlabor”.

3. Cost loading of activities shall be lump sum loading of the Budgeted Cost field or BudgetedUnits.

4. Activity Costs shall be updated using the Actual Nonlabor Cost field or, if “Calculating Costsfrom Units”, change the Duration % Complete or Remaining Duration for each activity. TheDuration % Complete must match the Cost % Complete or a specific reason must be given inthe narrative for this discrepancy and the DISTRICT will determine if the discrepancy isacceptable.

5. All costs must be displayed to two (2) decimal places.

6. The Costs for Mobilization and Demobilization activities must be equal.

F. Financial Periods and Stored Period Performance:

1. The Financial Periods must be set for the duration of the Project and start on the first day of themonth and finish on the last day of the month.

2. “Stored Period Performance” must be used on a monthly basis in order for the “Actual ThisPeriod Nonlabor Cost” to be displayed correctly in the reports.

G. Stored Material - For those Construction Schedule activities of WORK that will use Stored Materials,the material or equipment delivery activities related to the WORK will be cost loaded with enoughmoney to cover the stored material. The cost loading of activities related to the work‐in‐place will bereduced by the amount of the stored material costs loaded into the delivery activities. TheCONTRACTOR must provide a list of materials and/or equipment that will be paid for under StoredMaterials prior to acceptance of the Baseline Schedule so that the DISTRICT can check for proper costloading.

H. If the WORK includes items covered by allowances, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that WORK iscompleted within the limits of the Contract Time. The Construction Schedule shall incorporate theCONTRACTOR’s best estimate of the activities and logic associated with the allowances.

2.03 COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL:

A. The Construction Schedule submittal, which refers to both the Baseline Schedule and all ScheduleUpdates, are to consist of the following items:

1. An electronic file containing PDF formats of all required reports and graphics, including a writtennarrative.

2. An electronic backup of the Construction Schedule in Primavera P6 XER format.

3. For Schedule Updates, a copy of the payment application is required. The Period Ending date in theDISTRICT Application for Payment must match the Data Date of the corresponding ScheduleUpdate.

B. The Schedule Narrative Report for the Construction Schedule shall consist of a written description ofhow the WORK will be accomplished in accordance with the planned Construction Schedule. TheSchedule Narrative accompanying each Schedule Update shall, at a minimum, compare currentprogress and cost performance to the accepted baseline schedule for all milestones and activities,including longest path activities. If there are potential or actual delays, the narrative shall state the


cause of the delay and impact to the Construction Schedule and define steps that have been taken orintend to be taken to mitigate delay impacts. The CONTRACTOR shall list any proposed changes innetwork activities and logic that will need to be incorporated into a revision to the Baseline Schedule.The narrative shall provide sufficient detail to allow the DISTRICT to verify the progress of theWORK, compare actual versus planned activities, and identify assumptions made in scheduling work,including Change Order work. The CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention, in writing, toadjustments or corrections made, either in response to the DISTRICT’s comments on the previoussubmittal or otherwise. A Schedule Narrative Report must be provided for all Baseline Schedules andSchedule Updates even if there are no detailed comments for each sub-heading.

1. Schedule Narrative Report

a. The Schedule Narrative Report shall show the following sub-headings with detailedcomments:

i. Progress, issues, delays, and claims

ii. Schedule changes, including out-of-sequence work

iii. Milestones

iv. Critical submittals and Procurement items

v. Response to DISTRICT Review comments from previous submittal on an item byitem basis.

b. It shall be an electronic color PDF – 8 ½ x 11 portrait format file.

C. Required Schedule Reports and Graphics - Bar Chart reports/P6 (plf) layouts will be provided by theDISTRICT and imported for use by the CONTRACTOR.

1. Schedule/Leveling Report (Schedlog)

a. The report shall indicate software settings and calculations generated by Primaverasoftware.

b. Shall be an electronic color PDF - 8 ½ x 11 portrait format file.

2. WBS with Cash Flow Diagram (Grouped by WBS)

a. Bar Chart shall indicate all activities grouped by WBS and sorted by Early Start, EarlyFinish and Total Float.

b. Cash Flow Diagram shall be shown at the end of the Bar Chart, which shows budget andactual monthly bars, and cumulative curves.

c. Shall be an electronic color PDF - 11 x 17 landscape format file.

3. Longest Path Bar Chart (No Grouping)

a. Bar Chart shall indicate all longest path activities without grouping and sorted by EarlyStart, Early Finish and Total Float.

b. Bar Chart shall be an electronic color PDF - 11 x 17 landscape format file.

4. Pay App - Expanded (Grouped by Activity Codes)

a. Bar Chart shall indicate all activities grouped by Activity Codes and sorted by ActivityID.


5. Pay App - Rollup (Grouped by Activity Codes)

a. Bar Chart shall indicate all activities grouped by Activity Codes rolled up per each majorActivity Code. The application for payment line items must match this layout.


6. Earned Value Report

a. The report shall show Earned Value information comparison between the acceptedBaseline and the Current Schedule Update.

b. The report shall be an electronic color PDF - 11 x 17 landscape format file.


D. Draft Schedule Reports – The following reports are to be provided prior to the formal submission ofthe Schedule Update and application for payment for the purpose of agreeing upon the Duration %Complete and Cost % Complete of each activity.

1. WBS with Cash Flow Diagram

2. Pay App - Expanded

3. Longest Path

E. Prior to each Schedule Update submittal, the DISTRICT and the CONTRACTOR will agree upon thephysical progress of the WORK (Duration % Complete of each activity), and the value (Cost %Complete) of the scheduled work in place. The Duration % Complete must match the Cost %Complete, or a specific reason must be given in the Schedule Narrative Report.

F. All documents shall show the Project ID and Name. The DISTRICT’s review shall not extend to theCONTRACTOR’s means, methods, or techniques, the correctness of which shall remain the soleresponsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

G. All schedules shall be in accordance with the Contract Time requirements of the Contract. Neither theDISTRICT’s review of the Construction Schedule, nor the DISTRICT’s statement of “Accepted AsSubmitted”, will relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with Contract Timerequirements, adhering to those sequences of work indicated in or required by the Contract Documents,or from completing any omitted WORK within the Contract Time.

H. Acceptance by the DISTRICT of the Baseline Schedule and Schedule Updates shall be a CONDITIONPRECEDENT to the processing of Applications for Payment.

2.04 INITIAL AND REVISED COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION BASELINE SCHEDULE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit their Initial Cost Loaded Construction Baseline Schedule to theDISTRICT for review and acceptance within 30 calendar days after Contract Execution and prior toNTP. It will be reviewed for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents. If theschedule is not accepted and requires revisions, the CONTRACTOR will revise this InitialConstruction Baseline Schedule and resubmit it for review and acceptance within ten (10) calendardays.

B. Schedule Naming Structure: Once the Initial Construction Baseline Schedule is accepted, it becomesthe CONTRACTOR’s Baseline Schedule Revision 0 and is the basis for monitoring theCONTRACTOR’s progress against milestones, Contract Time, and the evaluation and reconciliation ofextensions in Contract Time. From then on, all activities, original durations, and their relationshipsmay not be changed, added, or deleted without the prior approval of the DISTRICT. TheCONTRACTOR’s Baseline Schedule Revision 0 must be revised when it is no longer useful as a statusand control mechanism as determined by the DISTRICT. All changes must be coordinated with andapproved by the DISTRICT. Contract Time (including all contracted milestones) cannot be changedwithout a formal Change Order approved by the DISTRICT. When a revision to the Baseline Scheduleis required, a new revised Baseline Schedule shall be submitted in accordance with change procedures,for review and acceptance by the DISTRICT. Revisions to the Baseline Schedule shall follow thenaming sequence listed below: (commas (“,” or ampersands (“&”) cannot be used in the namingstructure because they are recognized as commands by Primavera).

Project Name – R0A-U0 1st Submission of Baseline Schedule.Project Name – R0B-U0 2nd Submission of Baseline Schedule, which is accepted.Project Name – R1A-U0 1st Submission of Revision to the Accepted Baseline Schedule

R0B-U0, which is accepted.Project Name – R2A-U0 1st Submission of revised Baseline Schedule R1A-U0, which

is accepted.Project Name – R3A-U0 1st Submission of revised Baseline Schedule R2A-U0, which

is accepted.


C. Baseline Schedule revisions shall accurately reflect all approved Change Orders including the exactduration and cost. They will be reviewed for conformance to the requirements of the ContractDocuments as amended by Change Orders.

D. Upon execution of a Change Order, a new Activity Code for that Change Order must be created. Allactivities associated with that Change Order will be assigned to both the new Activity Code and theircorresponding WBS. Both the Application for Payment and the layout report, Pay App - Rollup, willhave a line item indicating the new Change Order.

E. The cost loading must not be changed from any Baseline Schedule Activities as a result of an executedChange Order. Original duration and logic may be changed on the Baseline Schedule Activities but thedollars amounts can only be changed by adding a new Change Order activity. This is applicable forboth additive and deductive Change Orders.

F. If a particular Scope of Work (SOW) has been deleted in a Change Order, the activity associated withthat SOW must have the proper logic that causes both the new deductive Change Order Activity andthe Baseline Schedule Activity to progress equally so the costs calculate correctly for that SOW.

G. If a Baseline Schedule Activity becomes associated with a Change Order that affects its originalduration or logic, then the Activity Name must include the Change Order. (e.g. ***CO#01***).

H. If a new activity is added because of an executed Change Order both the Activity ID and the ActivityName must reflect the associated Change Order. (e.g. CO#01-A2500, Additional Silt Fence***CO#01***).

I. Baseline Schedule Activity ID’s must not be changed or deleted.

J. An executed Change Order may require multiple activities broken down in sufficient detail to conveythe new SOW.

2.05 COST LOADED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE UPDATES:

A. A Schedule Update is a copy of the accepted Baseline Schedule with progress added. Progress isDuration % Complete.

B. The Schedule Update must be submitted by the CONTRACTOR each month with each pay applicationor as directed by the DISTRICT. The Schedule Update will indicate actual performed WORK andWORK forecast through Project completion. The actual schedule data shall record when WORK wasperformed. Forecast data will be calculated by the schedule.

C. All out of sequence activities that originally had a finish to start relationship, but became a Start toStart or Finish to Finish relationship must be corrected in the Schedule Update. For other out ofsequence relationships, a revision to the baseline is required.

D. Each Schedule Update shall be named beginning with the Accepted Baseline Number followed by theUpdate number beginning with “1A” as follows:

Project Name – R0B-U1A 1st submitted Update of the accepted Baseline R0B, which wasrejected.

Project Name – R0B-U1B Resubmittal of 1st Update, which was accepted.

Project Name – R0B-U2A 2nd submitted Update of the accepted Baseline R0B, whichwas rejected.

Project Name – R0B-U2B Resubmittal of 2nd Update, which was accepted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MONTHLY UPDATE CYCLE:

A. Schedule Update Submittals are due every 30 days and are to be attached to each Application forPayment. The Schedule Update Total Actual Cost to Date must match the Application for Payment


WORK Completed and Stored to Date amount. The DISTRICT will advise the CONTRACTOR ofany change to the due dates.

B. See Paragraph 2.03.D for the Draft Schedule Reports that are to be provided prior to the formalsubmission of the Schedule Update and application for payment.

3.02 CHANGES:

A. Within ten (10) days after a schedule problem is identified by either CONTRACTOR or DISTRICT, orat any time the percentage of the dollar value for completed work is 10 % less than the value of thescheduled WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a Construction Recovery Schedule that identifiesthe cause of the Change and any actions required by the CONTRACTOR to recover the schedule andcomplete the WORK within Contract Time. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly undertakeappropriate action, at no additional cost to the DISTRICT, to recover the schedule whenever thecurrent schedule shows that the CONTRACTOR did not or cannot achieve a milestone established inthe Contract.

B. Appropriate recovery actions include, but are not limited to, assignment of additional labor,subcontractors, equipment, shift or overtime work, expediting of submittal or deliveries, or anycombination of thereof. Overlapping of activities or sequencing changes shall be deemed appropriateonly if properly substantiated in the submittal. Recovery plans that are accepted by the DISTRICT thatadd, delete, or change activities, activity relationships, durations or constraints and cost or resourceloading must be submitted as a Revision to the Baseline Schedule with zero Total Float in accordancewith this specification. Once the revised baseline is accepted by the DISTRICT, the CONTRACTORmust prepare a Schedule Update of the Baseline Schedule with all actuals to date and submit it foracceptance.

C. The CONTRACTOR’s refusal, failure or neglect to take appropriate recovery action or to submit awritten recovery statement shall constitute reasonable evidence that the CONTRACTOR is notprosecuting the WORK, or separable part, with the diligence that will ensure its completion within theContract Time. Such lack of action shall constitute sufficient basis for the DISTRICT to recommendthe withholding of some or all of any payment due and/or shall be considered grounds for terminationof the Contract by the DISTRICT in accordance with Article 15 of the General Terms & Conditions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: This SECTION specifies administrative and procedural requirements forconstruction photographs.



1.02 SUBMITTALS: Submit photographs electronically as specified in SECTION 01300 and in PART 3, thisSECTION.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Photographs and video shall be clear and sufficient to show significant detail, notblurred, or taken in shadow, nor too distant. The DISTRICT may require that the photographs or video beretaken should the quality be insufficient. Costs for such re-takes are the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility atno extra cost to the DISTRICT.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS: Specified in PART 3, this SECTION.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COLOR AUDIO VIDEO TAPING OF CONSTRUCTION AREA:

A. Prior to beginning any construction, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare a color audio video recording ofall the areas to be affected by construction in high definition video.

B. The audio video recording shall be done within the two-week period prior to placement of materials orequipment on the construction area and furnished one week prior to the start of construction. Theaudio video recording shall be done with a DISTRICT Representative present.

C. To preclude the possibility of tampering or editing in any manner, all video recordings shall, byelectronic means, generate and display continuously and simultaneously on the screen digitalinformation to include the date and time of recording. The time information shall consist of hours,minutes and seconds, separated by colons (i.e., 10:35:18).

D. The audio video recording shall consist of one video and one audio track which shall be recordedsimultaneously. All tracks shall consist of original live recordings and thus shall not be copies of otheraudio and video recordings. The audio track shall contain the narrative commentary.

E. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the conveyance used during recording shall becontrolled to provide a usable image. Panning rates and zoom-in, zoom-out rates shall be controlledsufficiently such that playback will produce clarity of the object viewed.

F. All recording shall be done during times of good visibility. No recording shall be done during periodsof visible precipitation, unless otherwise authorized by the DISTRICT.

G. The DISTRICT shall have the authority to designate what areas may be omitted or added for audiovideo coverage.

H. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used, the distance from the camera lens to the ground shallnot be less than eight feet to insure perspective.


I. In some instances, audio video coverage will be required in areas not accessible by conventionalwheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking or special conveyance by theDISTRICT.

J. Areas covered shall include offsite roadways that will be subjected to heavy usage such as for haulroutes or delivery of heavy components or equipment.

3.02 PROGRESS SITE PHOTOGRAPHS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for photographs of the Site to show the existing and generalprogress of the WORK. The photographs shall be provided from both a ground-level and aerialperspective. The CONTRACTOR shall submit monthly progress photographs from Notice to Proceedthrough Final Completion. The DISTRICT will advise as to which views are of interest. Photographsshall be taken of the following areas and at the following times.

1. Existing Site conditions before Site WORK is started. Number of views shall be adequate tocover the Site.

2. Progress of the WORK from beginning and throughout construction. Progress photos must beprovided with each pay request. Pay requests will not be considered acceptable untilphotographs are provided. Number of views shall be adequate to cover the Site.

3. Finished Project after completion of WORK. Number of views shall be adequate to show thefinished WORK.

4. If Project is not completed during the Contract Time, or authorized extensions, photographsshall continue to be taken at no increase in Contract Price.

B. Photographs shall be taken with at least eight (8) megapixel minimum resolution.

C. Provide a CD containing all photographic images in JPG format. Label CD with the name andContract number of Project, name of CONTRACTOR, description of view, and date photograph wastaken.

D. Deliver CD to DISTRICT with pay applications.

3.03 ADDITIONAL PHOTOGRAPHS:

A. From time to time the DISTRICT may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition toperiodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order, and are notincluded in the Contract Price or an Allowance.

1. The DISTRICT will give the photographer three (3) days' advance notice, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, the photographer shall take additional photographs within 24 hours ofthe DISTRICT’s request.

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to:

a. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of WORK.

b. DISTRICT’s request for special publicity photographs.

c. Special events planned at Project Site.

d. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

e. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project Site.

f. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01410 TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain an effective Quality Control Program thatfulfills the requirements of Article 13 "Warranty and Guarantee, Tests and Inspections,Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work" of the GENERAL TERMS &CONDITIONS.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall establish and implement a Quality Control Plan to perform sufficientinspection of all items of the WORK, including that of Subcontractors, to insure conformanceto the Technical Specifications and the Drawings with respect to the materials, workmanship,construction, equipment performance, and identification.

3. The CONTRACTOR's job supervisory staff may be used for quality control, supplemented asnecessary by additional personnel for surveillance or special technicians to provide capabilityfor the controls required by the Technical Specifications. The CONTRACTOR's QualityControl Plan must clearly identify the quality control leader and personnel organizationalsystem. The leader must have the authority to direct the removal and replacement of defectivework.

4. After the Contract is awarded and before the construction begins, the CONTRACTOR shallmeet with the DISTRICT or its representative to discuss quality control requirements. Themeeting shall develop mutual understanding relative to the details of the Quality Control Plan,including the appropriate forms to be used for recording the quality control operations,inspections, administration of the Quality Control Plan, and the interrelationship of theCONTRACTOR and the DISTRICT inspection.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall submit his written Quality Control Plan for review, describing theactivities and listing those inspection and testing activities that the CONTRACTOR willperform prior to beginning the WORK. The CONTRACTOR’s Quality Control Plan shalldescribe how he will communicate timely notification to allow for testing and inspectionactivities performed by the DISTRICT, or its representatives, for on and off-site constructionactivities

6. All compliance inspections shall be recorded on the appropriate forms, including but not limitedto the specific items required in each SECTION of the Technical Specifications. The completedforms, including record of corrective actions taken, shall be furnished to the DISTRICT. TheDISTRICT's quality control representative will maintain a list of all deficiencies which are notcorrected the same day as they are discovered.

7. Should recurring deficiencies in an item or items indicate that the Quality Control Plan is notadequate, the CONTRACTOR shall take corrective actions as directed by the DISTRICT toupdate the Quality Control Plan, to satisfactorily address and resolve any reoccurringdeficiencies.



1.02 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES:

A. All tests which require the services of a laboratory to determine compliance with the ContractDocuments shall be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory acceptable to theDISTRICT. The laboratory shall be staffed with experienced technicians, and shall be properly


equipped, ACI certified, and fully qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specifiedstandards.

1.03 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR:

A. The testing that the DISTRICT will coordinate and pay for is described in paragraph 1.04 below. Allother testing required in connection with the performance of the WORK (which are identified as theCONTRACTOR's responsibility in the Contract Documents) shall be performed and paid for by theCONTRACTOR, and a certified copy of the results will be furnished to the DISTRICT within five (5)days of the test.

B. The CONTRACTOR is also responsible for all testing and inspection services required to achieve aneffective Quality Control Program, to assure that the WORK strictly complies with the Contractrequirements. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs for such services. The CONTRACTOR shallalso pay for any tests performed by the DISTRICT which do not meet the requirements of theTechnical Specifications and as described below.

1.04 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES FURNISHED BY DISTRICT:

A. The DISTRICT will secure the services of a materials testing company, for field and laboratory tests,for certain items of the WORK. The DISTRICT will pay all charges for services on: cast-in-placeconcrete, moisture density (Proctor) and relative density tests on embankment, fill and backfillmaterials, in-place field density tests on embankments and fills. The field sampling and testing will beperformed in the general manner indicated in the Technical Specifications, with minimal interferenceto the construction operations.

While the CONTRACTOR may request testing in order to proceed to a following construction stage,the DISTRICT will determine the exact time and location of the field sampling and testing, and mayrequire additional sampling and/or testing as necessary to determine that the materials and equipmentconform with the CONTRACTOR-submitted data and with the Contract Documents.

1. The DISTRICT shall be reimbursed by the CONTRACTOR for the cost of anyCONTRACTOR-requested tests or inspections, or tests on an item purported to be ready, whichfail to meet the Technical Specification requirements. The DISTRICT may withhold suchamounts from payments otherwise due to the CONTRACTOR.

B. Arrangements for the delivery of samples and test specimens to the testing laboratory under thisparagraph will be made by the DISTRICT. The testing laboratory shall perform all laboratory testswithin a reasonable time consistent with the specified standards and shall furnish a written report ofeach test.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all sample materials and cooperate in the sampling and field testingactivities, interrupting the WORK when necessary.

D. When sampling or testing activities are performed in the field by testing laboratory personnel, theCONTRACTOR shall furnish personnel and facilities to assist in the activities.

E. The testing company contracted by the DISTRICT will not be authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Approve or accept any portion of the WORK.

3. Perform any duties of the CONTRACTOR.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance notice of any work for which hemay desire required testing for compliance by the DISTRICT.

1.05 TRANSMITTAL OF TEST REPORTS: Written reports of test and engineering data furnished by theCONTRACTOR shall be submitted as specified in SECTION 01300.




END OF SECTION


SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This SECTION includes requirements of a temporary nature not normally incorporated into finalWORK. It may include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Utility services

2. Construction and support facilities

3. Construction aids

4. Fire protection



2. SECTION 01590 - Field Offices and Sheds

1.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS:

A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the publications of the organizations listed below in effect at thetime of the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. See thevarious paragraphs for the specified standard. In the case of a conflict between the requirements of thisSECTION and those of the listed document, the requirements of this SECTION shall prevail.

1. American National Standards Association (ANSI):

a. A10 Series - Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition

b. ANSI/ASME PTC 19.1-1998 Test Uncertainty, Instrument and Apparatus

2. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

a. Electrical Design Library - Temporary Electrical Facilities

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers

b. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

c. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

6. Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and BridgeConstruction

7. Florida Trench Safety Act (90-96, Laws of Florida)

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01300.

B. Site Plan: Submit to the DISTRICT a Site Plan indicating CONTRACTOR's facilities including:

1. Trailers

2. Equipment Yard


3. Parking

4. Traffic Control

1.04 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Regulations: Comply with all applicable industry standards and all applicable laws and regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to:

1. Building Code requirements

2. Utility company regulations

3. Police, Fire Department, and rescue squad rules

4. Environmental protection regulations

B. Standards:

1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241, and ANSI A10 Series standards "Temporary ElectricalFacilities."

2. Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service.Install service in compliance with NFPA 70.

C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utilitybefore use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Provide new materials and equipment. If acceptable to the DISTRICT, undamaged previously usedmaterials and equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials and equipmentsuitable for the use intended, of capacity for required usage, and meeting applicable codes andstandards. Comply with all applicable requirements of DIVISIONS 2 through 16.

B. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.

C. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet(30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system.Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.

D. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-to 120V plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-faultcircuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.

E. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed toabrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords ifsingle lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safelength-voltage ratio.

F. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required foradequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage.Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.

G. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporaryoffices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC,dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for theexposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and sizerequired by location and class of fire exposure.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:

A. General:

1. Engage the appropriate local utility company to extend temporary electric and phone service tothe Project area from nearby existing utilities. Where utility company provides only part of theservice, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Complywith utility company recommendations.

2. Provide adequate utility capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to availability oftemporary utilities at the Site, or in remote areas without services, provide trucked-in servicesas required for start-up and construction operations.

3. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for adequate construction, safety andsecurity. Modify, relocate and extend systems as WORK progresses. Repair damage caused byinstallation or use of temporary facilities. Grade the areas of Site affected by temporaryinstallations to required elevations and grades, and clean the area. Remove on completion ofWORK or until service or facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use ofcompleted permanent facilities.

4. The types of temporary construction utilities and facilities required include, but are not limitedto, potable drinking water, wastewater, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of WORK,ventilation, electrical power, lighting, hoisting facilities and ladders.

5. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for requiredinspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certifications and permits foruse.

6. Materials used for temporary service shall not be used in the permanent system unless sospecified or acceptable to the DISTRICT.

3.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING:

A. New Service:

1. Arrange with utility company to extend existing electric service to temporary office trailers.

2. Connect temporary service in a manner directed by utility company officials. Provide separatemeter for metering of power used by all entities authorized to be at or perform WORK at theProject Site.

3. The electric service shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics for the variousconstruction tools, machinery, lights, heating and air conditioning, pumps, and other toolsrequired by CONTRACTOR and his Subcontractors. In areas of the Project where permanentor temporary power service from the local utility is not available, the CONTRACTOR shallsupply and maintain engine-driven, power-generator sets.

4. Provide weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient to accommodateconstruction operations requiring power, use of power tools, electrical heating and lighting.Provide overload protection. Supply power for electric welding, if any, from engine-driven,power-generator sets.

5. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of WORK when natural light is not adequate forWORK.

6. Sufficient light shall be provided for general construction areas, with additional sufficientlighting for specific tasks and to meet safety requirements.

B. Use of Permanent System:


1. Prior to use of permanent system to be installed by the power company for constructionpurposes, obtain written permission of the DISTRICT.

2. Maintain permanent system as specified for temporary facilities.

C. Costs of Installation and Operation:

1. Pay fees and charges for permits and applications.

2. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, removal of temporary services, and restoration of anypermanent facilities used.

3. Pay costs of electrical power used (if applicable).

4. Pay costs of furnishing, operating, and maintaining engine-driven power-generator sets, whereapplicable.

3.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION:

A. General:

1. Provide temporary heat, ventilation and cooling as required to maintain adequate environmentalconditions in temporary office trailers and storage sheds and to facilitate progress of theWORK, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protectmaterials and finishes from damage. Protect from adverse affects of low temperatures or highhumidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

2. Methods of heating and fuel shall be suitable for particular purposes. Portable heaters shall bestandard approved units with controls.

B. Costs of Installation and Operation:

1. Pay fees and charges for applications, permits, and inspections.

2. Pay costs of installation, operation, maintenance, removal of equipment, and restoration ofexisting or permanent facilities if used.

3. Pay cost of power and fuel used.

3.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE:

A. General:

1. Arrange with local telephone service company to extend existing direct line telephone service tothe DISTRICT’s field office site for the use of the DISTRICT and DISTRICT appointedpersonnel.

2. Telephone Service: Local Provider.

3. CONTRACTOR shall arrange with local cellular/mobile telephone service company to providemobile telephone service for use by CONTRACTOR and so CONTRACTOR can be reachedthroughout the entire Project area during normal working hours.

B. Costs of Installation and Operation:

1. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local calls. Tollcharges shall be paid by the party who places the call.

3.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES:

A. CONTRACTOR-Furnished Facilities:

1. Furnish, install and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use through construction period.Remove on completion of WORK.


2. Provide temporary sanitary facilities for all construction workers under this Contract andrepresentatives at the Site.

3. Toilet facilities shall be of the chemical-aerated recirculation or combustion type, properlyvented and fully enclosed with a glass- fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbentmaterial.

3.06 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AIDS:

A. General:

1. Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel, available for DISTRICTobservers’ use, and to facilitate the execution of the WORK; scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs,ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, and other such facilities andequipment.

2. Materials may be new or used, must be suitable for the intended purpose and meet therequirements of applicable codes, regulations and standards.

3.07 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL:

A. Relocation: Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage or WORKrequirements, and to accommodate requirements of DISTRICT and other CONTRACTORs at the Site.

B. Removal: Remove temporary materials, equipment and services when construction needs can be metand allowed by use of permanent construction, or at completion of the Project.

C. Repair: Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities.

1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids.

2. Grade the areas of the Site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and cleanthe area.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01530 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes General Requirements for:

1. Protection of Work

2. Protection of existing property

3. Barriers

4. Security

5. Environmental controls

6. Access roads and parking areas

7. Traffic control and use of roadways


1. SECTION 02435 Turbidity Control and Monitoring

1.02 REFERENCES:

A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)

1. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY:

A. General:

1. Provide for the protection of the Work as set forth in GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS.Provide protection at all times against rain, wind, storms, frost, freezing, condensation, or heatso as to maintain all Work and Equipment and Materials free from injury or damage. At the endof each day all new Work likely to be damaged shall be appropriately protected.

2. Notify DISTRICT immediately at any time operations are stopped due to conditions whichmake it impossible to continue operations or to obtain proper results.

3. Construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keepexcavations, pits, and trenches dewatered sufficiently to permit continuous construction.

B. Property Other than DISTRICT’s:

1. Provide for the protection of property as set forth in the GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS.Report immediately to the owners thereof and promptly repair damage to existing facilitiesresulting from construction operations.

2. Names and telephone numbers of representatives of the power company having jurisdictionover power lines in the Work area can be obtained from the DISTRICT. CONTRACTOR shallcontact the power company a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to performing Work within500' of power transmission line property, right-of-way or easement lines.


3. The applicable requirements specified for protection of the Work shall also apply to theprotection of existing property of others.

4. Restore all property affected by CONTRACTOR's operations to the original or better condition.

3.02 BARRIERS:

A. General:

1. Furnish, install, and maintain suitable barriers as required to prevent public entry, protect thepublic, and to protect the Work, existing facilities, trees, and plants from constructionoperations. Remove when no longer needed or at completion of Work.

2. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violaterequirements of applicable codes and standards or regulatory agencies.

3. Barriers shall be of a neat and reasonable uniform appearance, structurally adequate for therequired purposes.

4. Maintain barriers in good repair and clean condition for adequate visibility.

5. Relocate barriers as required by progress of Work.

6. Repair damage caused by installation and restore area to original or better condition. Clean thearea.

3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS:

A. Dust Control:

1. If appropriate to the site location, and at the discretion of the DISTRICT, provide positivemethods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

2. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet or newly-coatedsurfaces.

3. Cover materials transported to and from site as necessary to prevent depositing material onoffsite roadways or creating dust.

B. Water and Erosion Control:

1. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the site, or adjoiningproperties as specified in SECTION 02435. Coordinate with on-site farming operations.

2. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage from cutsand fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and sedimentation.

a. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum.

b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes, and drains.

3. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations and otherconstruction areas, and to direct drainage to proper runoff.

4. Provide, operate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface andground water.

5. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to anyportion of the site or to adjoining areas.

C. Debris Control and Clean-Up:

1. Keep the premises free at all times from accumulations of debris, waste materials, and rubbishcaused by construction operations and employees. Responsibilities shall include:

a. Adequate trash receptacles about the site, emptied promptly when filled.


b. Periodic cleanup to avoid hazards or interference with operations at the site and tomaintain the site in a reasonably neat condition.

c. The keeping of construction materials such as forms and scaffolding neatly stacked.

d. Immediate cleanup to protect the Work by removing splattered concrete, oil, paint,corrosive liquids, and cleaning solutions from walls, floors, and metal surfaces beforesurfaces are marred.

2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. Provide periodicinspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements.

3. Final cleanup is specified in SECTION 01700 Contract Closeout.

D. Pollution Control:

1. Provide methods, means, and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water, oratmosphere by the discharge of hazardous or toxic substances from construction operations.

2. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures required to contain anyspillages, and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of anycontaminated earth off-site in approved locations, and replace with suitable compacted fill andtopsoil.

3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters, sanitary, orstorm sewers.

4. If hazardous materials are discharged, report to authorities as required by Law or Regulationsand notify DISTRICT.

3.04 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND USE OF ROADWAYS:

A. Traffic Control:

1. Provide, operate, and maintain equipment, services, and personnel, with traffic control andprotective devices, as required to expedite vehicular traffic flow on haul routes, at siteentrances, on-site access roads, and parking areas. This includes barricades and other devicesor personnel as necessary to adequately protect the public. Prepare and submit Traffic ControlPlan to DISTRICT for acceptance.

2. Remove temporary equipment and facilities when no longer required. Restore grounds tooriginal, better, or specified conditions.

3. Provide and maintain suitable detours or other temporary expedients if necessary.

4. Bridge over open trenches where necessary to maintain traffic.

5. Consult with governing authorities to establish public thoroughfares which will be used for siteaccess. All operations shall meet the approval of owners or agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Maintenance of Roadways:

1. Repair off-site roads, water control and DISTRICT levees damaged by operations. Keep trafficareas as free as possible of excavated materials and maintain in a manner to eliminate dust,mud, and hazardous conditions.

2. All operations and repairs shall meet the approval of owners or agencies having jurisdiction.

3.05 SECURITY:

A. The CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for initiating and maintaining security at the constructionsite. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the security of, and shall provide thenecessary protection to:


1. Materials and equipment incorporated into the work, or stored on-site prior to incorporation intothe work.

2. Plant and equipment including any equipment furnished for use by the DISTRICT.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall replace, in kind, any materials or equipment lost, damaged or destroyed atits own expense.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01531 MANATEE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: The scope of this SECTION is to instruct all personnel associated with the Project of the potentialpresence of manatees and manatee speed zones, and the need to avoid collisions with and injury to manatees.All construction personnel are responsible for observing water-related activities for the presence ofmanatee(s).

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

A. SECTION 01530 - Temporary Barriers and Controls

B. SECTION 02435 - Turbidity Control and Monitoring

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. Marine Mammal Protection Act of 1972

B. Endangered Species Act of 1973

C. Florida Manatee Sanctuary Act of 1978


PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall advise all construction personnel that there are civil and criminal penaltiesfor harming, harassing, or killing manatees, which are protected under the Marine Mammal ProtectionAct of 1972, the Endangered Species Act of 1973, and the Florida Manatee Sanctuary Act of 1978.The CONTRACTOR may be held responsible for any manatee harmed, harassed, or killed as a resultof construction activities.

B. Siltation barriers shall be installed and shall be made of material in which manatees cannot becomeentangled, shall be properly secured, and shall be monitored regularly to avoid manatee entanglementor entrapment. Barriers shall not impede manatee movement or block manatee entry to or exit fromessential habitat.

C. All vessels associated with the project shall operate at “No Wake/Idle” speeds at all times while in theimmediate area and while in water where the draft of the vessel provides less than four feet clearancefrom the bottom. All vessels shall follow routes of deep water whenever possible.

D. If a manatee is sighted within 100 yards of the project area, all appropriate precautions shall beimplemented by the contractor to ensure protection of the manatee. All in-water operations, includingvessels, must be shutdown if a manatee(s) comes within 50 feet of the operation. Activities will notresume until the manatee(s) has moved beyond the 50-foot radius of the project operation, or until 30minutes elapses if the manatee(s) has not reappeared within 50 feet of the operation. Animals must notbe herded away or harassed into leaving.

E. Any collision with and/or injury to a manatee shall be reported immediately to the DISTRICT’srepresentative and to the “Florida Fish and Wildlife Conservation Commission (FWC) ManateeHotline” at 1-888-404-FWCC (1-888-404-3922). Collision and/or injury should also be reported to theU.S. Fish and Wildlife Service in Jacksonville (1-904-232-2580) for north Florida or Vero Beach (1-561-562-3909) in South Florida.

F. Temporary signs concerning manatees shall be posted prior to and during all in-water project activities,including construction/dredging activities. Awareness signs that have already been approved for this


use by the FWC must be used. Samples of manatee signage are included at the end of thisspecification. All signs shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR upon completion of the project. One(1) sign measuring at least three (3) feet by four (4) feet which reads Caution Boaters: Watch forManatees shall be posted in a location where it is prominently visible to water related constructioncrews. A second sign shall be posted if vessels are associated with the construction, and shall beplaced in a location that is prominently visible to the vessel operator. The second sign shall be at least8 ½ inches by 11 inches and read:

Caution: Manatee Habitat. Idle speed is required if operating a vessel in the construction area.All equipment must be shutdown if a manatee comes within 50 feet of the operation. A collisionwith and/or injury to a manatee shall be reported immediately to the Florida Marine Patrol at 1-888-404-FWCC (1-888-404-3922) and the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service at (1-904-232-2580) fornorth Florida or (561-562-3909) for south Florida.

G. A permanent manatee awareness sign shall be installed and maintained at the docking facility. Thesign shall be three feet by four feet, 125 gauge 61TS aluminum, covered with white and blue, engineergrade, reflective sheeting: black and white, painted lettering: black screened design: and black,engineer grade, reflective tape border. The 3 feet wide by 4 feet long sign shall conform to the FloridaUniform Waterway marking System in accordance with F.S. 327.40-1. The installation of the signshall be made in accordance with DEP Specification for such signs.

H. Verification (photos) that signs have been installed at designated locations shall be provided to theFWS and the Corps before the docking facility begins operations. Signs and pilings remain theresponsibility of the owner(s) and are to be maintained for the life of the docking facility in a manneracceptable to the Corps of Engineers.

Sign 1: Caution Manatee Area


Sign 2: Idle Speed/No Wake

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessaryfor the installation of temporary Project Identification and Informational signs required duringconstruction.



1.02 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit as specified in SECTION 01300.

B. Includes, but not limited to, the following:

1. Shop Drawings, sign materials, sign proofs and product data as applicable.

2. Show content, layout, lettering, colors, and structure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN REQURIEMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall design sign(s) and structure(s) to withstand windand environmental conditions in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations. Provide with a finishadequate to withstand weathering, fading, chipping, and peeling for duration of construction.

2.02 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS:

A. Project Identification:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall construct sign mounting structure(s) and framing of wood or metal,structurally adequate to meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.01 above and/or as shown on theContract Documents.

2. The Project Identification sign panel shall be constructed of minimum 3/4-inch thickness B/Cexterior grade plywood. Panels shall be one sheet with an overall size of 48 inches by 96inches.

3. Rough hardware shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.

4. Coating: Paint shall be suitable for outdoor applications and shall be resistant to weathering,peeling, chipping and fading. Sign colors shall be approved by the DISTRICT.

5. Information Content:

a. Project title/name, location, DISTRICT logo and name as shown on the ContractDocuments

b. Names and titles of authorities (i.e. DISTRICT Executive Director, Governing BoardMembers, etc.)

c. SFWMD Engineering & Construction Bureau

d. Name of prime CONTRACTOR and major Subcontractors

B. CONTRACTOR Identification: If not a part of the Project identification sign, provide and install theCONTRACTOR's standard sign.


2.03 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS:

A. Construction:

1. This includes signs for traffic, construction workers, and general public in regards to directions,warnings, hazards, locations of areas, facilities, equipment, and others of a similar nature.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide signs of design, size, color, and lettering as required byregulatory agencies and/or as shown on the Contract Documents. Signs shall be painted metal,plastic, or fiberglass. Materials shall be suitable for the conditions in which signs are to beplaced, such as weathering and fading.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall construct sign mounting structure(s) and framing of wood or metal,structurally adequate to meet the requirements of Paragraph 2.01 above and/or as shown on theContract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Project and Contractor Identification Signs: The CONTRACTOR shall

1. Install all required signs in locations acceptable to the DISTRICT. Install so as not to obstructtraffic or construction operations.

2. Erect on framing or foundation, and rigidly brace.

3. Maintain signs in good repair, in a neat, clean and readable condition.

4. Remove all signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project.

B. Informational Signs: The CONTRACTOR shall

1. Install at appropriate locations and in sufficient quantities to assure visibility. Relocate asrequired by progress of the WORK.

2. Maintain signs in good repair, in a neat, clean, and readable condition.

3. Remove all signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01590 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes requirements for temporary field offices and other structures for officeand storage space required by CONTRACTOR and the DISTRICT.

A. Related Work:

1. SECTION 01600 - Equipment and Materials

2. SECTION 01510 - Temporary Utilities and Facilities

B. Use of Existing Facilities: Existing facilities at the site shall not be used for field offices.

C. Use of Permanent Facilities: Permanent facilities when substantially completed shall not be used forfield offices or for storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIELD OFFICES:

A. General:

1. Provide a field office trailer for DISTRICT use at the staging area identified on the Drawings.The parking area shall have at least a shell rock surface.

2. Provide trailers, mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised aboveground,with steps and landings at entrance doors.

3. Buildings shall be structurally sound, secure, and weathertight.

4. Provide four appropriate type fire extinguishers at each office and storage area.

5. Maintain offices for duration of contract.

6. Install office spaces ready for occupancy within 21 days of the effective date of Contract.

7. Obtain any required building permits for installation of temporary field offices and sheds.

8. Interior and exterior finishes shall be acceptable to DISTRICT.

B. CONTRACTOR’s Office:

1. Provide a field office for CONTRACTOR’s superintendent on the site.

2. It shall be of size required for general use, with lights, heat, furnishings, telephone service, andother necessary facilities and utilities required by CONTRACTOR’s operations.

C. DISTRICT Office:

1. Provide a field office for DISTRICT’s Resident Engineer and staff on the site.

2. Provide the following minimum requirements:

a. One, 12-foot by 60 foot trailer

b. Secure entrance doors - Four sets of keys.

c. Windows with operable sash and insect screens

d. Resilient floor covering

e. Minimum of two individual offices

f. Conference room, minimum area of 100 square feet


g. Trailer shall be provided with no restroom (see portable facilities noted in Services)

h. Furnishings:

i. Two (2) standard size desks (60” W) with three drawers on each side

ii. Two (2) swivel, full back desk chair with arms

iii. Four (4) office side chairs

iv. Conference table (60” x 96”) with eight (8) swivel chairs

v. One 4-drawer legal-size metal filing cabinets with lock and key

vi. One six linear foot bookshelf, 10-inch minimum depth

vii. Four (4) folding chairs

viii. Four (4) wastebaskets

ix. One tack board, 36” x 30”

x. One white boards 48” x 60”

xi. One first aid kit and identifying sign

xii. Fire extinguishers per 2.01.A

i. Services:

i. Lighting 50 foot-candles at desktop height; Exterior lighting at entrance door

ii. Heating and air conditioning

iii. Electrical Service: Minimum of four circuits, 110V, 60 hertz; Minimum of (16)110V duplex convenience outlets

iv. External ADA compliant toilet facilities with holding tank to be located adjacent toDistrict Trailer; holding tanks shall be emptied weekly. Additional toilet facilitiesto be provided as needed for the CONTRACTOR’s personnel as needed.

v. Electric water cooler with bottled water and sufficient service to ensure aminimum of five (5) gallons capacity is maintained within the cooler as well asfive (5) gallons of reserve water.

vi. 4.5 c.f. minimum refrigerator with split freezer

vii. Microwave oven, 1.0 cubic feet

viii. Single pot coffeemaker

j. Office Equipment: Provide the following. No "or Equal" will be accepted for thoseitems that include named brands.

i. Two Uninterruptible Power Supplies, APC, Back UPS PRO 420

ii. All copier and printer supplies, adequate for two person office for duration ofproject.

iii. One wireless capable all-in-one scanner/printer/fax.

D. Maintenance:

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide once weekly maintenance of DISTRICT’s office includingjanitorial service and supplies.

2. CONTRACTOR shall repair immediately any damage, leaks or defective service.

2.02 STORAGE SHEDS AND TRAILERS:


A. On-Site:

1. Provide temporary buildings or trailers needed for storage of Equipment and Materials installedunder this Contract

2. Provide ventilation and heating as required by Equipment and Material stored.

B. Off-Site:

1. Advise the DISTRICT of any arrangements made for storage of Equipment and Materials in aplace other than DISTRICT’s site. Furnish evidence of insurance coverage with Application forPayment in conformance with the General Terms & Conditions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 LOCATION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE:

A. General:

1. Place temporary buildings, trailers and stored materials in locations acceptable to DISTRICT.

2. Installed field offices and sheds to resist winds and elements of the locality where installed.

3. Remove when no longer needed at the site or when WORK is completed.

4. Keep approach walks free of leaves, mud, water, or ice.

5. At completion of Work, remove temporary buildings and trailers, foundations (if any), utilityservices, and debris.

6. Prepare ground or paved areas as specified in applicable Sections.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01600 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: This section includes general requirements for Equipment and Material transportation andhandling, delivery, storage, and protection of CONTRACTOR and DISTRICT - furnished Equipment andMaterials.

A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:


1.02 DEFINITIONS: Definitions used in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other termsused in the Contract Documents, including such terms as "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,""furnishings," "special construction," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have recognizedmeanings in the construction industry.

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless of whether they were specificallypurchased for the Project or taken from the previously purchased stock. The term "product" includesthe terms "material," "equipment," "system," and other terms of similar intent.

B. Equipment: A product with operational or non-operational parts, regardless of whether motorized,manually operated, or fixed. Equipment may require service connections such as wiring or piping.

C. Materials: Products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined orotherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form parts of Work.


A. Equipment and Material Incorporated into the Work: Provide products that comply with therequirements of the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, are unused atthe time of installation. Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safetyguards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use andeffect.

B. Standard Products: Where they are available and comply with Specifications, provide standardproducts of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

C. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, the DISTRICT is likely toneed replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, either for maintenance andrepair or replacement, provide standard products for which the manufacturer has published assurancesthat the products and its parts are likely to be available to the DISTRICT at a later date.

1. Conform to applicable Specifications, codes, standards, and regulatory agencies.

2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing bythe DISTRICT.

3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:

a. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shoppractices.

b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to beinterchangeable.

c. Equipment and Materials shall be suitable for service conditions intended.

d. Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated or specified shall be adhered tounless variations are specifically approved in writing.


e. Provide labels and nameplates where required by regulatory agencies or to stateidentification and essential operating data.

f. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, supplied by the samemanufacturer.

4. Do not use equipment and material for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or isspecified.

D. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a singlesource.

E. Identification: Each item of equipment shall have permanently affixed to it a label or tag with itsequipment number designated in this contract. Marker shall be stainless steel and shall be located so asto be easily visible.

1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND SHIPMENT:

A. Shipment Preparation: CONTRACTOR shall require manufacturers and suppliers to prepareEquipment and Materials for shipment in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling, and to protectagainst damage or unnecessary exposure in transit and storage, for CONTRACTOR suppliedequipment. Provisions for protection shall include the following:

1. Crates or other suitable packaging materials

2. Covers and other means to prevent corrosion, moisture damage, mechanical injury, andaccumulation of dirt in motors, electrical equipment, and machinery

3. Suitable rust-preventive compound on exposed machined surfaces and unpainted iron and steel

4. Grease packing or oil lubrication in all bearings and similar items

5. Precast concrete components shall be transported, lifted and stored as specified by the precastsupplier. Precast supplier shall provide written instructions to the CONTRACTOR as to theabove. CONTRACTOR shall provide a copy to DISTRICT.

B. Marking: Each item of Equipment and Material shall be tagged or marked as identified in the deliveryschedule or on Submittals. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with eachshipment. Each piece of every item need not be marked separately, provided that all pieces of eachitem are packed or bundled together and the packages or bundles are properly tagged or marked.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery:

1. Arrange deliveries of Equipment and Materials in accordance with construction schedules, inample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation, and to avoid delay of the Work.

2. Deliver, store and handle Equipment and Materials in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,including theft.

3. Control delivery schedules to minimize long term storage at the site and to preventovercrowding of construction spaces. In particular, coordinate delivery and installation toensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable,hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.

4. Avoid conflict with Work of DISTRICT or other contractors.

5. Deliver Equipment and Materials to the site in manufacturer's sealed containers or otherpackaging system with identifying labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,protecting, and installing.


6. Mark deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify the equipment, to permit easyaccumulation of parts, and to facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting ofunits.

7. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure:

a. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed Submittals.

b. Quantities are correct.

c. Containers and packages are intact, labels are legible.

d. Equipment and Materials are properly protected and undamaged.

B. Storage:

1. Store Equipment and Materials immediately on delivery, and protect until completion of theWork. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact andlegible.

2. Store Equipment and Materials in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.

3. Store Equipment and Materials that are subject to damage by elements in weathertightenclosures.

4. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer.

5. Protect exposed-machined surfaces and unpainted iron and steel as necessary with suitable rust-preventive compounds.

6. Protect bearings and similar items with grease packing or oil lubrication.

7. Handle and store steel plate, sheet metal, and similar items in a manner to prevent deformation.

8. Exterior Storage:

a. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support fabricated productsaboveground; and to prevent soiling or staining. Cover products subject to discolorationor deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet coverings. Provideadequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

b. Store loose granular materials on solid surface areas to prevent mixing with foreignmatter.

c. Provide surface drainage to prevent flow or ponding of rainwater.

9. Equipment and Materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects ofstorage prior to final acceptance of Work.

10. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspectionsof stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, and freefrom damage or deterioration.

C. Handling:

1. Provide equipment and personnel necessary, to unload and handle Equipment and Materials, bymethods to prevent damage or soiling to Equipment and Materials, or packaging.

2. Handle by methods to prevent bending or overstressing. Where lifting points are designated,lift components only at those points.

3. Provide additional protection to surrounding surfaces as necessary to prevent damage.

D. Maintenance of Storage:

1. Inspect stored Equipment and Materials on a scheduled basis.


2. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements,including environmental conditions continually maintained.

3. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected; that anyweathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Protection after installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed Equipmentand Materials from damage from subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer neededor as specified.

1.06 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

A. Equipment and Materials to be reused: For Equipment and Materials specifically indicated orspecified to be reused in the Work, use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation toassure proper function in the completed Work. Arrange for transportation, storage and handling ofproducts which require off-site storage, restoration, or renovation and pay all costs for such Work.CONTRACTOR may at his option, furnish and install new items in lieu of those specified to be reused.

B. Equipment and Materials not to be reused: The following Equipment and Materials to be removedshall remain DISTRICT's property and are not to be reused in the Work. Remove from its location,prepare for handling and storage, and deliver to DISTRICT.

1. None

C. Equipment and Materials designated to be removed but not reused or delivered to DISTRICT, shallbecome the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from the site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS: Specified in each applicable Section of Specifications

2.02 PRODUCT SELECTION AND SUBSTITUTIONS: Specified in Instructions to Bidders and General Terms& Conditions

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Installation:

1. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer'sprinted instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions if not a part of Submittals,containers, or packaging to parties involved in the installation, including a copy to theDISTRICT.

2. Maintain one complete set of instructions at the job site during installation and untilcompletion.

3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in accordance with suchinstructions and in conformance with specified requirements. Should job conditions orspecified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with DISTRICT forfurther instructions.

4. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified orexempted by Contract Documents, or approved in writing by manufacturer and the DISTRICT.

5. Accurately locate and align with other Work, and anchor Equipment and Materials securely inplace except as required for proper movement and performance.


6. Clean and protect exposed surfaces as necessary to ensure freedom from damage anddeterioration at time of acceptance.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. This SECTION covers the DISTRICT's review procedures for CONTRACTOR's requests ofacceptable substitute items of material and equipment. All requests for substitution shall be made noearlier than the Effective Date of the Contract. See Article 22 of the Instructions to the Bidders of thisContract Document. A determination of acceptability or rejection of the substitution request will bemade in accordance with paragraph 6.05 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

B. Requests received prior to the date established above will not be considered.

C. Substitutions may be approved at the DISTRICT’s sole discretion where one or more of the followingconditions apply:

1. The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirementsor regulations.

2. The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through no fault ofthe CONTRACTOR.

3. The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of thespecified products to perform properly or to fit in the designated space.

4. The substitution may be requested when in the judgment of the DISTRICT a substitution wouldbe substantially to the DISTRICT's best interests in terms of cost, time or other considerations.

D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:


1.02 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST:

A. Submit as required in SECTION 01300:

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with the ContractDocument

a. Product identification including MANUFACTURER’s name and address

b. MANUFACTURER’s literature including product description, performance and test data,and reference standards

c. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and dates of installation

2. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified

3. Data relating to changes in the construction schedule

4. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified

B. In submitting the request for substitution, the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations:

1. The CONTRACTOR has investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equalor superior in all respects to that specified.

2. The CONTRACTOR will provide the same warranty or guarantee for the substitution as for theproduct specified.

3. The CONTRACTOR will coordinate installation of the accepted substitution into the WORK,making such changes as may be required for the WORK to be completed in all respects.

4. The CONTRACTOR waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution thatsubsequently becomes apparent.

5. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under the Contract.


1.03 DISTRICT ENGINEER'S REVIEW:

A. The DISTRICT, in evaluating the request for substitution, will consider all variations of the proposedsubstitute from that specified to determine the acceptability of the proposal. The DISTRICT mayrequire the CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute necessary to makesuch a determination. The DISTRICT will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no substitute will beordered or installed without the DISTRICT's prior written acceptance. The DISTRICT may require theCONTRACTOR to furnish, at the CONTRACTOR's expense, a special performance guarantee orother surety with respect to any substitute. Substitutions will not be considered if:

1. Substitutions are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or product data submittals without arequest submitted in accordance with this SECTION.

2. Acceptance will require substantial revision to the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: This SECTION includes administrative and procedural requirements for ContractCloseout including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Inspection procedures

b. Project record document submittal

c. Operation and maintenance manual submittal

d. Submittal of warranties

e. Final cleaning

f. CONTRACTOR's Certification

B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate SECTIONs inDIVISIONS 2 through 16.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:


2. SECTION 01050 - Field Engineering

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, theCONTRACTOR shall satisfy the following:

1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications,and similar documents. Submit in accordance with SECTION 01300.

2. Obtain and submit releases enabling the DISTRICT unrestricted use of the WORK and accessto services and utilities. Include Certificates of Occupancy (C.O.), operating certificates, andsimilar releases, as required.

3. Submit Record Documents, maintenance manuals, Project photographs, damage or settlementsurveys, property surveys, and similar record information as specified in Paragraph 1.04. Alldrawings shall be scanned and submitted in accordance with SECTION 01300, and in hardcopy form, 24 inch by 36 inch plan size. All other documents shall also be scanned andsubmitted in accordance with SECTION 01300.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one (1) set of As-Built Drawings depicting all elevationsboth NAVD 88 and NGVD 29. The NGVD 29 elevation shall be italicized, bracketed andunderscored. To prevent clutter, each plan sheet shall have a common note depicting the datumconversion from NAVD 88 to NGVD 29 obtained using CORPSCON 6.0.1 or most recentversion.

5. Provide 2 copies of an as-built survey of the flood protection berm canal bank cross-sectionsand structures certified by a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the State of Florida. Thisincludes verifying proper embankment slopes and removal of excess material.

6. Complete final cleanup requirements, including touch up painting.

7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the DISTRICT will either proceed withinspection or advise the CONTRACTOR of unfilled requirements. The DISTRICT will prepare theCertificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the CONTRACTOR of WORKthat must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The DISTRICT will reschedule the inspection when in its opinion, the WORK is substantiallycomplete.


1.03 FINAL ACCEPTANCE:

A. Preliminary Procedures: Submit certification by CONTRACTOR that WORK has been completed inaccordance with the Contract Documents to the knowledge of the CONTRACTOR. Before requestingfinal inspection, complete the following:

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation. Includeinsurance certificates for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit a certified copy of the DISTRICT's final inspection list of items to be completed orcorrected. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed.

3. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurancerequirements.

5. Submit Release of Liens (from the Prime, and all Subcontractors, Vendors and Suppliers).

6. Submit Maintenance Bond (if applicable).

7. The above shall be submitted in accordance with SECTION 01300.

B. Reinspection Procedure: The DISTRICT will reinspect the WORK upon receipt of notice that theWORK, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed.

1. Upon completion of reinspection, the DISTRICT will advise the CONTRACTOR of WORKthat is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for finalacceptance.

2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.

C. Return all keys furnished by the DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR shall forfeit his key deposit forkeys that are not returned.

1.04 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents fromdeterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for theDISTRICT's reference during normal working hours.

B. As-Built Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Drawingsand Shop Drawings. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and otheridentification on the cover of each set. Mark the set to show the actual installation where theinstallation varies substantially from the WORK as originally shown. Mark which drawing is mostcapable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Drawings. Give particular attention to concealedelements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Call attention to each entry bydrawing a "cloud" around the areas affected.

C. The DISTRICT will make electronic copies of whatever electronic versions of the Drawings exist,available to the CONTRACTOR for As-Built purposes. The CONTRACTOR must obtain concurrenceof the DISTRICT as to form and content of record information provided in electronic format prior toproceeding, but in general, information similar to that shown below needs to be similarly provided.

1. Record information concurrently with construction progress.

2. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations inseparate categories of the WORK. Mark each document "AS-BUILT DRAWINGS" in neat,large, printed letters.

3. Mark as-built invert elevations for all water control structures, culverts, etc. Refer to SECTION01050 for structures which require a permanent benchmark.

4. Mark new information that is important to the DISTRICT that is not shown on Drawings orShop Drawings.

5. Note related change-order numbers where applicable.

6. Include the following:


a. Where Submittals (like Shop Drawings) are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference atcorresponding location on Drawings.

b. Field changes of dimension and detail.

c. Changes made by Change Order or other Modifications.

d. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

e. As-Built shall include a plot of the actual excavation cross-sections plotted at the samestation as and on top of the design cross-sections.

f. As-Built shall include a plot of the actual levee and embankment cross-sections plotted atthe same station as and on top of the design cross-sections.

g. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult or expensive tolocate at a later date.

h. GPS (global positioning system) coordinates of major structures using the format lat/longDD (decimal/degree) NAD83 (North American Datum).

7. Record Specifications: Maintain one (1) complete copy of the Contract Documents includingaddenda. Include with the Contract Documents one (1) copy of other written constructiondocuments, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form duringconstruction.

8. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual WORK performed in comparisonwith the text of the Specifications and modifications.

9. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealedconstruction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

10. Note related As-Built information and Product Data.

11. Upon completion of the WORK, submit record Specifications to the DISTRICT for theDISTRICT's records on CD in PDF format.

12. Include the following:

a. MANUFACTURER, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and itemof equipment actually installed, including optional and substitute items

b. Changes made by Addendum, Change Order, or other Modifications

c. Related Submittals

13. Affix the CONTRACTOR’s corporate seal on the cover sheet indicating the documents withinare representative of the as-built condition of the Project. The seal shall be signed by an officerof the company.

D. Record Product Data: Provide one (1) copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related ChangeOrders and markup of Record Documents.

1. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual WORK performed in comparisonwith information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the Site and from theMANUFACTURER’s installation instructions and recommendations.

2. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the WORK that cannototherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the CONTRACTOR shallmeet with the DISTRICT's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to betransmitted to the DISTRICT for record purposes. Comply with the DISTRICT's instructionsregarding packaging, identification, and delivery to the DISTRICT.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification SECTIONs for requirements ofmiscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the WORKImmediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion (unless otherwise specified), completemiscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly, bind or file,and submit to the DISTRICT for the DISTRICT's records.


G. Warranties and Bonds: Submit original documents as specified in Section 00700 - General Terms &Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, SECTION 01300, and technical specifications.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING:

A. General: The General Terms & Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular Sitecleaning is included in SECTION 01530.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surfaceor unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.Comply with MANUFACTURER's instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification ofSubstantial Completion.

a. Clean the Site of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Rake grounds that areneither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface.

b. Remove temporary structures, tools, equipment, supplies, and surplus materials.

c. Remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed to protectpreviously completed WORK.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of theWORK during construction.

D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards forcleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the DISTRICT'sproperty. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Removewaste materials from the Site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated WORK, they become theDISTRICT's property. Dispose of these materials of no value to the DISTRICT as directed bythe DISTRICT.

E. Repairs:

1. Repair damaged protective coated surfaces.

2. Repair roads and other items damaged or deteriorated because of construction operations,including those which have been damaged, but are not located within the Project limits.

3. Restore all ground areas affected by construction operations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: Operation and Maintenance (O&M) instructions shall be provided in accordance with this sectionand as required in the technical sections of this project manual. O&M information shall be provided for eachmaintainable piece of equipment (e.g. in-line check valves), equipment assembly or subassembly, andmaterial provided or modified under this contract.

1.02 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED:

A. General: O&M information shall contain the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of themanufacturer, the nearest representative of the manufacturer, and the nearest supplier of themanufacturer's equipment and parts. See SECTION 01300 for details on how to prepare and submitthis data. In addition, one or more of the following items of information shall be provided asapplicable.

B. Preventive Maintenance: The following information shall be provided for preventive and scheduledmaintenance and repair:

1. Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule: Provide manufacturer's schedule for routinepreventive maintenance, inspections, tests, and adjustments required to ensure proper andeconomical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.

C. Corrective Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations shall be provided on procedures andinstructions for correcting problems and making repairs.

1. Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Provide instructions and list tools required to restoreproduct or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.

2. Removal and Replacement Instructions: Provide step-by-step procedures and list required toolsand supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings, andadjustments required. Instructions shall include a combination of test illustrations.

3. Spare Parts and Supply Lists: Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenanceand repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Specialconsideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies thathave a long lead time to obtain.

4. Corrective Maintenance Man-Hours: Provide manufacturer's projection of correctivemaintenance man-hours including craft requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenancethat requires participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulatedseparately.

D. Appendices: The following information shall be provided; include information not specified in thepreceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance of the product or equipment.

1. Parts Identification: Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include specialhardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify partsby make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without furtheridentification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enableeasy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, boththe illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number which willcross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be groupedby components, assemblies, and subassemblies.


2. Warranty Information: List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing andtechnical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents to keep warrantiesin force.

3. Special Tool Information: Provide information on special tools needed for the operation,maintenance, and repair of components.

1.03 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE:

A. Unless otherwise specified, O&M manuals, information, and data shall be transmitted in accordancewith SECTION 01300. Only complete sets of O&M instructions will be reviewed for acceptance.

B. Three copies of the specified O&M information shall be provided. For ease of identification, eachmanufacturer's brochure and manual shall be appropriately labeled with the equipment name andequipment numbers it appears in the project manual. The information shall be organized in the bindersin numerical order by the equipment numbers assigned in the project manual. The binders shall beprovided with a table of contents and tab sheets to permit easy location of desired information.Binders shall be 3-inch, D-ring, presentation type with locking mechanism and clear view vinyl coverfor insertion of graphic identifying contents of binder.

C. If manufacturers' standard brochures and manuals are used to describe O&M procedures, suchbrochures and manuals shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of equipment used on thisproject. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise annotated or eliminated.

1.04 FIELD CHANGES: Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item, the item'sinstructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the CONTRACTOR to reflect any fieldchanges or information requiring field date.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary forthe removal of existing construction to limits indicated on drawings where earthwork or otherconstruction operations are to be performed as specified herein. The DISTRICT shall not beresponsible for the condition of any items to be removed or salvaged.

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: (Not Used)

1.03 DEFINITIONS: (Not Used)

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Schedule of Demolition:

1. Submit proposed methods and operations of demolition for review and approval by theDISTRICT prior to the start of WORK.

B. Permits:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for acquiring appropriate necessary permits for thework. Copies of the permits shall be submitted to the DISTRICT prior to commencement ofdemolition.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: (Not Used)

1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not commence demolition of structure(s) prior to receiving writtenpermission of the DISTRICT.

B. Condition of structures to be demolished:

1. The DISTRICT assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be demolished.

2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by DISTRICTinsofar as reasonably practicable.

C. Each structure identified for demolition on the Drawings shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR inits entirety.

D. Explosives: The use of explosives will not be permitted. The CONTRACTOR may use a non-explosive, expanding agent in drilled holes for the demolition of concrete, and shall conform to allmanufacturers’ recommendations, including safety precautions for mixing and placing the agent.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition andclearing. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent structures, otherfacilities, and any persons.

1. The CONTRACTOR shall protect existing finish work that is to remain in place from damagedue to demolition operations.

F. Traffic:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimuminterference with existing access roads and other adjacent, occupied or used facilities.


2. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct access roads or other occupied or used facilitieswithout written permission from the DISTRICT.

G. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolitionoperations at no cost to the DISTRICT.

H. Utilities Disconnection:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all necessary coordination to locate, disconnect, relocate,and/or protect as needed all existing underground, aboveground, and overhead utilities withinthe limits of demolition prior to commencement of demolition operations. All expenses incurredfor the coordination with utility companies and agencies, shall be at no cost to the DISTRICT.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly repair damages to existing utilities that are to remain, at nocost to the DISTRICT.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING: (Not Used)

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance noticeof its intention to begin new WORK activities.

1.09 WARRANTY: (Not Used)


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DEMOLITION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required bylocal authorities having jurisdiction.

B. If hazardous materials are found, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT immediately.

3.02 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolitionoperations.

B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, the CONTRACTOR shallcomply with all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, andprotection against exposure or environmental pollution.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall transport materials removed from demolished structures and properlydispose of them at an approved site according to the State, Federal, and local regulations.

D. The CONTRACTOR is prohibited from burning any materials as part of the demolition operations.

3.03 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall cut and remove portions of existing construction as required to allow properinstallation of new construction.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall shore, brace and maintain existing structure(s) in a safe condition untilpermanent supports are completed.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall repair all damage as a result of installation of shoring and bracing.


3.04 CLEANUP AND REPAIR:

A. Upon completion of demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall remove all tools, equipment, anddemolished materials from site; see SECTION 1.01 and SECTION 3.02 of this specification.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall repair demolition performed in excess of that required and return structuresand surfaces to conditions existing prior to commencement of demolition work. The CONTRACTORshall repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work to the satisfactionof the DISTRICT.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall remove or modify as indicated all existing construction within theconstruction limits to the extent necessary to permit construction of the work. The CONTRACTORshall properly dispose of the material at an approved site according to the State, Federal, and localregulations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessaryfor complete and proper site preparation within the areas shown on the Drawings and specified hereinand observe permit conditions.


1. SECTION 02110 Clearing and Land Preparation

2. SECTION 02114 Tree Removal

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

A. Applicable Standards:

1. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)

a. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition


1.04 SUBMITTALS: (Not Used)



A. The CONTRACTOR shall make all excavations for piping and appurtenant structures in any materialencountered to the depth and grades required, shall backfill such excavations and dispose of excess orunsuitable materials from excavation, and shall provide and place necessary borrow material toproperly backfill excavations, all as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or as directed by theDISTRICT.

B. Excavation, dewatering, sheeting and bracing required shall be carried out so as to prevent anypossibility of undermining or disturbing the foundations of any existing structure or work, and so thatall work may be accomplished and inspected in the dry, except as directed by the DISTRICT. Aqueousconstruction may be performed only with prior approval of the DISTRICT.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTINGS: (Not Used)

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: (Not Used)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRAFFIC CONTROL: The CONTRACTOR shall provide proper warning devices and barriers forprotection of the public and workmen in accordance with FDOT Specification Section 102 Traffic Controland local regulations.


3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING: Site clearing and grubbing, in accordance with SECTION 02110, shall beperformed within the areas shown on the Drawings or otherwise noted in the above referenced specification.

3.03 EROSION CONTROL: The CONTRACTOR shall prevent and control erosion and water pollution as perFDOT Specification Section 104 and Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) regulationsand permit conditions.

3.04 PROTECTION AND/OR RELOCATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES: Existing facilities such as stormdrains, roadways, water lines, light poles, conduits, fences, utility and telephone lines, etc. are to be carefullyprotected from damage during all phases of the construction. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessaryarrangements with the owner of the facility and be responsible for all costs involved in the proper protection,relocation or other work that such owners deem necessary. See General Terms & Conditions.

3.05 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary liaisons with other utilities(underground) by notification, 48 hours in advance, of any digging by telephoning the appropriate UtilityNotification Center and local utilities.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02110 CLEARING AND LAND PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall include the removal of trees and other vegetation fromareas where earthwork or other construction operations specified herein are to be performed. Thissection also includes land preparation activities for excavation and fill areas.


1. SECTION 02050 - Demolition

2. SECTION 02200 - Earthwork

3. SECTION 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting


A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT)

1. 104 – Specification Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution


1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Prior to beginning the work, CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed plan for clearing and landpreparation in conformance with SECTION 01300. The plan shall detail the sequence of work anddescribe the CONTRACTOR'S planned method of clearing and land preparation activities.



A. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure the safe passage of persons around areas of clearing and landpreparation. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations to prevent injury to adjacent structures,vegetation designated to remain, other facilities and persons.

B. Traffic:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations and the removal of cleared materials to ensureminimum interference with existing access roads and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall not block or otherwise obstruct access roads or other occupied orused facilities without permission from the DISTRICT. Where blockage is allowed, theCONTRACTOR shall provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways.

C. The CONTRACTOR may commence clearing or land preparation within portions of the project fallingwithin the limits of temporary construction easements or utility right-of-way only with specificpermission from the DISTRICT for each activity and location. All requirements under A and B aboveapply within these limits.



1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL CLEARING:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove the vegetative matter in the areas indicated on the plans. TheCONTRACTOR shall complete the work of Clearing and Land Preparation as outlined below.

1. Mowing or the use of a bush-hog may be required in areas of heavy grass, weeds, or woody-stalked vegetation.

2. Completely remove all designated trees within the designated project boundaries.

3. All woody debris that measures over three-quarters inch in diameter and longer than 18-inchesshall be removed.

4. All stumps shall be ground level to six inches below the surrounding ground level. Stumps onthe slopes shall be cut flush with the natural angle of the existing grade and treated immediatelywith a herbicide approved by the DISTRICT. All seedlings within the project site shall betreated with the herbicide.

5. All plant material (whole or chipped) will be removed from the project area and stockpiled at alocation authorized by the DISTRICT. Disposal of the stockpile shall be accomplished at amaximum of every 15 workdays.

6. Remove and dispose of any garbage or other waste debris recovered during clearing.

7. On completion of the clearing, remove all sticks, rubbish and other extraneous material andrake the ground surface in order to leave a smooth and clean appearance.

8. Clearing and land preparation shall proceed sufficiently ahead of earthwork activities tominimize disruption and allow time for determination of the adequacy of the clearingprocedure.

9. All work shall be performed in accordance with approved principles of modern arboriculturalmethods.

10. All trees to remain in the project area, as designated by the DISTRICT, shall be protected fromdamage by tree barricades in accordance with FDOT Index No. 544.

11. All work shall be performed without damage to existing amenities, including trees and shrubs.The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for repair and replacement of existing amenities tothe satisfaction of the DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all vegetation, habitats, oramenities on the project location as indicated on the plans.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall clear adjacent to cut or fill sections to a minimum distance of 10 feetoutside of slope lines unless lesser distances are specified. Clearing in areas of native vegetation forlevee construction or removal and canal excavation shall be limited to a distance of 10 feet outside ofslope lines.

C. The CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to burn the combustible products of the clearing operationwithin the limits of construction.


3.02 EROSION CONTROL: The CONTRACTOR shall prevent and control erosion and water pollution as perFDOT Specification Sections 104 -1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7 and Florida Department of Environmental Protection(FDEP) regulations and permit conditions.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02114 TREE REMOVAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and perform allwork in strict accordance with the Specifications, Contract, and applicable requirements for theremoval and disposal of trees and heavy brush.


1. SECTION 02110 - Clearing and Land Preparation

C. The CONTRACTOR shall accomplish the complete removal of designated trees, the disposal ofresulting waste and debris, as well as any other rubbish, solid waste or debris existing and exposedduring the execution of the work in those areas described. The CONTRACTOR shall perform theWORK in accordance with recognized and approved principles of modern arboricultural methods. TheCONTRACTOR shall perform all WORK without damage to trees, shrubs, and/or facilities that areintended to remain in the work area.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the WORK which involves the following procedures:

1. Removal of designated trees

2. Exotic vegetation removal

3. Pruning of native vegetation to facilitate removal of exotic vegetation

4. Preservation and protection of native vegetation

5. Minimizing disturbance of the canal banks and other facilities

6. Debris/rubbish/solid waste removal and disposal, site clean up, and finish grading to leave aclean and smoothly graded appearance


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. Z133.1a: “Safety Requirements for Tree Care Operations - Pruning, Trimming, Repairing,Maintaining and Removing Trees, and for Cutting Brush”

2. Z133.1: “Tree Care Operations - Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining and RemovingTrees, and for Cutting Brush”

3. A300: “Tree Care Operations B Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Maintenance”

B. Florida Department of Agriculture & Consumer Services, Division of Forestry, “Tree ProtectionManual for Builders and Developers”

C. Florida Statute Chapter 487, “Florida Pesticide Laws”

D. Occupational Safety and Health Regulations “29 CFR 1910,” Florida Statute 442 Occupational Safetyand Health and other applicable federal, state and local regulations

E. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Index No. 544 – Landscape Installations

2. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways



1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit as specified in DIVISION 1 the proposed methods and materials forclearing of invasive exotic plant material and trees, including a schedule indicating specific timeframesper sections/phases of the project and methods to protect trees to remain.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain all necessary permits to accomplish all of the work.

C. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for performing all work in accordance with all applicableregulations, ordinances and code requirements from the appropriate city, county, state and/or federaljurisdiction the project is located in.


1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES: (Not Used)





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TREE REMOVAL:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall accomplish the removal of trees and or all exotic plant material in a safeand acceptable manner by means of equipment designed for this purpose in conformance with ANSI,A300, Z133.1 and Z133.1a Standards. All other debris, trees and wood growth shall be removed. TheCONTRACTOR shall accomplish the work of Tree Removal as outlined below.

B. Remove vegetation from all areas outside of sensitive areas using mechanical equipment for clearingand grubbing. Sensitive areas are defined as areas dominated by native vegetation, canal bank slopes,canal bank areas to be preserved at existing grade and wetlands.

1. Only handwork and hand tool work will be permitted within the sensitive areas. No mechanicalequipment will be allowed within the sensitive areas. Existing native flora and fauna shall beprotected from harm during the process. Treat exotic stumps with herbicide mixture approvedby the DISTRICT. Herbicide shall be used in combination with flush cut tree stumps wherenecessary to protect native vegetation from damage by mechanical equipment.

2. Where exotic trees are removed in sensitive areas, they shall be cut as low as possible (within 4inches of surrounding natural grade).

3. In tree trimming, any cut of at least two (2) inches in diameter shall be cut flush to the mainlimb or trunk. All limbs shall be undercut to prevent bark teardown. All pruning shall be inconformance with ANSI A300 Pruning Standards.

4. In the event that the removal of exotic plant materials could damage any native trees or listedspecies, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT before proceeding further.


3.02 CLEARING AND BRUSH REMOVAL:

A. The CONTRACTOR, where necessary or required, shall implement selective clearing methodsconforming to the applicable requirements of ANSI Standards Z133.1, Z133.1a and A300.

B. The CONTRACTOR may not burn cleared materials within the limits of construction or any utilityright-of-way. The CONTRACTOR will be required to collect and haul all cleared materials to anapproved site for disposal.

3.03 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL:

A. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to remove and dispose of (in a legal manner) all mulch,cut branches, tree trunks and any other debris or solid waste at an approved disposal site. Limbs andany other debris/solid waste shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR and shall not be depositedinto any trash container. Wood chips/mulch may not be disposed of on DISTRICT property.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work in conformance with all applicable regulations, ordinancesand code requirements of the appropriate city, county, state and/or federal jurisdiction. Exotic/invasiveplants are defined as Brazilian Pepper, Australian Pine, Melaleuca, or as directed by the DISTRICT,and contract specifications.

3.04 TREE AND SHRUB PROTECTION: The CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to protect all trees and shrubsdesignated to remain. The CONTRACTOR shall install tree protection barricade in accordance with FDOTIndex No. 544. Where trees and shrubs are adjacent to construction, they shall be protected - where damaged,restored or replaced to original conditions. Trees or existing grade damaged on the construction site shall berestored to original condition. Tree limbs, which interfere with equipment operation and are approved forpruning, shall be neatly trimmed in accordance with NAA/ANSI standards. The CONTRACTOR shall beresponsible for damages, maintenance, and protection of trees and shrubs to be protected.

3.05 GRADES: It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to provide the final grading to conform tosurrounding grades and to be at the proper elevation with relation to walks, paving, drainage structures andother site conditions, unless indicated otherwise.

3.06 HERBICIDE TREATMENT:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide herbicide for stump eradication as approved by the DISTRICT.Use of herbicides shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed label instructions andapplicable federal, state and local laws. Application of herbicides shall be by appropriately licensedpersonnel.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise extreme care to prevent damage to desirable existing growth. Ifnecessary, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a test to establish suitability of product and applicatorthat will be used on this project prior to execution of the full application.

3.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE: The work site shall be clean and free of trimmings, stumps, roots, logs, or anyother debris resulting from the WORK, and trash, litter or rubbish exposed during the CONTRACTOR’S treeremoval services. Stumps and roots may remain in sensitive areas (as referenced in 3.01.A.1 of thisspecification) in accordance with the contracts documents.

3.08 EQUIPMENT:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment in good repair and operating condition at all times.Only equipment designed for performance of WORK described herein will be acceptable for operation.All equipment shall meet all safety requirements as established for this type of WORK. Equipmentshall be operated and maintained in accordance with MANUFACTURER’s recommendations.


Equipment shall have the appropriate safety guards, which shall not be removed (e.g., chain saws,chippers, etc.).

B. The CONTRACTOR will be required to have available on site and in good working condition aminimum of the following:

1. Sufficient traffic control devices to safely control traffic through work areas in accordance withthe “Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways” and FloridaDepartment of Transportation requirements

2. Three navigational buoys and advance warning signs, if applicable

C. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to verify the location of all utilities, structures,etc., by hand excavation or other appropriate measures before performing any work that could result indamage or injury to persons, utilities, structures or property. The CONTRACTOR shall make athorough search of the site for utilities, structures, etc., before work is commenced in any particularlocation.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall not purposefully disrupt or disconnect any type of utility, electric orirrigation service without first obtaining the written permission of the DISTRICT. Requests fordisconnection must be in writing and received by the DISTRICT at least seven calendar days prior tothe time of the requested interruption.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall take within two hours and complete within 48 hours the necessary steps torepair, replace, or restore all services to any utilities or other facilities, which are disrupted due to his orher operations.

F. Should utilities, structures, etc., be encountered that interfere with the work and are not shown on thedrawings, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT immediately.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK

GENERAL

SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials for allexcavating, trenching, filling, construction of embankment, backfilling, compacting, grading, and allrelated items of earthwork necessary to complete the WORK indicated or specified.



2. SECTION 01410 – Testing and Quality Control

3. SECTION 01050 – Field Engineering and Surveying

4. SECTION 02050 - Demolition


6. SECTION 02220 - Excavation and Backfilling

7. SECTION 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting

8. SECTION 02920 - Sodding

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS:

A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the standards of the organizations listed below in effect at the timeof the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. In the case of aconflict between the requirements of this SECTION and those of the listed document, the requirementsof this SECTION shall prevail.

1. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):

a. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

b. D698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Usingthe Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

c. D1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Usingthe Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))

d. D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (UnifiedSoil Classification System)

e. D3740 – Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testingand/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

f. D4253 – Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of SoilsUsing a Vibratory Table.

g. D4254 – Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soilsand Calculation of Relative Density.

h. D4564 – Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by theSleeve Method.

i. D4914 – Standard Test Methods for Density and Unit Weight of Soil and Rock in Placeby the Sand Replacement Method in a Test Pit.

j. D5030 – Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Rock in Place by the WaterReplacement Method in a Test Pit.


k. D6938 – Standard Test Method for In-place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Method Shallow Depth

l. E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/orTesting

2. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):


3. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

a. T 27 – Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates

b. T 99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 2.5-kg(5.5-lb) Rammer and a 305-mm (12-in.) Drop

c. T 180 – Standard Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb (4.54 kg)Rammer and 18 in (457 mm) Drop

B. Florida Method (FM) of Test:

1. FM T-1 011 – Florida Method of Test for Sampling Aggregates

C. Miscellaneous Project Data:

1. Subsurface soil data logs are provided for the CONTRACTOR’s reference

a. Subsurface Exploration Report

C-4 Canal Bank Improvement Project

Palmetto Flood Protection Berm

Miami-Dade County, FL

File No. 14-2589

August 8, 2014

Prepared by Ardaman & Associates, Inc.

DEFINITIONS:

A. Select Fill:

1. Select Fill shall be clean, well-graded material free from debris, peat, roots, seeds of nuisanceor exotic species, organic material, clods, and stones with a diameter greater than 3 inches (76mm) in any direction. Select Fill shall have an average organic content of not more than 2% orhave an individual test value of not more than 4%. Select Fill shall be placed where indicatedon the Drawings.

2. Select Fill may be material excavated for the WORK (native) or may be imported. TheCONTRACTOR may blend native materials to achieve a material that meets the requirementsfor Select Fill.

3. Select Fill shall meet one of the following Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D2487)designations: SW, SM or SP-SM. Materials classified as SP may be used only where theexisting excavated and surrounding materials are confirmed by laboratory testing to be SP.

a. Flood Protection Berm: CL, ML (These are fine-grained soils with -50-75% by dryweight passing through a No. 200 sieve; CL and ML are inorganic clay and silt,respectively, with a liquid limit less than 50%). Levee fill material shall not contain anyparticles larger than 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter, and the upper 1-foot of the levee shallnot contain particle sizes larger than 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter.

4. The following table displays Select Fill maximum lift thickness and maximum particle size.


SELECT FILL

STRUCTURE TYPEMAXIMUM

PARTICLE SIZEMAXIMUM LOOSELIFT THICKNESS

Flood Protection Berm 3 inches 12 inches

5. Select Fill shall meet the ASTM D2487 gradation limits with the largest particle diameter notexceeding the following:

SELECT FILL LARGEST PARTICLE LIMITS

SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING (%)

3 inches [90 mm] 100

B. Random Fill:

1. Random Fill shall be clean, well-graded material, meeting one of the following Unified SoilClassification System (ASTM D2487) designations: SW, SP, SM, SC, SW-SM, SW-SC, SP-SM, and SP-SC, that is thoroughly mixed and free from debris, clods, seeds of nuisance orexotic species, and stones with a diameter in any direction greater than those specified in thebelow table. Random Fill shall have an organic content of less than 5% by weight. Tighterrestrictions on stone size are considered in the top layer of fill, as per subsection 3.05 FinalDressing of Slopes, if the area is to be seeded, sodded, or landscaped. Random Fill shall beplaced where indicated on the Drawings.

2. Random Fill may be material excavated for the WORK (native) or may be imported. TheCONTRACTOR may blend native materials to achieve a material that meets the requirementsfor Random Fill.

3. Random Fill shall meet the ASTM D2487 requirements with the largest particle diameter notexceed the following:

C. Unified Soil Classification System (USCS): USCS is a two-letter classification system used todescribe the texture and grain size of a soil. In the USCS system, letters are representative as follows:G stands for gravel, S stands for sand, M stands for silt, C stands for clay, O stands for organic, Pstands for poorly graded, W stands for well graded, H stands for high plasticity, and L stands for lowplasticity.

D. Excavation: Excavation shall be the removal of all materials within the defined configuration to thelimits of excavation shown on the Drawings, excluding stripping material.

E. Unsuitable Fill: Soil that does not meet the requirements for fill (or backfill) addressed thus far in thisSECTION shall be considered Unsuitable Fill soil.

F. Unclassified Fill: Unclassified Fill may be material used to bring areas to grade where there is nopotential for slope erosion and the fill will not support a structure of critical function. Unclassified Fillshall be placed where neither Select Fill nor Random Fill are shown on the Drawing. Unclassified Fill

RANDOM FILL

MAXIMUMPARTICLE SIZE

SURFACE DEPTH MAXIMUM COMPACTEDLIFT THICKNESS

3 inches < 12 inches 12 inches


shall be free from seeds of nuisance or exotic species, and will be composed of material excavated forthe WORK or imported material that can be compacted to the required density.

SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with SECTION 01300.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit laboratory test results on the materials proposed to be used (whethernative or imported) as Select Fill and Random Fill. At a minimum the laboratory testing shall includesieve analysis, organic content, USCS classification and modified proctor per ASTM D1557, asapplicable. Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the source of each materialproposed to be used.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit two (2) copies of field measured cross-sections at each design cross-section for record purposes for flood protection berm embankments as described in this SECTION.The submittal of the field measured cross-sections shall be signed and sealed by a ProfessionalSurveyor and Mapper licensed in the State of Florida.

QUALIFICATIONS:

A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish at his own expense anindependent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to perform all testing required toestablish and maintain his Quality Control. This Quality Control involves conducting soil materialsand rock-definition testing during earthwork operations, as documented according to ASTM D 3740.

B. Earthwork Contractor Qualifications: The CONTRACTOR shall use an adequate number of skilledlaborers and installers who are thoroughly trained and have a minimum of five (5) years of successfulexperience in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the methods needed for the properperformance of the WORK of this SECTION. The CONTRACTOR shall employ the adequateresources and equipment necessary to successfully perform the WORK of this SECTION on schedule.

RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall excavate any material encountered to the depth and grades required, shallbackfill such excavations as required, and shall dispose of excess or unsuitable materials fromexcavation as approved by the DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and place necessaryborrow material to properly backfill excavations as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, or asdirected by the DISTRICT.

B. Excavation, dewatering, sheeting, and bracing required shall be carried out so as to prevent anypossibility of undermining or disturbing the foundations of any existing structure or WORK, and sothat all WORK may be accomplished and inspected in the dry, except as directed by the DISTRICT.Aqueous construction may be performed only with prior written approval of the DISTRICT.Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with SECTION 02220.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, at his expense, the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapperlicensed in the State of Florida for the field layout of all WORK indicated or specified in thisSECTION. The CONTRACTOR’s licensed surveyor shall perform all initial Site layout and shallprovide follow-up verification of all WORK underway as necessary.

CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING:

A. The responsibility to retain the services of an independent testing laboratory shall be as defined inSECTION 01410.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, at his own expense, all testing required to establish and maintainhis Quality Control (QC) processes required or specified in this SECTION. Field density tests shall be


in accordance with all applicable ASTM Standards appropriate to each type of material used in theearthwork. Failure to meet the specified density will require the CONTRACTOR to recompact andretest, at his own expense, those areas directed by the DISTRICT.

INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advanced noticeof its his intention to begin new WORK activities.

WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one (1) year from the dateof Substantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

PRODUCTS

MATERIALS ENCOUNTERED:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall excavate all materials encountered which may include, but not necessarilybe limited to:

1. Fill, sand (loose to medium dense, fine grained, with rock fragments), limestone (medium topoorly cemented).

B. The CONTRACTOR shall consider all materials encountered, regardless of type, character,composition and condition thereof unclassified other than as indicated in Article 1.03 Definitions. TheCONTRACTOR shall estimate the quantity of various materials included prior to submitting the BidForm. Rock encountered shall be handled by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to theDISTRICT.

EXECUTION:

SITE PREPARATION:

A. Clearing and Demolition: The CONTRACTOR shall perform clearing and demolition as specified inSECTIONS 02110 and 02050.

B. Stripping: The CONTRACTOR shall remove topsoil from areas within limits of excavation and areasdesignated to receive compaction as shown on the Drawings, required and as provided below:

1. Scrape area clean of all brush, grass, weeds, roots, and other material.

2. Strip to a minimum depth of approximately 6 inches or to a sufficient depth to removeexcessive roots in heavy vegetation or brush areas and as required segregating topsoil. All rootsand branches 1/2 inch in diameter or greater shall be removed.

3. Stockpile topsoil in areas where it will not interfere with construction operations or existingfacilities. Stockpiled topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, debris and stones larger than 2inches in diameter.

C. Existing Levee Roads: The CONTRACTOR shall remove and stockpile any existing shellrock orlimerock material for later use in reconstructing the levee top road.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of allexcess or unsuitable material off-site or in areas otherwise approved by the DISTRICT.

STOCKPILE OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL: The CONTRACTOR shall stockpile excavated materials inareas shown on the Drawings or in areas otherwise approved by the DISTRICT.

EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING:


A. Trenching for Pipes: The CONTRACTOR shall perform trenching for pipes as shown on theDrawings, required, and specified in accordance with SECTION 02221.

B. Sheeting and Bracing: The CONTRACTOR shall provide sheeting and bracing shown on theDrawings or as required in accordance with the following provisions.

1. Use when required by the specifications or Drawings and where resulting slopes fromexcavation or trenching might endanger the structural integrity of in-place or proposedstructures.

2. Provide materials on-site prior to start of excavation. Adjust spacing and arrangement asrequired by conditions encountered.

3. Remove sheeting and bracing as backfill progresses. Fill voids left after withdrawal with sandor other DISTRICT approved material.

4. In-place structures damaged by sheeting and bracing activities shall be repaired by theCONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the DISTRICT.

5. Comply with all applicable Sections of Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA).

6. Comply with all requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Law as specified in the GeneralTerms and Conditions.

C. Excavation for Structures: The CONTRACTOR shall perform excavation for structures as shown,required and specified below:

1. Excavate area adequate to permit efficient placement of structures, pipes and riprap.

2. Excavate by hand in areas where confined space and access restricts the use of machines.

3. Notify the DISTRICT immediately when excavation has reached the depth indicated theDrawings.

4. Restore bottom of excavation to proper elevation with compacted Select Fill or bedding stonein areas that are over excavated.

5. Conform to the requirements of SECTION 02221.

D. Demucking: The CONTRACTOR shall remove all organic soils from areas below structures, piping,and flood protection berms to the lines and grades as shown in the Drawings. Materials excavatedshall not be used for backfill of structures or pipes and shall be removed from the Site.

E. Cross-Sections: For pay quantities and record purposes, the CONTRACTOR shall submit fieldmeasured cross-sections as required by the DISTRICT.

EMBANKMENT:

A. Flood Protection Berm Embankment:

1. Flood Protection Berm embankment shall consist of Select Fill (unless otherwise indicated)and shall be placed to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings. At no location shall thecompleted top elevation be lower than indicated. Flood Protection Berm side slopes indicatedare nominal, and may be varied. Completed side slopes shall be uniform from top to toe of theberm, and shall be smoothly transitioned. The CONTRACTOR shall perform embankmentWORK as shown on the Drawings, required and in accordance with these specifications.

a. Materials suitable for Select Fill shall be placed for the berm in horizontal layers notexceeding 12 inches in loose thickness and compacted as indicated.

b. Rocks exceeding the acceptable size shall be removed from the Site. The acceptablesizes of rocks are shown in the Definitions Section of this specification.


2. Select Fill shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the maximum density at optimummoisture content determined by accordance with ASTM D1557.

B. Final Dressing of Slopes: Following the completion of embankment placement and compaction, theCONTRACTOR shall grade embankment slopes, swales and adjacent transition areas so that they arereasonably smooth and free from irregular surface changes. The CONTRACTOR shall comply withthe following:

1. In areas where the embankment is to have grass, sod, or landscaping, the material within thetop 1 foot of the berm, shall be free of any rocks greater than 2 inches (51 mm) in diameter.

2. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtained from blade grader or similar operations.

3. Provide roundings at bottom of slopes and other breaks in grade.

C. Cross-Sections: Refer to SECTION 01050 for cross-section requirements.

BACKFILLING:

A. Pipe Backfill: The CONTRACTOR shall perform pipe backfill as required, shown, and specified inaccordance with SECTION 02221.

B. Structure Backfill: The CONTRACTOR shall place structural backfill in accordance with the lines,grades, and cross-sections shown in the Drawings or as ordered by the DISTRICT. TheCONTRACTOR shall backfill using Select Fill. Stones or rocks greater than 2 inches (51 mm) in anydimension shall not be placed within 12 inches of the structure. Lifts shall not exceed 12 inches. Thefollowing procedures shall be adhered to:

1. Structure backfill shall be compacted to not less than 95% maximum dry density as measuredby ASTM D1557.

2. Backfill shall not be placed against fresh concrete without the approval of the DISTRICT.Once approved, backfill only after concrete has attained at least 70% design strength. Backfilladjacent to structures only after a sufficient portion of the structure has been built to resist theimposed load.

3. Remove all debris from excavation prior to placement of material.

4. Place backfill in level layers of thickness within the compacting ability of equipment used.

5. Perform backfilling simultaneously on all sides of structures. For walls, backfill shall bebrought up evenly on each side of the wall and sloped to drain away from the wall.

C. Unclassified Backfill: The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that unclassified backfill be placed in 12 inchloose lifts to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or as approved by the DISTRICT. TheCONTRACTOR shall compact unclassified backfill to a density approximating the density ofsurrounding native material and in a manner that will prevent settlement of the completed area.

GRADING: The CONTRACTOR shall perform grading as shown on the Drawings, required, and providedfor below:

A. Grade and compact all areas within the project area, including excavated and filled sections andadjacent transition areas, reasonably smooth, and free from irregular surface changes.

B. Degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtained from blade grader or scraper operations except asotherwise specified.

C. Finished rough grades shall generally be not more than one quarter foot above or below those indicatedwith due allowances for sod.

D. Finish all ditches, swales, and gutters to drain readily.


E. Provide roundings at top and bottom of banks and at other breaks in grade.

RESTORATION: The CONTRACTOR shall restore all areas disturbed by construction activities to equal orbetter condition and to the satisfaction of the DISTRICT.

MAINTENANCE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect newly graded areas from actions of the elements.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall fill, repair, and re-establish grades to the required elevations and slopes forany area that shows settling or erosion occurring prior to sodding.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain sodded areas in accordance with SECTION 02920.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02215 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessaryfor protecting existing structures during construction and for monitoring and documenting theeffectiveness of said protection.

B. Related work Specified Elsewhere.




A. All applicable local (City, County, Village, Town, Tribe, etc.)

B. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):


1.03 DEFINITIONS: Existing Nearby Facilities at Risk (ENFAR) – the collective name of any and all nearbybuildings, structures, facilities, utilities, property, access roads, levees and others located within or adjacent tothe site that could receive seismic motion greater than one-half inch per second (or a more stringent velocityrequired by a permit or agency) and could be at risk for being damaged from ground vibrations due toconstruction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: The Following Compliance Submittals are required:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a complete list of all applicable rules and regulations with whichthey must comply.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit an embankment protection plan to the DISTRICT for approval priorto commencement of construction activities.

C. Pre-Construction Condition Survey

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Pre-Construction survey in accordance with Section 01320Construction, Video and Photographs, no later than 10 days prior to commencing constructionoperations.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule and conduct a pre-construction survey. TheCONTRACTOR shall provide one person from its organization and its specialist on vibrationcontrol to organize and lead a team, with the DISTRICT and a representative of each ENFAR,in making a pre-construction survey. At a minimum, each ENFAR shall be inspected and itscondition documented. The following is a list of each ENFAR specific to this project for whicha pre-construction inspection and report is mandatory whether the ENFAR criteria are met ornot:

a. Ninety-one residential properties with houses and/or pools, sheds and other structureslocated between SW 97th Ave. and SW 94th Ave., between SW 92nd Ave. and SW 87th Ave.and between SW 82nd Ave. to the Palmetto Expressway, immediately north of the C-4Canal.

b. One (1) FPL Transmission Line Easement.


c. Seven (7) roads – SW 97th Ave., SW 94th Ave., SW 92nd Ave., SW 87th Ave., SW 82nd

Ave., and Central Boulevard and Palmetto Expressway.

d. Two (2) aerial utility canal crossings.

e. One (1) pedestrian bridge.

3. The Pre-construction survey document shall include as a minimum:

a. A map of the project site with areas of concern highlighted.

b. Videotaped and photographically documented existing conditions, and instances of pre-existing cracks or other defects. The documentation shall clearly identify each item.Documentation shall describe the location, the direction from which the photo was taken,and dates. Documentation shall include a narrative of each issue. CONTRACTOR shallnote the condition of the existing levees and shall locate and identify any areas wherebulging, sloughing, cracking or existing damage is observed.

c. Actual measured horizontal dimensions (not estimated dimensions) from the nearestoperations to surveyed properties, structures, levees, utilities or facilities. Measured tiesto the project vertical datum. The CONTRACTOR is required to have a ProfessionalSurveyor and Mapper licensed in the State of Florida supervise the measurement andrecording of this information.

d. Pertinent diaries or logs of conversations with owners related to the pre-constructioncondition of the inspected ENFAR’s.

e. The CONTRACTOR shall clearly document existing conditions.

D. Vibration Monitoring Records and Control Plan

1. If there are nearby existing facilities at risk, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a vibrationspecialist who meets the qualifications of Article 1.05 and will be in responsible charge of thework of this Section. The CONTRACTOR will submit the name and qualifications of thevibration specialist including the following:

a. Project names, locations, and dates of services performed.

b. Name and phone number of owner/agency contact who can verify the experience of thespecialist.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a pre-construction condition survey of existing nearbyfacilities at risk and make all such surveys available to the District. A survey method acceptableto the CONTRACTOR’s insurance company shall be used. Damage resulting from constructionis the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the District andoccupants of nearby buildings at least 24 hours before the start of construction.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall control vibrations and monitor each work with approvedseismographs and monitoring equipment located at acceptable locations when constructing nearbuildings, structures, or utilities that may be subject to damage from vibrations. When vibrationdamage to buildings, structures, or utilities is possible, use seismographs capable of recordingparticle velocity for three mutually perpendicular components of vibration. The vibrationspecialist shall interpret the seismograph records to ensure that the data is effectively used in thecontrol of the operations.

E. Seismic monitoring records: The records shall be clearly tied to specific construction events andinclude instrument identification, locations, dates and times with tabulated and summarized results.

F. Damage Investigation Survey Document:

1. Within 7 calendar days of any event causing damage to any property. Such survey shall includeas a minimum:

a. Detailed description of the damage, including videotape or photographic documentation.


b. Name, address and telephone number of the Owner of the damaged property, structures,levees, utilities or facilities. The DISTRICT will supply a master list of adjacent propertyowner information.

c. Evaluation of the cause of the damage and measures taken or to be taken to preventrecurrence.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall supplement this report on a bi-weekly basis (or other time period asdetermined by the DISTRICT) until the damage is repaired or otherwise made whole.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit an overview of the damage survey results including thestatus of any damage events, within 30 calendar days of the completion of all constructionoperations.

G. Damage Inspection Survey:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform Damage Inspection surveys to detect any effects resultingfrom construction operations.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Damage Inspection survey, photographs, and other finalizeddata to the DISTRICT.

3. The DISTRICT shall inspect the properties, levees, structures, facilities and utilities afterreceipt of the report to verify the accuracy of the survey. FDOT, FPL or other property or utilityowners may inspect their structures, facilities, levees or utilities. Any damaged areas, whichwere not specifically identified in the pre-construction survey narrative and photographs, shallbe deemed to have been caused by the construction operations. The CONTRACTOR shall beresponsible for required repairs at no additional cost to the DISTRICT.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: Vibration Control specialist: The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a vibration controlspecialist who is permitted and licensed in the State of Florida with at least 5 consecutive years experience invibration monitoring with at least 3 projects per year as specified in Article 1.04A.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall include in its bid consideration in its progress schedule for time it takes toobtain permits, permit revisions and inspections from the issuing entities.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain copies of all applicable codes, regulations, laws and ordinances andkeep them in its on-site project file.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS ENCOUNTERED:

A. Materials to be encountered include geologic formations for which the CONTRACTOR hasdetermined appropriate methods for achieving required grades, loosening material, and fragmentingaccording to gradation requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure in its bid that it has consideredall the potential expenses related to the construction required to comply with the industry regulationsand with requirements of the plans and specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:


A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to existing properties, utilities, structures,facilities, levees or access roads due to construction activities. CONTRACTOR shall expedientlyrepair (within 30 days or as directed by the DISTRICT) at no additional expense. Upon thecircumstance of damage:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall stop construction operations.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the required damage survey.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall undertake to rectify the damage.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall revise, resubmit, and obtain the DISTRICT’S acceptance, and anyrequired third-party acceptance, on the appropriate construction methods before any furtherwork is undertaken.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall repair damages within 30 days unless the DISTRICT specifies adifferent time frame in writing.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility for the safety of all work activities includinglabor, materials handling, shipment, storage, and equipment.

C. No time extensions will be made, nor will additional compensation be made for delays or othercircumstances related to unacceptable work.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to preserve the materials outside the lines of excavation inan undisturbed condition.

3.02 COORDINATION WITH THIRD PARTIES WITH RESPECT TO CONSTRUCTION: Critical properties,public utilities, levees, structures or facilities may lie close to construction areas associated with this project.During project development agreements may have been made between the DISTRICT and relevant thirdparties. Some of the agreements will guide, restrict and affect the CONTRACTOR’S activities. TheCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for plan implementation and effectiveness while accommodating suchagreements. There will be no extra compensation for activities the CONTRACTOR must pursue to satisfythe conditions.

3.03 TURBIDITY AND EROSION CONTROL: The CONTRACTOR shall install turbidity and erosion controldevices as indicated and as specified herein, at a minimum, prior to start of construction.

3.04 SITE PREPARATION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall demolish structures and other items as shown on the plans and inaccordance with SECTION 02050 Demolition.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall clear the site in accordance with SECTION 02110.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall fill grade and compact the site in accordance SECTION 02200.

D. Vibration Control: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a minimum of 3 seismographs sufficient tomeasure and record ground movements caused by construction. The seismographs shall be placed atlocations to include, but not limited to, the nearest properties, buildings, structures, levees, or utilitiesand such locations are to be approved by the DISTRICT:

1. Seismograph operators shall be qualified personnel capable of setting up instruments atdesignated locations and efficiently recording the construction. Construction shall be controlledin such a manner that the maximum ground vibration level at any structure which is vulnerableto damage shall not exceed a zero-to-peak particle velocity of one-half inch per second or anymore stringent requirement required by a permit or regulatory agency.

2. The instrumentation shall record three (3) orthogonal components (vertical, radial, andtransverse with respect to the location of the construction) of particle velocity direct (or shallhave sufficient resolution of acceleration or displacement such that particle velocity can bereadily and accurately determined from the records). The instantaneous vector sum of the three


(3) directional components of vibration will be used to compute the maximum vibration level.A written memorandum of vibration intensity shall be submitted within 24 hours whenspecifically requested by the DISTRICT, or without request when such intensity exceeds a peakparticle velocity of one and one-half inch per second.

END OF SECTION

Spec. Standard: 08/31/07 02221-1 Revision: 1102/15

SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessaryfor complete and proper trenching, backfilling and compacting as specified herein.


A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory compaction Characteristics of Soil Using theStandard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))

2. D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory compaction Characteristics of Soil Using theModified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))

3. D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using aVibratory Table

4. D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils andCalculation of Relative Density

B. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):


C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

1. CFR 1926 Subpart P - Excavation

D. Florida Statute:

1. Section 553.60 - Trench Safety Act

E. Miscellaneous Project Data:

1. Geotechnical Design and Construction Recommendations: C-4 Canal Bank Improvements -Quick Start Floodwall - North Bank of C-4 Canal Between SW 92nd & 94th Ave. completed byVertical V – Southeast Inc., dated January 6, 2011.

2. Subsurface Exploration Report: C-4 Canal Bank Improvements Project - Palmetto FloodProtection Berm completed by Ardaman & Associates, Inc., dated August 8, 2014.


1.04 SUBMITTALS: For wet trenches that will not be dewatered for construction, submit procedure forconstruction of outfall pipes and inlets in the wet including types of materials to be used for bedding andbackfill, description of construction sequence to be followed and backfill compaction and testingmethodology to be used to achieve acceptable backfill compaction density.



A. The CONTRACTOR shall make all excavations for piping and appurtenant structures in any materialencountered to the depth and grades required, shall backfill such excavations and dispose of excess orunsuitable materials from excavation, and shall provide and place necessary borrow material toproperly backfill excavations, all as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or as directed by theDISTRICT.


B. Excavation, dewatering, sheeting and bracing required shall be carried out so as to prevent anypossibility of undermining or disturbing the foundations of any existing structure or work, and so thatall work may be accomplished and inspected in the dry, except as directed by the DISTRICT. Aqueousconstruction may be performed only with prior approval of the DISTRICT.



1.09 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one (1) year from the dateof Substantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials as required to complete the WORK under thisSection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXTENT OF OPEN EXCAVATION: The CONTRACTOR shall perform the excavation such that at anytime the amount of excavation open will be held to a minimum consistent with normal and orderlyprosecution of the work, or as restricted by permit conditions.

3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION: The CONTRACTOR shall perform trench excavation in accordance with thefollowing.

A. All excavation for piping, inlets and endwalls shall be open cut. Trench sides shall be approximatelyvertical between an elevation of one foot above the top of the pipe and the centerline of the pipe;otherwise, trench sides shall be as vertical as possible or as required. Trenches may be excavated bymachinery to a depth that will not disturb the finish grade.

B. Trench width shall be as narrow as practical and shall not be widened by scraping or looseningmaterial from the sides.

3.03 EXCAVATION BELOW NORMAL GRADE:

A. In the event the CONTRACTOR excavates below the elevation required, the CONTRACTOR shall athis own expense backfill with selected gravel and compact to obtain a suitable pipe bedding all asdirected and to the satisfaction of the DISTRICT.

B. In the event unstable or unsuitable bedding material is encountered at or below the pipe or structurebedding level, the CONTRACTOR shall remove such material and replace it with suitable compactedmaterial.

3.04 BACKFILLING TRENCHES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining the necessary inspections before, during andafter backfilling and shall re-excavate, refill and perform all such related work to obtain satisfactorytest results.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall use materials classified as Select Fill for backfilling trenches and suchgrading on the site as shown on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of any excess fill orunstable material in areas approved by the DISTRICT. Trenches shall be backfilled with fine, looseSelect Fill (see SECTION 02200, paragraph 1.03, A), free from large stones, carefully deposited on


both sides of pipe and thoroughly and carefully compacted until enough fill has been placed to providea cover of at least one foot above the pipe. The remainder of the backfill material may then be placedand compacted in lifts not exceeding 12” in thickness. Water settling may be permitted. TheCONTRACTOR shall submit written request detailing the need to perform water settling and reasonswhy work in the dry is not possible. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit detailed procedures for thereview and approval of the DISTRICT. Whenever trenches have not been properly filled, or ifsettlement occurs, they shall be refilled, smoothed off and finally, made to conform to the surface ofthe ground. Backfilling shall be carefully performed and the surface restored to the elevation shownon the drawings. In unpaved areas the surface of trenches shall conform and be equal to quality,character and material of the surface immediately prior to making the excavation, to the satisfaction ofthe District.

C. For dewatered or dry excavations, place and compact backfill as follows:

1. Place and compact level bottom embedment layer at proper grade to receive and uniformlysupport the inlets and outfall pipes throughout their length. Bottom embedment shall becompacted to 98% maximum dry density as measured by ASTM D1557.

2. Form shallow depression under each pipe joint to facilitate jointing.

3. Add second layer simultaneously to both sides of the pipe with care to avoid displacement ofthe pipe.

4. For backfilling around the piping, place material in maximum 6-inch lifts, compacted to 95%maximum dry density as measured by ASTM D1557, to a level 1-foot above the top of the pipeand in maximum 6-inch lifts thereafter compacted to 98 percent maximum dry density asmeasured by ASTM D1557.

5. For backfilling around the inlets and endwalls, place material in maximum 8-inch liftscompacted to 95% maximum dry density as measured by ASTM D1557.

D. For wet excavations, place and compact backfill per DISTRICT approved Submittal as required in Part1.04-A of this specification section and as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02277 ARTICULATED CONCRETE BLOCK MATTRESS SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials and equipment necessaryfor the construction of an articulated and interlocked anchored concrete block mattress. The articulatedconcrete block mattress system shall include the erosion control fabric, bedding stone, concrete blockunits, cable stayed, and anchoring system.




A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the publications of the organizations listed below in effect at thetime of the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. See thevarious paragraphs for the specified standard. In the case of a conflict between the requirements of thisSECTION and those of the listed document, the requirements of this SECTION shall prevail.



2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

b. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and SteelProducts


1.04 SUBMITTALS: The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following in accordance with SECTION 01300:

A. Shop Drawings showing the type of concrete block and anchoring system proposed for use

B. Detailed description of the method of installation of the blocks, cables and anchoring system

C. Detailed description of the filter fabric to be used and a sample

D. Certificates: The CONTRACTOR shall submit in accordance with SECTION 01300 certificationprepared by a qualified independent testing laboratory indicating the following for each aggregatesource or gradation proposed for use:

1. Gradation: FDOT Section 901







PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE BLOCK MATTRESS:

A. Interlocking Concrete Blocks: The CONTRACTOR shall provide blocks, which comprise the mat,constructed of high strength concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 4000 pounds persquare inch (psi). The blocks shall have a length no longer than 26 inches and a width no greater thaneighteen (18) inches. Each block shall have at least one (1) preformed hole through the block in orderto allow anchor cable to pass through each block.

B. Joints and Cables: The CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete blocks incorporated into the mat thatare connected in such a manner as to form a flexible mat. The joints shall provide resistance tomovement along the long axis of the levee. In the event the blocks are pre-assembled into panels thenplaced on the slope, each panel shall be connected to the adjacent panel to provide a continuousmattress. The connections may be made by utilizing anchor cable couples with longitudinal cables.Locking devices shall be provided at the toe end of the lateral cables and at each end of thelongitudinal cables to contain the blocks. The cables shall be stainless steel, single strand cables withthe diameter being established by the MANUFACTURER to satisfy their panel lifting requirements butin no instance, shall the diameter of the cables be less than 3/8 inch.

C. Open Space Between the Concrete Blocks or Openings in the Blocks: The CONTRACTOR shallprovide concrete blocks that comprise the mat spaced in such a manner as to provide a minimum offive (5) percent but not more than 10 percent open space in the mat. The open space may be providedby openings in the concrete blocks and/or open spaces between adjacent blocks. Openings in theblocks shall be spaced in such a manner that will enhance the removal of water from the bedding layer.The open space in the blocks or between adjacent blocks shall be at least 1/4 inch but no more than 3-1/2 inches wide.

D. Helix Anchor: The CONTRACTOR shall provide screw-type helix anchors. Steel shall conform toASTM A36 and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Anchors shall be a minimum ofsix inches in diameter. Anchors shall have a minimum rod diameter of 5/8 inch and shall have aminimum length of 6-1/2 feet. Anchors must have an eye in the upper end of the anchor with a holediameter of at least 1-1/2 inches. An alternate anchoring system may be utilized subject to theDISTRICT's approval. If an alternate anchoring system is proposed, a description of the method ofinstallation shall be submitted to the DISTRICT within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice toProceed.

2.02 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC: The CONTRACTOR shall provide fabric that complies with FDOTStandard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 985.

2.03 BEDDING STONE: The CONTRACTOR shall provide bedding stone composed of limestone as specified inFDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Section 901. The minimum gradation shallbe FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 57 stone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FABRIC INSTALLATION: The CONTRACTOR shall install the fabric in accordance with theMANUFACTURER’s recommendations and as follows:

A. Prepare slope by grading it as smooth as possible.

B. Inspect the prepared slope for loose or unstable soils or exposed roots and replace such soils andremove exposed roots where needed.

C. Unroll fabric directly onto prepared slope. Fabric shall be laid perpendicular to the flow within a two(2)-foot lap in the direction of the flow.


D. The fabric shall be staked or pinned where necessary to prevent the fabric sections from floating.

E. Toe-in fabric at side slope as shown on Drawings.

F. The upper part of the fabric shall be toed-in to a trench as recommended by the MANUFACTURER.

3.02 BEDDING STONE PLACEMENT: The CONTRACTOR shall place bedding stone to depth shown inaccordance with the following requirements:

A. The stone shall be placed by proceeding from the toe of the slope upward.

B. Minimize height from which bedding material is dropped.

C. At no time should stone be dumped onto fabric from top of the slope and allowed to roll down thesurface of the fabric.

D. Placing of bedding stone by methods that will tend to segregate particle sizes will not be permitted.

E. Thickness of bedding shall have a tolerance of minus zero inches to plus three (3) inches of thethickness shown on the Drawings.

F. Any damage to the filter fabric or base during placing of the bedding shall be repaired at theCONTRACTOR's expense before proceeding with the work.

G. Compaction of the bedding will not be required, but the bedding shall be finished to present an evensurface free from mounds or windrows.

3.03 CONCRETE BLOCK PLACEMENT:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall install blocks individually by threading each block with cable to produce acontinuous mattress or by placing pre-assembled panels and installed in accordance with theMANUFACTURER’s recommendations. The blocks shall be installed perpendicular to the flow-waycenterline. Anchors shall be installed as per the MANUFACTURER’s recommendations.

B. Upon completion of the concrete block placement, the CONTRACTOR shall fill all the voids with No.57 stone.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02278 HIGH PERFORMANCE TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: This CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor necessary forthe installation of high performance turf reinforcement mat (HPTRM) and geotextile. Related WorkSpecified Elsewhere:




A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the publications of the organizations listed below in effect at the timeof the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. See the variousparagraphs for the specified standard. In the case of a conflict between the requirements of thisSECTION and those of the listed document, the requirements of this SECTION shall prevail.


a. D 123 – Standard Terminology Relating to Geotextiles

b. D 276 – Standard Test Method for Identification of Fibers in Textiles

c. D 3786 – Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted Goods andNonwoven Fabrics

d. D 4354 – Practice for Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing.

e. D 4355 – Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Ultraviolet Lightand Water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus).

f. D 4435 – Standard Test Method for Rock Bolt Anchor Pull Test

g. D 4439 – Standard Terminology for Geosynthetics.

h. D 4491 – Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity.

i. D 4533 – Test Method for Index Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles.

j. D4595 – Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width StripMethod.

k. D 4632 – Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles.

l. D 4751 – Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile.

m. D 4759 – Practice for Determining the Specification Conformance of Geosynthetics.

n. D 4833 – Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, andRelated Products.

o. D 4873 – Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geotextiles.

p. D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rollsand Samples

q. D 6818 – Test Method for Ultimate Tensile Properties of Turf Reinforcement Mats.

2. Geosynthetic Accreditation Institute (GAI) – Laboratory Accreditation Program (LAP)

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Geotextile: A polypropylene, staple fiber, non-woven needle punched geotextile that is resistant toultraviolet degradation and to the biological and chemical environments normally found in soils. Usedfor permanent placement on slopes to prevent migration of fines.

B. High Performance Turf Reinforcement Mat (HPTRM): A Turf Reinforcement Mat that is a long term,non-biodegradable rolled erosion control product composed of 100% UV-stabilized, non-degradable,synthetic materials processed into a three-dimensional reinforcement matrix designed for permanent andcritical hydraulic applications where discharges exert velocities and shear stresses that exceed the limits


of mature natural vegetation. The EPA designates a turf reinforcement mat as “high performance” whenthe tensile strength is equal to or greater than 3,000 lbs/ft.

C. Maximum Average Roll Value (MaxARV): Property value calculated as typical plus two (2) standarddeviations. Statistically, it yields a 97.7 percent degree of confidence that any sample taken duringquality assurance testing will be below the value reported.

D. Minimum Average Roll Value (MARV): Property value calculated as typical minus two (2) standarddeviations. Statistically, it yields a 97.7 percent degree of confidence that any sample taken during qualityassurance testing will exceed value reported.

E. Typical Roll Value: Property value calculated from average or mean obtained from test data.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. MANUFACTURER’s Literature: The CONTRACTOR shall make submittals in accordance withSECTION 01300.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, in booklet form, the MANUFACTURER’s literature for the productused on the job. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit the MANUFACTURER’s ISO 9001 certificationor state their quality control is in accordance with ASTM D4354.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a certificate from a Geosynthetic Accreditation Institute LaboratoryAccreditation Program (GAI-LAP) lab stating the name of the HPTRM MANUFACTURER, productname, style, chemical compositions of filaments yarns, and other pertinent information to fully describethe geotextile/HPTRM.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings including the MANUFACTURER’s installation planto the DISTRICT for approval prior to delivery of the HPTRM to the jobsite. Nontraditional constructionmethods may be required to perform the installation of HPTRM.

E. Prior to placement of the geotextile and HPTRM, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT whowill inspect the soil surfaces for conformance.

F. Anchor Load Tests: The CONTRACTOR shall submit earth percussion anchor pullout test reports testingthe minimum required pullout resistance as stated in this specification. Load tests shall be performedfor every 100 linear feet of embankment on each canal bank installed.



A. STORAGE: Prior to use, the CONTRACTOR shall store the HPTRM in a clean, dry place, out of directsunlight, not subject to extremes of either hot or cold and with the MANUFACTURER’s protectivecover in place. Receiving, storage, and handling at the jobsite shall be in accordance with therequirements in ASTM D4873.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING:

A. Geotextiles and HPTRM’s shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance with thisspecification. Sampling for testing shall be in accordance with ASTM D4354. Certified test results shallbe provided for each product prior to furnishing the material.

B. Acceptance shall be in accordance with ASTM D4759 based on testing of either conformance samplesobtained using Procedure A of ASTM D4354, or based on MANUFACTURER’s certifications andtesting of quality control samples obtained using Procedure B of ASTM D4354.

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for the DISTRICTas requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance notice to theDISTRICT of its intention to begin new WORK activities. Inspections shall be conducted by the DISTRICTfor the following portions of the installation of the geotextile and HPTRM:


A. The DISTRICT shall inspect the final grading of canal bank for which the CONTRACTOR proposes toinstall geotextiles and HPTRM to ensure that it meets the requirements of Section 3.01A. If a rainfallevent occurs that damages the final grading of the canal bank during the geotextile and HPTRMinstallation process, the DISTRICT must be present to approve further installation of the geotextile andHPTRM.

B. The DISTRICT shall inspect the top anchor trench to ensure that the proper geometry is achieved andthat pins are provided at the design interval per Section 2.03A prior to backfilling the top anchor trench.

C. The DISTRICT shall conduct random pull out tests of the earth percussion anchors. The earth percussionanchors shall have a pullout resistance of 150 lbs and shall be tested at random locations identified bythe DISTRICT in accordance with ASTM D 4435. At a minimum, one (1) pull out test shall be conductedper 100 linear feet of installed geotextile and HPTRM per canal bank. The CONTRACTOR shall replaceall failed percussion anchors at no additional cost to the DISTRICT. Replacement anchors shall beinstalled to a depth sufficient to meet minimum required pullout resistance.

D. Prior to the installation of sod on the geotextile and HPTRM, the DISTRICT shall inspect the following:

1. There are no surface irregularities or damage that could present a potential failure in the system.

2. All pins and earth percussion anchors are installed per Section 3.02.

3. All excess tendons from installed earth percussion anchors are removed.

E. The DISTRICT shall conduct random inspections of the geotextile and HPTRM installation underwaterat a minimum of 100 feet per 1,000 linear feet of completed canal bank.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HIGH PERFORMANCE TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT (HPTRM):

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a HPTRM manufactured for the purpose of protecting steep slopes,canal banks and channels. The HPTRM shall be made of 100% UV-stabilized polypropylene and containno biodegradable components or materials to ensure long term design life. The HPTRM shall becomposed of a three dimensional matrix, that will maintain its three dimensional stability withoutlaminated or stitched layers. The HPTRM shall not lose its structural integrity, and shall not unravel orseparate when it is cut in the field. The following attributes differentiate a HPTRM:

1. The mat shall meet the following requirements: (range, minimum, or maximum)

Property Test Method Test Parameter Units Property Requirement

Thickness ASTM D6525 Range mm(in)

6.4 – 12.7(0.25 - 0.50)

Resiliency ASTM D6524 Minimum percent 70

Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D6566 Range g/m2

(oz/yd2)270 - 505(8.0 – 15.0)

Ultimate Tensile Strength ASTM D6818 Minimum kN/m(lbs/ft)

43.8x 43.8(3,000 x 3,000)

Tensile Elongation ASTM D6818 Maximum percent 65

Light Penetration(% Passing)

ASTM D6567 Minimum percent 10

UV Resistance ASTM D4355 Minimum percent 80 @3000 hrs


B. Manufacturing Quality Control: Testing shall be performed at a laboratory accredited by GAI-LAP fortests required for the geosynthetic, at frequency exceeding ASTM D4354, with following minimumacceptable testing frequency:

PropertyTest Frequency

m2 (yd2)

Mass Per Unit Area 1/20,000 (1/24,000)

Thickness 1/20,000 (1/24,000)

Tensile Strength/Elongation 1/20,000 (1/24,000)

Light Penetration (% passing) 1/20,000 (1/24,000)

Resiliency 1/100,000 (1/120,000)

UV Resistance Every 3 years

2.02 GEOTEXTILE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a geotextile that is a polypropylene, staple fiber, needle punchednonwoven heat set on one side to ensure consistent roll width and rollout. The nonwoven geotextileshall be resistant to ultraviolet degradation and to biological and chemical environments normally foundin soils. The nonwoven geotextile shall meet the following minimum average roll values (MARV):

Property of Geotextile Test Method Units PropertyRequirement

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D4632N(lbs)

712(160)

Grab Elongation ASTM D4632 Percent 50

Puncture Strength ASTM D4833N(lbs)

378(85)

Mullen Burst ASTM D3786kPa(psi)

1930(280)

Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D4533N(lbs)

267(60)

Apparent Opening Size(Maximum Average Roll Value)

ASTM D4751mm(US Std. Sieve)

0.212(70)

Permittivity ASTM D4491 sec-1 1.3

Water Flow Rate ASTM D4491l/min/m2

(gpm/ft2)4480(110)

UV Resistance ASTM D4355 Percent 70 at 500 hours

B. Quality Control: Manufacturing Quality Control (MQC): Testing shall be performed at a laboratoryaccredited by GAI-LAP for tests required for the geotextile, at frequency exceeding ASTM D4354.

2.03 ANCHORING DEVICES:

A. Pins: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish metal pins with a minimum length of 24 inches with a steelwasher located at the head of the pin. The metal pins provide for temporary tie down of the HPTRM tothe slope in the locations specified to aid with vegetation establishment. Locations of the pins along the


top anchor trench are indicated in the Drawings at the center of the one foot x one foot trench spacedone foot apart. Locations of the pins along the vertical overlaps are spaced one foot apart except forwhere an earth percussion anchor is located. Pin pattern throughout slope face shall be 1.5 pins persquare yard or per the MANUFACTURER’s recommendation, whichever is more stringent.

PYSICAL PROPERTIES

Component Physical Properties

Metal Pin 0.2 in diameter steel

Metal Washer 1.5 in. diameter

B. Earth Percussion Anchors:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish earth percussion anchors with minimum drive depths of 36inches and minimum pullout resistance of 150 lbs for permanent tie down of the HPTRM to theslope in the locations specified in the Drawings.

2. Percussion anchors shall be placed in a grid pattern throughout the HPTRM as shown on theDrawings. Percussion anchor spacing shall include anchors along top and bottom trenches, alongeach side in the overlap areas and at ends of HPTRM.

3. The earth percussion anchor components shall be made of materials suitable to resist corrosionand UV degradation particularly at the soil/ air interface. The anchor head shall have relativelysmooth edges to minimize abrasion and installation damage to the HPTRM. The anchor shallconsist of a self-setting wedge grip used to lock and hold the loading applied to an anchor. Theanchor shall reside at a minimum depth of 36 inches after it is locked in place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall grade surface on which the Geotextile and HPTRM is to be placed to the neatlines and grades as shown on the Drawings. The surface shall be smooth and free of loose rocks, clods,holes, depressions, projections, muddy conditions, and standing or flowing water. Any irregularities shallbe removed so as to insure continuous, intimate contact of the geotextile with the surface.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: The CONTRACTOR shall place the HPTRM in accordance with theMANUFACTURER’s recommendations and the following requirements:

A. Install the geotextile at elevation and alignment indicated in the Drawings, typically from the bottomanchor trench up to one foot above the average canal water elevation as shown in the Drawings. Overlapadjacent geotextile rolls 18 inches and temporarily anchor the geotextile with appropriate holdingmechanisms (i.e. pins) during installation to ensure correct placement.

B. Install the HPTRM at elevation and alignment indicated in the Drawings in accordance with the approvedinstallation plan.

C. Secure the HPTRM into the bottom anchor trench below the water line at the elevation indicated in theDrawings, ensuring that the HPTRM is permanently anchored with earth percussion anchors spaced 4-feet apart, in between lapped ends and at the lapped ends, whichever is less.

D. Unroll HPTRM up the slope, overlapping adjacent rolls a minimum of 6 inches (unless otherwisespecified by the MANUFACTURER). The HPTRM shall be unrolled along the placement area andloosely laid (not stretched) in such a manner so that it will conform to the placed on or against underlyingsoils. The upstream HPTRM shall overlap the abutting downstream HPTRM so to shingle panels of theHPTRM in such a manner that works with the flow of water in the canal to reduce undermining of theHPTRM at vertical overlaps. Horizontal overlaps are not permitted.

E. Extend the HPTRM to an elevation one foot below the crest or berm and 2 feet into the embankment,secure into the top anchor trench with pins spaced one foot apart per MANUFACTURE’s installationguidelines. Backfill the top anchor trench with select fill material and compact according to SECTION02200.


F. Secure the HPTRM to the finished slope with pins installed in a pattern of 1.5 pins per square yard orper MANUFACTURER’s installation guidelines, whichever is more stringent. Vertical overlaps must besecured using earth percussion anchors starting at the bottom anchor trench and installed every 4 feetwith 2 feet long pins spaced one foot apart from and between the percussion anchors to the top anchortrench. Increased anchoring frequency may be required if Site conditions are such that the DISTRICTdetermines it necessary.

G. Alternate installation methods must be approved by the DISTRICT prior to execution.

H. Should the HPTRM be torn or punctured, or the overlaps or sewn joint disturbed, as evidenced by visiblefabric damage, subgrade pumping, intrusion, or grade distortion, the backfill around the damaged ordisplaced area shall be removed and restored to the original approved condition. The repair shall consistof a patch of the same type of HPTRM being used, overlaying the existing HPTRM. HPTRM panelsjoined by overlap shall have the patch extend a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of any damaged area.

I. The earth percussion anchors shall have a minimum pullout resistance of 150 lbs and shall be tested atrandom locations identified by the DISTRICT in accordance with paragraph 1.08.C.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02401 DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary or Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, material and equipment necessary forthe removal of all surface and subsurface waters from excavation areas.

B. Dewatering is not a mandatory requirement of the work and shall be performed only as considerednecessary by the CONTRACTOR to facilitate his work and to expedite installation and backfilling ofthe outfall structures in an approved manner. CONTRACTOR may elect to construct the outfallstructures in the wet using appropriate granular materials for bedding and backfilling of the pipe at hissole option and risk. Procedures for construction in the wet shall be submitted by the CONTRACTORfor review and approval by the DISTRICT prior to commencing with the work.



2. SECTION 01530 - Temporary Barriers and Controls


A. Geotechnical Design and Construction Recommendations – C-4 Canal Bank Improvements – QuickStart Floodwall – North Bank of C-4 Canal between SW 92nd & 94th Ave., completed by Vertical V -Southeast, Inc., dated January 6, 2011.

B. Subsurface Exploration Report – C-4 Canal Bank Improvements Project – Palmetto Flood ProtectionBerm completed by Ardaman & Associates, Inc., dated August 8, 2014.


1.04 SUBMITTALS: The CONTRACTOR shall make submittals in accordance with SECTION 01300 and thefollowing:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the DISTRICT a dewatering plan, which includes qualificationsof the design professional(s), the dewatering system, dewatering equipment, safety procedures,sequence of construction, and re-watering procedures, prior to the start of any such operations.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain a dewatering permit from the Water Control Section of the MiamiDade County Department of Regulatory and Economic Resources prior to the start of any dewateringoperations. Additional information about this permit can be obtained from the County by calling (305)372-6681.

C. Acquire all permits required to discharge water and protect waterways from turbidity during thedewatering operation. Discharge of waters off the canal right-of-way will not be permitted.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the construction ofdewatering systems.

B. Qualifications of the dewatering system design engineer must demonstrate a minimum of ten (10)years experience doing similar work as approved by the DISTRICT and be a Professional ENGINEERlicensed in the State of Florida.



A. This is a performance specification. Except as otherwise specified or indicated, selection ofequipment, materials, and methods shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. The dewatering of anyexcavation areas and disposal of all water handled shall be in strict accordance with all local and stategovernment rules and regulations.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design of the dewatering system including, but notnecessarily limited to, required pump equipment, temporary shoring, as well as any miscellaneoustemporary structures required.

1.07 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The Contractor shall provide at least 48 hours notice of its intentionto begin new WORK activities.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: All materials used in the construction of the dewatering facilities shall beselected, furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the design as submitted to theDISTRICT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DEWATERING:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate equipment for removal of storm and subsurface waters,which may accumulate within the excavations.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work for the water control structure within the excavation freefrom water. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, maintain, and operate all necessary pumpingand other equipment necessary for dewatering the work area.

1. All dewatering equipment shall be in first-class condition and shall at all times be maintainedand operated at the efficiency and capacity necessary for maintaining the interior of theexcavations free from standing water or wet conditions that prevent proper construction.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide dewatering facilities with stand-by pumps with 100 percent standbycapacity.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all local, state and federal regulations when disposing of watergenerated by dewatering operations.

3.02 TURBIDITY BARRIER: The CONTRACTOR shall install and maintain suitable turbidity barriers asdescribed in SECTION 01530.

3.03 REMOVAL OF DEWATERING SYSTEM: The CONTRACTOR shall remove the dewatering system in sucha manner as to allow groundwater elevations to slowly return to natural elevations.

3.04 REGULATION SCHEDULE:

A. Canal Water Levels:

C-4 Canal historical surface water elevations from 1/8/1993 to 2/16/2011 measured at DistrictMonitoring Station T5, located on the C-4 Canal approximately 1 mile west of the Project area: 7.6 ftNGVD 29 maximum, 3.4 ft NGVD 29 average and 2.0 ft NGVD 29 minimum. Additional information


about canal stages measured at Monitoring Station T5 can be obtained from the District’s DBHYDROdatabase.

B. Noise Abatement: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain throughout the course ofthe work, mufflers, noise-control enclosures, or other noise control methods, measures, and features onand around all dewatering pumps and their prime movers such that steady noise emanating from thisequipment does not exceed the permissible sound levels defined in the local City and Countyordinances.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02431 CATCH BASINS, FRAMES AND GRATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessaryfor the construction and installation of the precast concrete catch basins shown on the Drawings, Specified oras directed by the DISTRICT.


A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Roadway Traffic & Design Standards, 2010 Edition

2. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2010 edition

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections


1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals for Catch Basins, Frames and Grates in accordance withSECTION 01300 and the following provisions. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible forcoordination of materials, equipment, and installation regardless if the submittals are made together orseparately.

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit dimensional drawings of catch basins showing wallthickness, reinforcement, locations and invert elevations of all penetrations, and details ofconstruction and installation.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit detail layout drawings of all inlet/catch basin grates andframes. The submittal shall include all dimensions, connection details and loading capacity.



1.07 CERTIFICATIONS: (Not Used)

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48-hours notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.


PART 2 - PPRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: The CONTRACTOR shall provide materials conforming to applicablesections of the Specification or Applicable Publications as described below.

A. Concrete: The concrete shall conform to the requirements of FDOT Standard Specification 449-2.

B. Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of FDOT Standard Specification415.


C. Grates, Frames and Covers: The grates, frames and covers specified on the Drawings shall be gray-iron castings conforming to FDOT Standard Specification 962-4.1.

D. Inlets: Inlets shall be precast concrete and shall conform to the requirements of FDOT StandardSpecification 449.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION: The CONTRACTOR shall perform excavation to the required depth and dimensions shownon the Drawings. If rock is encountered, the bottom of the excavation should be carried down at least sixinches below the elevation of the bottom of the structure and backfilled with suitable material.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION: The CONTRACTOR shall perform construction in accordance with FDOT StandardSpecification 425 and ASTM C 478.

3.03 BACKFILL: The CONTRACTOR shall backfill with suitable material as specified in Section 02200.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02434 HDPE CULVERTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all excavation, sheeting, backfill, bracing, jointsealant, erosion control filter material, dewatering equipment and operations, and other labor,materials, and equipment necessary to properly install the culverts as shown on the Drawings andspecified herein.

1. SECTION 02200 - Earthwork2. SECTION 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting


A. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. M 294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm (12” to60”) Diameter


1. D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastics Pipe for Sewers andOther Gravity Flow Applications.

2. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using FlexibleElastomeric Seals (up to 25 ft of head pressure)

3. D3261 – Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion PE Fittings for PE Pipe and Tubing

4. D3350 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials

5. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

6. F894 - Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe.

7. F2164 - Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Piping SystemsUsing Hydrostatic Pressure

8. F2306 – Standard Specification for 12 to 60 inch [300 to 1500 mm] Annular Corrugated ProfileWall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm Sewer and SubsurfaceDrainage Application

9. F2487 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of InstalledCorrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines

10. F2510 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced ConcreteManhole Structures and Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipes

11. F2620 – Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining of Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

C. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Section 948-2 – Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing and Pipe

2. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2010 edition


1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall make submittals for culverts in accordance with SECTION 01300 and thefollowing provisions. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordination of materials,equipment, and installation regardless of if the submittals are made together or separately.

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit dimensional drawings of culverts showing all dimensionsand details of construction and installation including wall reinforcing and joint details.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Material Certifications.


B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a culvert installation plan. The plan shall include at a minimum thefollowing:

1. Details on the methods used to restrain the pipe to prevent floatation and movement during theinstallation of the backfill material/excavatable flowable fill.

2. Details on the placement of backfill/flowable fill to include the number and thickness ofindividual lifts.

3. Calculations demonstrating that the culvert pipe restraint system is adequate to counteract theeffects of floatation during the placement of the individual lifts of flowable fill



1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING: The CONTRACTOR shall provide a Certificate of Compliance frommanufacturer.

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance noticeof its intention to begin new WORK activities.

1.09 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one (1) year from the dateof Substantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of SECTION 00700 - General Terms andConditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish culverts as shown.

A. The pipe shall be manufactured from a high density polyethylene material which meets or exceeds theminimum cell classification requirements as specified in ASTM F894 and ASTM D3350. The pipeshall be manufactured by the continuous winding of a closed profile onto suitably sized mandrels. Itshall be produced to constant internal diameters.

B. If rework compounds are required for HDPE pipes, only those generated in the Manufacturer’s ownplant from resin compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall beused.

C. The polyethylene raw material shall contain additives that provide UV stabilization.

D. The pipe material shall be resistant to corrosion resulting from the presence of Hydrogen Sulfide andpH values between 2 and 13.

E. The nominal inside diameter of the pipe shall be true to the specified pipe size.

F. HDPE fittings and transitions shall be in accordance with ASTM D3261, ASTM F2620, and ASTMD3350.

G. Backfill Material: Backfill shall be as specified in SECTION 02200.

H. The pipe shall be homogenous and as uniform as commercially practical in color, density and otherphysical properties. The pipe shall be free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or otherdefects.

I. Excavatable flowable fill shall conform to the requirements specified in Division III of the FDOTStandard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2010 edition, and herein. Specificreferences are as follows:

a. Portland Cement (Types I, II or III): Section 931b. Flu Ash, Slag and other Pozzolanic materials for Portland Cement Concrete: Section 929.c. Fine Aggregate (sand): Section 902. Clean sand with 100% passing 3/8” sieve and not

more than 10% passing 200 mesh may be used.d. Water: Section 923.


J. Filter fabric shall conform to the requirements of Type D-3 filter fabric as specified in Index 199 of theFDOT Design Standards, 2010 edition.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION: Trench excavation shall be performed in accordance with SECTION 02221.

3.02 LAYING PIPE:

A. Installation of the pipe shall be in accordance with these specifications and ASTM D2321.

B. Through all steps of construction, all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure a safe workingenvironment in accordance with all applicable safety codes and standards.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall install pipe to the line and grade indicated on the Drawings. TheCONTRACTOR shall inspect each pipe before laying, replace any damaged or defective pipe from thejob, and replace it.

D. Pipe shall be laid on a stable foundation providing continuous support to the pipe. A trench cut in rock,stony, or unstable soils shall be excavated to 6” below pipe bottom grade, and brought back to gradewith #57 stone or flowable fill. All protrusions, boulders and large stones shall be removed. Thebedding shall be graded to the required slope before placing the pipe in the trench. Where beddingmust be removed for pipe joint alignment and joining purposes, the bedding shall be replaced andcompacted in accordance with the contract requirements. Flowable fill or #57 stone will be used fromthe pipe bedding up to the center line of the pipe. The CONTRACTOR shall adequately secure thepipe prior to any placement of flowable fill to avoid floatation.

E. Bedding rock and pipe shall be installed in the dry. Aqueous construction may be performed only withwritten approval of the District.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall assemble/fabricate all joints in accordance with the recommendations of themanufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all special tools and appliances required for thejointing assembly. The CONTRACTOR shall use care in handling the pipe to prevent breakage.

G. After each joint has been made, the CONTRACTOR shall check pipe for alignment and grade. Thetrench bottom shall form a continuous and uniform bearing and support for the pipe at every pointbetween joints. The CONTRACTOR shall apply sufficient pressure in making the joint to assure thatthe joint is "home," as defined in the standard installation instructions provided by the pipemanufacturer. Driving or ramming by hand or machinery is not allowed. To assure proper pipealignment and joint makeup, the CONTRACTOR shall place sufficient pipe zone material to secure thepipe from movement before the next joint is installed.

H. Install a filter fabric jacket/wrap (Type D-3) around all pipe joints and each joint between a pipe and astructure in accordance with section 430-4.1 of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and BridgeConstruction, 2010 edition and Index Nos. 201 and 280 of the FDOT Design Standards, 2010 edition.

3.03 JOINING AND CONNECTION PIPE: The CONTRACTOR shall connect pipe, fittings, and appurtenancesin accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.

3.04 LEAK TESTING

A. Installed sections of PE Profile Wall pipe shall be examined for leaks by ex-filtration where the groundwater is below the pipe invert, or by infiltration where the ground water is above the pipe invert.CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing temporary facilities, as needed, to isolate the test segmentfrom canal water fluctuations or other variables.

1. Infiltration Testing: The ground water table around the pipe must be at least 1 foot above thehighest elevation of the pipe invert for the section being examined. When the pipe issufficiently large, the joints may be examined visually for leaks. For smaller pipe, use CCTVinspection equipment. No leaks should be observed. If a leak is observed, it will be necessary tolower the water table below the area of the leak, and to completely dry and clean the area priorto undertaking a repair.


2. Exfiltration Testing: The ground water table around the pipe must be less than 6” below thelowest elevation of the pipe invert of the section being examined. Fill the pipe section to two(2) feet above the highest pipe invert. Allow to stand for a minimum of 12 hours. (The profilewall PE pipe will ‘relax’ due to the imposed internal pressure by minor deflection of the insidesurface of the profile wall, increasing the volume inside the pipe.) Add additional water asrequired to return the height of standing water to two (2) feet. Let stand for 1 hour and measurethe amount of water required to return the standing head to two (2) feet. Repeat three (3) times.The volume of ‘make-up’ water required in each subsequent step should be less than thepreceding step. The values of ‘make-up’ water over time should trend to a value less than 25USG per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day.

3.05 EXCESS EXCAVATION: The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excavated material not required for backfillat an approved off site location or incorporated suitable material as embankment on site.

3.06 BACKFILL REQUIREMENTS: Backfilling shall be accomplished as specified in SECTION 02221.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02435 TURBIDITY CONTROL AND MONITORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment, labor and materialsand utilize appropriate means and methods of turbidity controls necessary and sufficient to ensure thatthe more restrictive and protective of the following are achieved at all times: (1) all applicable Statewater quality standards, as prescribed in Chapter 62-302.530, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.),incorporated by reference, (2) all applicable environmental permit conditions, as prescribed in thepermits appended to the Contract, and (3) all stormwater and erosion control shall be in accordancewith the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater Erosion andSedimentation Control Inspector’s Manual.




A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the standards or codes of the organizations listed below in effect atthe time of the advertisement for bids form a part of this SECTION to the extent referenced.

B. The environmental protection rules and standards in the applicable sections of the Florida AdministrativeCode (F.A.C.) incorporated herein by reference are:

1. http://www.dep.state.fl.us/legal/Rules/rulelistnum.htm.2. Design and Performance Standards - 62-25.025 F.A.C.3. Quality Assurance - 62-160 F.A.C.4. Surface Waters of the State - 62-301 F.A.C.5. Surface Water Quality Standards - 62-302 F.A.C.6. Generic Permits - 62-621.300(2)&(4) F.A.C.

C. Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP):

1. Florida Stormwater Erosion and Sedimentation Control Inspector’s Manual

D. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction - Sections 104-1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7

E. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE)

1.03 SUBMITTALS: The CONTRACTOR shall make submittals for the turbidity control and monitoring systemin accordance with SECTION 01300 and the requirements herein.

A. Provide details of the turbidity controls proposed.

B. Provide proposed layout of the turbidity controls and monitoring system on the Drawings, and adjust,as needed, due to construction sequencing/phasing.

C. Obtain the monitoring data and prepare quarterly reports in accordance with Paragraph 3.03B.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall have at least one (1) employee, on-site, certified by the Florida Departmentof Environmental Protection as a Stormwater Erosion and Sedimentation Control Inspector. Thecertification shall be submitted to the DISTRICT for review prior to the installation, inspection,maintenance, repair or replacement of any erosion or sedimentation control Best Management


Practices, including but not limited to the turbidity controls. The turbidity monitoring shall beconducted according to the FDEP-approved procedures.

1.05 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FABRIC: The CONTRACTOR shall provide floating turbidity barriers with fabric that is flexible and ofsufficiently fine mesh to prevent passage of suspended material through the fabric. The floating turbiditybarriers shall extend to within a foot of the bottom of the canal except in the areas with the potential for thepresence of manatees the barriers shall be two (2) feet above the bottom.

2.02 FLOATS: The CONTRACTOR shall provide floats for the turbidity barriers of sufficient buoyancy toprevent the top of the barrier from submerging under any water and wind conditions. If the top of the barrierbecomes submerged for any reason, the CONTRACTOR shall suspend construction operations until thecondition is corrected.

2.03 ANCHORS AND WEIGHTS: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain an anchor system to securethe turbidity barrier in position. Attach weights to the barrier as necessary to keep the fabric at an angle to thevertical of 30 degrees or less. Fabric material shall not be attached to the canal bottom.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TURBIDITY BARRIERS:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall install and maintain the turbidity barriers as noted in the Drawings andwhere necessary to maintain turbidity releases at or below the permit compliance levels. Turbiditybarriers shall be installed prior to any backfilling, clearing and grubbing, dredging, or excavation andmaintained in place until construction is complete and turbidity from construction has dissipated. Allbarriers shall be adequately marked and appropriate signage erected to identify them as obstructions tonavigation.

B. The turbidity barriers shall be made of material in which manatees cannot become entangled, shall beproperly secured, and shall be regularly monitored to avoid manatee entanglement or entrapment. Thebarriers must not impede manatee movement.

C. The applicable U.S. Amy Corps of Engineers in-water work protection guidelines for the endangeredWest Indian Manatee incorporated herein by reference are:http://www.saj.usace.army.mil/Portals/44/docs/regulatory/sourcebook/endangered_species/Manatee/2011_StandardConditionsForIn-waterWork.pdfAny rips or tears that occur in the turbidity barriermaterial during use shall be repaired or replaced immediately by the CONTRACTOR at its expense.Rips or tears that occur in the turbidity barrier material in use that are not repaired or replacedimmediately by the CONTRACTOR will result in a suspension of excavation and/or constructionoperations, and shall require repairs and replacements as a prerequisite to the resumption of WORK.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall keep in place and maintain all barriers until the WORK is complete(construction areas stabilized with vegetation) and turbidity levels return to the background levelsbased on the monitoring results. Upon completion of use, the CONTRACTOR shall remove theturbidity barriers and associated items to an off-site location at its own expense.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct its operations at all times in a manner that minimizes turbidity. TheCONTRACTOR is required to conform to the State Water Quality standards as prescribed in Chapter62-302.530, F.A.C., and to meet the special requirements of any environmental permits that have beenissued.

F. The turbidity controls shall be inspected by the CONTRACTOR every work day, after every rainfallevent of 0.5 inches or greater in a 24 hour period, and after every extreme weather event that could


dislodge or damage the turbidity controls, to assure that the turbidity controls remain properlyinstalled, undamaged, and fully functional at all times.

3.02 EROSION CONTROL: The CONTRACTOR shall prevent and control erosion, sedimentation and waterpollution as per the Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Specification Sections 104-1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7 andFDEP regulations and permit conditions.

3.03 MONITORING:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct and record the results of turbidity monitoring appropriate to theconditions and at the locations, times, and frequencies specified below. An FDEP approved TurbidityMonitoring Log is attached (Appendix A) for the CONTRACTOR’s use.

1. Background Monitoring Location: At least 100 feet (or as specified in the applicableenvironmental permit) upstream of any construction activities that may generate turbidity withina canal or conveyance feature outside the construction area, in the middle of the canal, at mid-depth in the water column, and outside of any visible turbidity plume.

2. Compliance Monitoring Location: Located in the canal or water body adjacent to each WORKarea, downstream or radial to the construction or maintenance work area, directly outside of theturbidity barriers, and within the densest portion of any visible plume.

3. Sampling Time:

a. During Activities or Environmental Conditions that Can Generate Construction-RelatedTurbidity: Water samples for the turbidity measurement shall be collected beginning nosooner than one (1) hour after and no later than two (2) hours after construction activitycommences (or as specified in the applicable environmental permit) and every four (4)hours thereafter until the work day ends. Water samples shall be collected at the sametime(s) every work day according to this schedule. Any substantial deviation from thisschedule must be approved by the DISTRICT, unless otherwise compelled by forcemajeure, in which case, an explanation must be provided verbally as soon as possible andin writing within 48 hours of the deviation.

b. During Activities and Conditions That Cannot Generate Construction-Related Turbidity:Once daily at 10:00 AM or as specified in the applicable environmental permit.

4. Equipment: The turbidity monitoring equipment shall meet the specifications and be calibrated,maintained, repaired, and replaced according to the methods, procedures, and frequencies setforth in Chapter 62-160, F.A.C.

5. Records Management: The individual conducting the turbidity monitoring shall transcribe thereadings to the approved Daily Turbidity Monitoring Log form (Appendix A) and sign and datethe form at the close of each monitoring day. The notebook containing the signed and dateddaily turbidity monitoring log forms shall be accessible at the construction Site during the workday.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the quarterly monitoring data (Turbidity Monitoring Log forms), tothe DISTRICT. Documents submitted shall contain the following information:

1. Permit number

2. Project name

3. Dates of sampling and analysis

4. A statement describing the methods used in collection, handling, storage and analysis of thesamples

5. A map indicating the sampling locations


6. A statement by the individual responsible for implementation of the sampling programconcerning the authenticity, precision, limits of detection and accuracy of the data.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit monitoring reports that also include the following information foreach sample that is taken:

1. Date and time of the day samples were taken

2. Depth of the water body

3. Depth of the sample

4. Antecedent weather conditions

5. Water level stage

6. Direction of flow

3.04 EXCEEDANCES OF WATER QUALITY STANDARDS

A. If at any time, monitoring reveals the turbidity level, at the compliance sampling station is greater than29 NTUs above the corresponding background sample in Class I or III receiving waters or greater than0 NTU above background samples in receiving waters classified as OFW (Outstanding FloridaWaters), construction activities shall cease immediately and not resume until corrective measures havebeen taken and turbidity has returned to an acceptable level. Turbidity violations and correctivemeasures shall be documented in the monitoring reports.

1. The CONTRACTOR must notify the DISTRICT Construction Manager and the DISTRICT’sPermitting and Compliance Staff immediately who then, per the permit, must notify thepermitting agency of the exceedance. If known, the CONTRACTOR may also contact theDISTRICT’s assigned Permitting and Compliance Staff for the Project directly.

END OF SECTION


APPENDIX A


DAILY TURBIDITY MONITORING LOG

Multiple work areas that may contribute to turbidity in receiving waters must be monitored separately.A Site map depicting sampling locations must accompany the quarterly turbidity monitoring reports.

Project Name: Permit No.:

Collector Name: Collection Date:

Meter/Sonde Identification No.

Water Observations Weather Observations

Water Level Stages Temperature:

Direction of FlowConditions:

Water Depth

Activity Taking Place During Sampling Yes NoExcavation or Filling within 50 ft radius of surface waters or wetlands?Please describe:Other In-Water Work? (e.g., dewatering; installing piling or forms; injecting concrete; sandblasting; painting)

Please describe:

Other Activity? (e.g., materials transfer; washdown; interim stabilization)

Please describe:

Turbidity Monitoring Data

Background Location Description:

Ba

ckg

rou

nd

Co

mp

lia

nce

Ba

ckg

rou

nd

Co

mp

lia

nce

Ba

ckg

rou

nd

Co

mp

lia

nce

Compliance Location Description: A.M.Mid-Depth

Mid-DayMid-Depth

P.M.Mid-Depth

Collection Time

Analysis Time

Turbidity (NTU)

Did Compliance Sample exceed 29NTU’s above Background Sample?

Yes* No

Yes* No

Yes* No

*If the 29 NTU limitation is exceeded, please describe cause and corrective actions taken on reverse sideof this form. Immediately stop activities contributing to turbidity and notify the SFWMD Construction

Manager and Permit Compliance Staff.

Explanation of gaps in sampling activity (e.g., rained out, phased activity, etc.):

Construction activity complete and slopes stabilized? Yes No

Statement of AuthenticityI certify this test was performed as required by Chapter 62-160, F.A.C., conducted with an approved instrumentcalibrated in accordance with the appropriate FDEP-SOPs. The results are complete and accurate.Print Name:

Signature: Date:


Additional Comments:

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

*Explain turbidity water quality standard exceedance (>29 NTU above background for Class III or > 0 NTUabove background for an Outstanding Florida Water (OFW)) and describe corrective actions taken.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________


SECTION 02436 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, equipment and materials necessary for theprevention of environmental damage as the result of construction operations under this Contract and for thosemeasures set forth in other requirements of the Technical Specifications.




A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the standards or codes of the organizations listed below in effect at thetime of the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. TheCONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable environmental laws and regulations.

1. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):

a. Clean Air Act (CAA)

b. Clean Water Act (CWA)

c. Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA)

d. Executive Orders and EPA requirements, as appropriate; and all general and specific FederalPermit Conditions as applicable.

e. Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA)

f. National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference (NELAC)

g. National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA)

h. National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)

i. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)

j. Safe Drinking Water Act

k. Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA)

2. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

a. 40 CFR - Parts 109, 261.10, 260-268, 273, 279

3. Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP):

a. Florida Administrative Code (FAC)

i. 62-770, 62-780

b. Florida Stormwater, Erosion and Sedimentation Control Inspector’s Manual


a. Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction - Sections 104-1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7

5. Florida Statutes:

a. Chapter 403

6. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA):

a. Coastal Zone Management Act (CZMA)

7. National Park Service (NPS):

a. Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA)

b. National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA)

8. U.S. Army Corps of Engineer (USACE)

9. U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service (FWS):

a. Endangered Species Act (ESA)

b. Fish and Wildlife Coordination Act (FWCA)

c. Migratory Bird Treaty Act (MBTA)


B. State and local codes, permits, regulations and ordinances as applicable.

1.03 DEFINITIONS: For the purpose of this SECTION, environmental damage is defined as the presence of hazardous,physical, or biological elements or agents which alter the physical, chemical or biological integrity of theenvironment in such a way that it represents an unacceptable risk to public health, safety or welfare; unfavorablyalter ecological balances; affect other species, biological communities, or ecosystems; or degrade the quality of theenvironment for aesthetic, cultural, and/or historical purposes. The control of environmental damage requiresconsideration of land, water, and air, and includes management of visual aesthetics, noise, solid waste, radiant energyand radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants.

1.04 SUBMITTALS: Within 20 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed (NTP), the CONTRACTOR shall submit anEnvironmental Protection Plan (Plan) for review and acceptance by the DISTRICT in accordance with SECTION01300. Approval of the Plan shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its responsibility for adequate and continuingcontrol of pollutants and appropriate environmental protection measures. Approval of the Plan is conditional andpredicated on satisfactory performance during construction. The DISTRICT reserves the right to require theCONTRACTOR to modify the Plan if it is determined that environmental protection requirements are not being met.No physical WORK at the Site shall begin prior to acceptance of the Plan. The Plan shall include, but not be limitedto the following:

A. A list of the Federal, State and Local laws, regulation and permits concerning environmental protection,pollution control and abatement that are applicable to the CONTRACTOR’s proposed operations and therequirements imposed.

B. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within the authorized WORK areas: The CONTRACTORshall prepare a listing of methods to protect resources needing protection (trees, shrubs, vines, grasses andground cover, landscape features, air and water quality, fish and wildlife, soil and historical, archeological andcultural resources).

C. Procedures to be implemented are to provide all necessary environmental protection and to comply withapplicable laws and regulations: The CONTRACTOR shall provide written assurance that immediatecorrective action will be taken to correct any environment damage due to accident, natural causes or failure tofollow the procedures set out in accordance with the Plan.

D. Environmental monitoring plans, if applicable.

E. Traffic control plan, if applicable.

F. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary activities, such as material storage areas or stockpiles ofexcess spoil or materials.

G. Erosion and sediment control methods, for protecting surface waters, wetlands, and groundwater duringconstruction. All stormwater and erosion control methods shall be in accordance with the FDEP FloridaStormwater, Erosion and Sedimentation Control Inspector’s Manual. The CONTRACTOR shall prevent andcontrol erosion and water pollution as per FDOT Specification Sections 104-1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7 and allapplicable FDEP regulations and permit conditions.

H. Spill Prevention Methods: The CONTRACTOR shall identify any hazardous or potentially hazardoussubstances to be used on the Site and indicate intended actions to prevent accidental or intentionalintroduction of these materials into the air, ground, water, wetlands or drainage areas. The Plan shall specifythe actions that will be taken to meet the federal, state and local laws regarding labeling, storage, removal,transport and disposal of all hazardous or potentially hazardous substances.

I. Spill Contingency Plan for hazardous, toxic or petroleum material.

J. A WORK area plan, showing proposed activities and identifying areas of limited use or non-use, andincluding measures that will be taken for field identification of these areas.

K. Identification of the person who shall be responsible for implementation of the Plan. This person shall haveauthority to respond for the CONTRACTOR in all environmental protection matters.

L. A recycling and waste management plan. The CONTRACTOR shall include waste minimization efforts in thePlan.



A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for the DISTRICT as requested for inspection. TheCONTRACTOR shall provide at least 48 hours advance notice of its intention to begin new WORK activities.

B. When the Eastern Indigo Snake is identified as a species of concern in the environmental permits theCONTRACTOR shall supply qualified eastern indigo snake observers during ground clearing activities.Qualified Observers are defined as individuals who have been instructed by the DISTRICT on propertechniques and protocols for protection of the Eastern Indigo Snake during site activities. The observer’snames and documentation showing completion of the DISTRICT’s instruction shall be provided to theDISTRICT at least two (2) weeks prior to the commencement of ground clearing activities.


A. Quality Control: The CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain quality control for the environmentalprotection of all items set forth herein. The CONTRACTOR shall record on daily quality control reports orattachments thereto, any problems in complying with applicable laws, regulations and ordinances, andcorrective action(s) taken.

B. Permits and Authorizations: The CONTRACTOR shall apply for and obtain all necessary permits or licensesunless the DISTRICT has already acquired them. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementingand complying with all terms, conditions and requirements of all permits issued for construction of theProject. The CONTRACTOR shall install speed limit signs for off-road and improved road travel forconstruction equipment and employee vehicles that identify speeds protective of wildlife. TheCONTRACTOR shall also provide all necessary signage describing all Threatened and/or Endangered specieswhich are identified in applicable environmental permits.

C. Training: Prior to the onset of construction activities the CONTRACTOR and all personnel shall be trained onhow to identify and implement the Standard Protection Measures and Guidelines for the Threatened andEndangered Species and ground-nesting birds. The Standard Protection Measures for the Eastern IndigoSnake dated August 12, 2013, is attached in Appendix C.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTINGS: All physical, chemical, and biological measurements and analyses that arenecessary to comply with the monitoring requirements in all applicable permits or in this Contract must beperformed according to approved methods and procedures by a commercial laboratory that is certified to perform therequired analyses according to the approved methods and procedures by the National Environmental LaboratoryAccreditation Conference (NELAC).

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for the DISTRICT asrequested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide to the DISTRICT at least 48 hours advance notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCT (ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN)

2.01 NOTIFICATION:

A. In the event that the DISTRICT notifies the CONTRACTOR of any non-compliance with federal, state orlocal laws, permits or other elements of the CONTRACTOR’s Environmental Protection Plan, theCONTRACTOR shall without delay inform the DISTRICT of the proposed correction action and take suchaction as approved.

A. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT immediately of any warnings or notices of noncompliance,fines, citations or tickets issued directly to the CONTRACTOR by any federal, state, or local environmentalprotection, waste management, code enforcement, or fire, police, or public health agency.

B. If the CONTRACTOR fails to comply, the DISTRICT may order all WORK to cease until corrective actionhas been taken. No time extensions shall be granted or damages allowed for the suspension of WORK underthis circumstance.

C. A Notice of Termination (NOT) shall be sent to the applicable federal, state, and local permit-issuingauthorities with a copy to the DISTRICT within fourteen (14) days of final stabilization

2.02 SUMMARY: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a written report within 30 days of completion of the Project. Thisreport shall delineate the absence, or occurrence, of reported or unreported environmental incidents during the courseof the Project.


2.03 TRAINING:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall train its personnel in relevant phases of environmental protection. The trainingshall include methods of detecting and avoiding pollution, familiarization with pollution standards, andcareful installation and monitoring of the Project to ensure continuous environmental pollution control.

B. Due to the probability that wildlife species of concern, including but not limited to Threatened and/orEndangered species and Protected Migratory Bird species may be present within or adjacent to constructionsites, prior to initiation of construction activities, the CONTRACTOR(s) will be trained by the DISTRICTand/or U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service on how to identify and implement appropriate protection measures foreach species.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES)

3.01 GENERAL: During the entire period of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall protect environmental resourceswithin the Project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of construction. The CONTRACTOR shallconfine its activities to the areas defined by the Drawings and specifications. Any deviations from the Drawingsincluding, but not limited to borrow areas, disposal areas, staging areas, and alternate access routes will requireadditional review by the DISTRICT to ensure compliance with applicable environmental rules and regulations priorto implementation/or commencement of those deviations.

3.02 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES: Prior to the beginning of any construction the CONTRACTOR shalldelineate, install protection and be responsible for preservation of all land resources that are to be preserved oravoided within the WORK area. The CONTRACTOR shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy any landresources (trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, or land forms) unless indicated in the Drawings or specificallyauthorized by the DISTRICT. All damaged areas shall be restored to original or better condition, to the satisfactionto the DISTRICT.

3.03 DISTURBED AREAS: The CONTRACTOR shall effectively prevent erosion and control sedimentation throughapproved materials and methods as identified in the Environmental Protection Plan. Disturbed areas will includeareas of ingress and egress, construction materials storage, staging, washdown areas, and toxic, hazardous, and solidmaterials/waste storage areas. Disturbed areas shall be temporarily stabilized within seven (7) days of cessation ofphased construction activity and permanently stabilized within fourteen (14) days of cessation of all phases ofconstruction activity. Temporary Best Management Practices (BMPs) shall remain in place and in effect until thefinal Site inspection is complete and Site is certified as stabilized.

3.04 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct all activities in a manner to avoid pollution of surface water, ground waterand wetlands. The CONTRACTOR’s construction methods shall protect wetland and surface water areasfrom damage due to mechanical grading, erosion, sedimentation and turbid discharges. No storage orstockpiling of equipment shall be allowed within any wetland area unless specifically authorized under apermit for the Project.

B. Water directly derived from construction activities shall not be allowed to directly discharge to water areas,but shall be collected in retention areas to allow settling of suspended materials. The CONTRACTOR shallmonitor water quality of dewatering discharge into water bodies or leaving the Site in accordance withapplicable environmental permits. All monitoring of any water areas that are affected by constructionactivities shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

3.05 OIL, FUEL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SPILL PREVENTION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a spill contingency plan in accordance with 40CFR, Part 109. TheCONTRACTOR shall prevent oil, fuel or other hazardous substances from entering the air, ground, drainage,and local bodies of water or wetlands. In the event that a spill occurs, despite design and procedural controls,the CONTRACTOR shall take immediate action to contain and clean up the spill and report the spillimmediately to the DISTRICT and to other appropriate federal, state, and local agency contacts. Reportablequantities (greater than 25 gallons) of petroleum-based fluids must be reported within 1 hour to the NationalResponse Center (800-424-8802) and State Warning Point (800-320-0519) if it reaches the waters of the stateor, if not, within 24 hrs to State Warning Point. Toxic and hazardous substance spills directly into waters ofthe state, in any quantity, must be reported immediately to the DISTRICT and those federal and state points ofcontact listed above.


B. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a written report to the DISTRICT and to the State of Florida Bureau ofEmergency Response providing certification of commitment of manpower, equipment and materials necessaryto prevent the spread and effect expeditious cleanup and disposal. This report shall be submitted within 48hours of the spill event.

3.06 MATERIALS AND WASTE MANAGEMENT:

A. For sanitary waste management, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that portable restrooms will be anchored onlevel ground with at least a 15-foot set-back from water bodies or banks or slopes thereto. For solid wastemanagement, dumpster(s) will either be outfitted with a water-tight cover or be covered with a tarpaulin whennot in use to minimize infiltration and leaching of rain with at least a 15-foot set-back from water bodies,conveyances thereto, or banks or slopes thereto. Hazardous materials storage areas and liquid refuse andhazardous waste collection and storage areas shall be denoted on the Plan.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure toxic substances and hazardous materials are stored in a locked, blast-resistant shed anchored to a bermed concrete or asphalt pad on level ground with at least a 15-foot setbackfrom any water bodies, conveyances thereto, or banks or slopes thereto.

C. For solid and/or hazardous waste disposal involving lead-based paint, the CONTRACTOR shall ensurecontainers with Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure – Tetraphenylborate (TCLP TPb) concentrationsin excess of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) action level will be transported by alicensed hazardous waste hauler to a licensed hazardous waste disposal facility within the time limitappropriate to the generation rate and accumulated volume of hazardous waste material. Containers withTCLP TPb concentrations less than the RCRA action level shall be transported by a licensed solid wastehauler to a licensed Class I solid waste disposal facility. In either case, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain andtransmit signed and dated copies of the transport and disposal manifests to the DISTRICT’s for recordsretention.

D. The CONTRACTOR is prohibited from the on-site burning of hazardous wastes (aerosol cans, oil filters,etc.). All hazardous wastes shall be disposed of as required by law. Copies of relevant Material Safety DataSheets (MSDSs) shall be appended to the Environmental Protection Plan, Safety Plan, Spill Prevention Plan,and Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

E. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the materials and processes where wastes may be generated under thecontracted activities. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing the materials in order to implementthe Contract and is responsible for operating and maintaining any processes from which waste material maybe generated.

F. The CONTRACTOR is deemed to be the “generator” as defined in 40 CFR 261.10 for any hazardous wastesor spill residue that is generated during the activities encompassed in this Contract. It is recognized that it isthe CONTRACTOR’s or a subcontractor of the CONTRACTOR whose act first causes a hazardous waste tobecome subject to regulation. The CONTRACTOR is a different legal entity from the owner/operator of thephysical location/property where the contracted activities will be conducted. CONTRACTOR is a “person”within the meaning of Section 403.031(5), Florida Statutes.

G. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with applicable standards of 40 CFR 260-268 and 40 CFR273 and 279 and state regulations which adopt or reference these federal standards.

H. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the generation and retention of records associated with wastemanagement practices and disposition. All records shall be maintained for a minimum of three (3) years fromthe date of generation. All records will be made available to the DISTRICT or regulatory agencies uponrequest.

I. In the event of any chemical discharges associated with CONTRACTOR’s or subcontractor’s activities,CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reporting, assessment and remediation of such discharges inaccordance with applicable federal, state or local regulations and/or guidelines including, but not limited to,40 CFR 264/265, Chapter 62-770, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.) and Chapter 62-780, F.A.C.

3.07 FISH AND WILDLIFE RESOURCE PROTECTION: The CONTRACTOR shall control and minimize interferencewith, disturbance to, and damage of fish and wildlife resources.

A. If adverse impacts occur to fish and wildlife species of concern, including but not limited to Threatenedand/or Endangered Species and Protected Migratory Bird Species, the CONTRACTOR shall immediatelynotify the DISTRICT and provide details of adverse impacts for determination of further action that may be


required. Adverse impact is defined as any harassing, harming, pursuing, hunting, shooting, wounding,killing, trapping, capturing, collecting, or attempting to engage in any such activity. Threatened and/orEndangered Species that require specific protection measures as identified in the environmental permits shallbe listed in the Environmental Protection Plan.

B. In the event that the DISTRICT determines that an adverse impact to species of concern, including but notlimited to Threatened and/or Endangered Species and Protected Migratory Bird Species occur as a result ofthe construction activities, the DISTRICT shall notify the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers and the U.S. Fishand Wildlife Service for determination of further action and possibly to determine if seasonal or daily timingrestrictions on construction activities is needed.

C. The CONTRACTOR and all personnel shall be familiar with the Plan shall be able to identify the threatenedand endangered species listed in the Plan. Any activity observed by the CONTRACTOR that may result inadverse impact to threatened or endangered species shall be reported immediately to the DISTRICT, whoshall have sole authority for any WORK stoppages, creation of a buffer area, or restart of constructionactivities.

D. Any Threatened and/or Endangered Species and species of concern observed at the Site will be recorded andlogged. The logs shall be provided to the DISTRICT on a bi-weekly basis. See attached Wildlife Log,Appendix A. If nesting activity is detected within and/or adjacent to the Site, the CONTRACTOR shallimmediately contact the DISTRICT for determination of further action and possibly to determine if seasonalor daily timing restrictions on construction activities is needed.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control toprevent impacts to migratory birds and their nests. The CONTRACTOR may be held responsible for harming

or harassing the birds, their eggs or their nests as a result of the construction. Any nesting activity observedby the CONTRACTOR shall be reported immediately to the DISTRICT’s Construction Manager who shallhave sole authority for any work stoppages, creation of the buffer area, or restart of construction activities.

3.08 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION RETENTION RECORD RETENTION: The CONTRACTOR shall retain acopy of all required permits, the Plan, the SWPPP, the Spill Prevention Plan, and all associated reports, records anddocumentation required by these permits or the Contract at the construction Site or an appropriate alternativelocation as specified in the Notice of Intent (NOI) from NTP through Notice of Termination (NOT). Suchdocumentation includes but is not limited to soil disturbance and stabilization logs, inspection and corrective actionlogs, turbidity monitoring logs, wildlife observation logs and reports, TCLP and Synthetic Precipitation LeachingProcedure (SPLP) assay results, sanitary, solid, and hazardous waste transport and disposal manifests, spill reports,material safety data sheets, and any warnings, citations or notices of noncompliance, or fees, levees, fines orpenalties. A copy of all such records shall be submitted to the DISTRICT at the time of Contract close-out.

3.09 PROTECTION OF AIR RESOURCES: The CONTRACTOR shall minimize pollution of air resources. Allactivities, equipment, processes and work operated or performed in accomplishing the specified construction shall bein strict accordance with the applicable air pollution standards of the State of Florida (F.S. Chapter 403 –Environmental Control and F.A.C. Section 200 – Recirculation Chiller) and all Federal emission and performancelaws and standards as applicable. This includes, but is not limited to, control of particulates, dust generated by orincidental to construction activities, burning and odors.

3.10 PRESERVATION AND RECOVERY OF HISTORIC, ARCHEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES: Ifapplicable, known historic, archeological and cultural resources within the CONTRACTOR’s WORK area(s) will bedesignated as a “Sensitive Environmental Area” on the Drawings or other documents. If so designated, theCONTRACTOR shall install protection for these resources and shall be responsible for their preservation during theContract's duration. The CONTRACTOR shall not distribute maps or other information on these resource locationsexcept for distribution among the CONTRACTOR's staff with a "need to know" technical responsibility forprotecting the resources.

A. Inadvertent Discoveries: If, during construction or other activities, the CONTRACTOR observes items thatmay have historic or archeological value, such observations shall be reported immediately to the DISTRICTso that the appropriate staff may be notified and a determination made for what, if any, additional action isneeded. Examples of historic, archeological and cultural resources are bones, remains, artifacts, shell,midden, charcoal or other deposits, rocks or coral, evidences of agricultural or other human activity,alignments, and constructed features. The CONTRACTOR shall cease all activities that may result in the


destruction of these resources and shall prevent his employees from further removing, or otherwise damaging,such resources.

B. Claims for Downtime due to Inadvertent Discoveries: Upon discovery and subsequent reporting of a possibleinadvertent discovery of cultural resources, the CONTRACTOR shall seek to continue WORK well awayfrom, or otherwise protectively avoiding, the area of interest, or in some other manner that strives to continueproductive activities in keeping with the Contract. Should an Inadvertent Discovery be of the nature thatsubstantial impact(s) to the WORK schedule are evident; such delays shall be coordinated with theDISTRICT.

END OF SECTION


Appendix AWildlife Log

For Threatened and/or Endangered Species and Species of Concern Listed in Permit

Wood Storks Sightings, since they are so abundant, will be logged on a bi-weekly basis in coordination with Bi-weekly Construction Progress Meetings and will be reported quarterly along with other sightings.

Eastern Indigo Snake Bald Eagle Wood Stork Florida Panther Caracara Gopher Tortoise Other____________________Project NameDate of SightingTime of SightingTemperatureWind (mph)Weather Conditions(ex: note sky cover, raining, humid,cloudy, sunny, cool, hot, etc)Construction Activity Occurring

Equipment being Used

Condition of Animal(ex: injured, unharmed, etc)

Behavior of Animal(ex: disoriented, aggressive, etc)

Actions taken after sighting

Size of Animal

GPS Coordinates/Specific Location

Pictures Taken (Attach pictures)Date this form was completedObservers Company/AgencyObservers Name Print Name:

Signature:

Observers Contact Info Office:Cell:Email:


EXAMPLE FORMWildlife Log

For Threatened and/or Endangered Species and Species of Concern Listed in Permit

Wood Storks Sightings, since they are so abundant, will be logged on a bi-weekly basis in coordination with Bi-weekly Construction Progress Meetings and will be reported quarterly along with other sightings.

Eastern Indigo Snake Bald Eagle Wood Stork Florida Panther Caracara Gopher Tortoise Other____________________Project Name C-44 ReservoirDate of Sighting Tuesday, January 29, 2008Time of Sighting 0900Temperature 75°Wind (mph) 5-10 mphWeather Conditions(ex: note sky cover, raining, windy,humid, cloudy, sunny, cool, hot, etc)

Partial cloud/Sunny

Construction Activity OccurringDemobilization of Construction Trailers, nothing near thearea snakes were sighted

Equipment being Used n/aCondition of Animal(ex: injured, unharmed, etc)

Good

Behavior of Animal(ex: disoriented, aggressive, etc)

under a door in an abandoned citrus office

Actions taken after sighting Determined sex, took photos, estimated sizeSize of Animal Approx 6’GPS Coordinates/Specific Location N 27 05 33.59 W 80 26 59.90

NE Corner of Project along Eastern LeveePictures Taken (Attach pictures) Yes, attachedDate this form was completed Tuesday, February 5, 2008Observers Company/Agency Land Clearing Inc.Observers Name Print Name:

Signature:Observers Contact Info Office:

Cell:Email:


Appendix B



Appendix CSTANDARD PROTECTION MEASURES FOR THE EASTERN INDIGO SNAKE

U.S. Fish and Wildlife ServiceAugust 12, 2013


SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessaryfor construction of an asphaltic concrete surface course of the thickness and to the lines and grades shown onthe Drawings or as specified herein.

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATION:

A. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):



1.04 SUBMITTALS: (Not Used)



1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING: Material testing shall be performed as described in the FDOT StandardSpecifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 48 hours advance notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRIME COAT: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish prime coat conforming to FDOT Specification Section300-2.1, 916-3, and 916-4.

2.02 TACK COAT: (Not Used)

2.03 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish asphaltic concrete conforming to theapplicable FDOT Specification Section 334 for the type asphalt specified on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION OF PRIME COAT: The CONTRACTOR shall apply the prime coat in accordance with thefollowing:

A. Weather Limitations: Application shall be made when the air temperature in the shade is above 40degrees F.

B. Prime Coat: Application of the prime coat shall conform to FDOT Specification Section 300-7. Thesurface to be primed shall be clean, and moisture content of the base shall not exceed 90% of theoptimum. The temperature of the prime material shall be between 100 degrees and 150 degrees F. Thematerial shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor. The rate of application shall be not lessthan 0.10 gal/sy unless directed otherwise by the DISTRICT.


3.02 LAYING OF ASPHALTIC CONCRETE: The CONTRACTOR shall place the asphaltic concrete pavementin conformance with the following:

A. Limitations of Operations: The laying operations shall not begin unless the weather is suitable for allactivities to be completed in dry conditions.

B. Preparation: The preparation of the asphalt cement, aggregates and mixture shall conform to FDOTSpecification Section 330-4, 5, and 6.

C. Transportation: The mixture shall be transported as specified in FDOT Specification Section 330-7.

D. Placing Mixture: Placing the mixture shall conform to FDOT Specification Section 330-9.

E. Compacting Mixture: Compaction of the asphaltic concrete shall be in accordance with FDOTSpecification Section 330-10.

F. Surface Requirements: The surface shall conform to FDOT Specification Section 330-12, except thatthe criteria for the maximum allowable deficiency in the final surface layer shall be 3/16 inch for alllocations and types of paved areas.

3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES: The CONTRACTOR shall protect the finished asphalticconcrete pavement surface upon completion. No dumping of any material directly on the pavement shall bepermitted. Vehicular traffic shall not be permitted on any pavement that has not set sufficiently to preventrutting or other distortion.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02735 WELL ABANDONMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment, labor, and materialsand perform all operations in connection with the abandonment of existing wells.


A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. A100-97 - Water Wells

B. Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP), latest revision, Chapter 62-524, F.A.C.

C. South Florida Water Management District (SFWMD), Water Well Standards

D. State of Florida Permit Application to Construct, Repair, Modify, or Abandon a Well, SFWMD Form0123 Rev. 4/95


1.04 SUBMITTALS: Prior to well abandonment, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the abandonment permitapplication to the DISTRICT for approval.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: The CONTRACTOR shall utilize the services of a certified water well contractorlicensed by the State of Florida for the abandonment of the well(s).

1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES: Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall complete a well abandonment report on the Florida Department ofEnvironmental Regulation (FDER, latest revision) Form 0124 and submit it to the DISTRICT after theabandonment of the well.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS: (Not Used)



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: The products and materials required are indicated on the Drawings. The CONTRACTORshall submit to the DISTRICT any changes in design for review and approval prior to abandonment of thewell.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall abandon the well(s) as indicated on the Drawings. Workmanship andmaterials not covered by the specifications or standards herein shall conform to AWWA A100.


B. The CONTRACTOR shall abandon the well(s) at the location(s) indicated on the Drawings.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall abandoned wells by filling them from bottom to top with grout within atime specified by the District. The work shall be performed by a licensed water well contractor. Use ofclean aggregate to bridge cavernous or lost circulation zones shall be allowed if measurements indicateloss of grout and the borehole or screened portion does not connect two (2) or more aquifers ofsignificantly differing water quality. Prior approval to use aggregate or other material must be obtainedfrom the District.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02821 SECURITY FENCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all chain-link fabric security fencingand warning signage as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.



1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The most current revision of the following standard specifications shallapply to the WORK of this SECTION as indicated.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded andSeamless

2. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and SteelProducts

3. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

4. A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

5. A1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,High-Strength Low-Alloy and High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

6. F567 - Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence

7. F626 – Standard Specification for Fence Fittings

8. F668 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

9. A780 - Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-DipGalvanized Coatings

10. F900 - Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates

11. F1043 – Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coating on Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework [Replaced F669]

12. F1083 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded,for Fence Structures

13. Florida Building Code Section 2224


1.04 SUBMITTALS:


B. The CONTRACTOR shall make submittals for security fencing to include but not limited to, thefollowing:

1. Product data

2. Plan layout


3. Details illustrating fence height, sizes of posts, rails, braces, and hardware list

4. Erection procedures

5. Mill certification that materials meet specifications of member size, strength, wall thickness andcoatings

6. Fence mounted warning signage

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: Provide chain link fence as complete units controlled by a single source, includingnecessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings.



1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 48 hours advanced notice of itsintention to begin new WORK activities.


A.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 The CONTRACTOR shall provide materials in accordance with the following:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide security fencing to the height as indicated on the Drawings or asspecified herein.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide posts, rails and supports of the dimension indicated on theDrawings, as specified herein, or as required. Dimensions of posts, rails, and supports shall be outsidedimensions exclusive of coatings.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel fabric as required, shown on the Drawings and as specifiedbelow:

1. No. 9-gauge, 2-inch diamond mesh steel chain-link fabric with Class 1 zinc coating meetingASTM A392. Furnish 1-piece fabric widths.

2. PVC coated: Minimum 7 mil. polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic resin finish over galvanizedsteel wire. Color shall be black.

a. Comply with ASTM F668, Class 2, except provide fabric with diameter (gage) of corewire equivalent to fabric diameter specified when measured prior to application ofnonmetallic coating.

3. Twisted selvage on top and bottom.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel framework as required, shown, or specified below.

1. General: Galvanized steel, ASTM A53, with no less than 1.8 ounce zinc per square foot (oz/sf)of surface, or steel conforming to ASTM A1011 externally triple coated with hot dipgalvanizing at 1.0 oz/sf, chromatic conversion coating and clear acrylic polyurethane andcoated internally with zinc rich coating.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A153 with zinc weights per Table I.


3. Steel Framework Finish: Provide framework, fittings and accessories in accordance withMANUFACTURER’s standard thermally bonded PVC plastic resin finish over galvanizing, notless than 10 mils (.010-inch) thick. Color to match chain link fabric.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall provide steel posts, tension wire and braces as required, shown andspecified below.

1. Posts, Security Fence Per ASTM F1083 for Regular Strength Pipe:

a. End, Angle, Corner or Pull Posts: 2.375 inches O.D. with 0.154 inch wall thickness

b. Line Posts: 2.375 inches O.D. with 0.154 inch wall thickness

c. In lieu of pipe specified above, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A1011 or greater strength,but less wall thickness, will be acceptable.

2. Posts, Standard Railings: One and a one-half inch diameter extra strong pipe at 3.6 pounds perfoot.

3. Gate Posts: Furnish posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gateinstallation, for nominal gate widths as follows:

Gate Type Gate Post lbs./lin. ft.

Double Swing 4.000" O.D. 9.11

Personnel 2.875" O.D. 5.79

Single Swing Vehicle 4.000" O.D. 9.11

4. Top and Bottom Rail: The structure security fence shall have one and one-half inch nominaldiameter standard pipe at 2.72 pounds per foot for top and bottom rails. The standard railingshall consist of one and one-half inch nominal diameter standard pipe for top and bottom rail aswell as additional framing.

5. Tension Wire: No. 7 gauge coiled spring wire, metal and finish to match fabric, conforming toASTM A824. Locate at bottom of security fence.

6. Wire Ties: 11 gauge galvanized steel (to match fabric core material). Spacing on top rail shallbe five (5) ties between posts, evenly spaced. Spacing on line posts shall be one (1) less than theheight of the fence in feet, evenly spaced.

7. Post Bracing:

a. Diagonal adjustable rods three-eighths inch in diameter equipped with adjustable tightener

b. Horizontal Braces: 1.660 inches O.D. at 2.27 pounds per foot

8. Post Tops:

a. Designed as a weathertight closure cap for tubular posts

b. Malleable iron or pressed steel or aluminum alloy

9. Stretcher Bars:

a. One piece, full height of fabric

b. 3/16-inch by three-quarters inch, galvanized

c. Bands of galvanized steel or malleable iron

10. Tension Bands:

a. Use one (1) less than the height of the fence in feet, evenly spaced.

F. Fence Mounted No Trespassing Signs:

1. Non-metallic, 0.125” thick white polyethelene warning signs mounted to fence.


a. Sign size, font, color and copy to be as indicated on the Drawings and approved by theDISTRICT.

G. Gates - Manual-Swing: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish manual swing gates meeting ASTM F900,and as follows:

1. Framing:

a. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from metal and finish to match fence framework.

b. Provide intermediate horizontal and vertical members for proper gate operation and forattachment of fabric, hardware and accessories. Space so that frame members are notmore than eight feet apart unless otherwise indicated.

c. Frames assembled by welding or watertight galvanized steel rigid fittings.

d. Fabric to match that of fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical and top andbottom edges.

e. Diagonal cross bracing of three-eighths inch diameter adjustable truss rods to ensure framerigidity without sag or twist.

f. Where barbed wire is indicated or specified, extend gate end members one foot above topmembers to receive barbed wire.

2. Hardware:

a. Hinges of pressed or forged steel or malleable iron, non lift-off type, offset to permit 180-degree (outward) gate opening, one and one-half inch pair per leaf.

b. Latches and Gate Stops: Double leaf

i. Plunger-bar type latch, full gate height, designed to engage gate stop of flush-platetype, with anchors

ii. Locking device and padlock eyes an integral part of latch

iii. Keeper to automatically engage gate leaf and secure free end of gate in openposition

c. Latches: Single leaf

i. Forked type to permit operation from either side of gate

ii. Padlock eye as integral part of latch

3. Coating: Hot-dip galvanize conforming to ASTM A153.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION: The CONTRACTOR shall install security fence as required, shown and specified below.

A. Fence and Standard Railing:

1. Install framework, fabric, and accessories in accordance with ASTM F567.

2. Posts: Posts shall be set in concrete with minimum hole diameters equal to sixteen (16) inchesand with a minimum depth of 36 inches (for fence heights of 6-8 feet). Set post in a verticalposition, plumb and in line. Place 3,000 psi concrete into hole and extend two (2) inches abovegrade. Crown the concrete top and extend the bottom of the footing a minimum of six (6)inches below the bottom of the post.

a. For the portion of the post embedded in concrete or below finished grade, coat with coaltar epoxy to two inches above grade.


b. When solid rock or concrete is encountered, without overburden of soil, set posts to adepth of four times the diameter of the post with a hole size a half-inch larger than the postdiameter. The post shall set in non-shrink grout with a crown to shed water. When rock orconcrete is encountered with an overburden of soil the posts shall be set to the full depth asspecified above. Space posts as indicated.

3. Place corner or terminal posts every 50’ and at all bends. Equally space line posts betweenterminal posts or corner posts, at intervals not exceeding ten (10) feet.

4. Post Bracing:

a. Install horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rod at each corner post, terminal post,and gate post. Install bottom brace rail on gate leaves.

b. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under tension.

5. Provide top rail continuous through line posts. Splice top rail with top rail sleeves.

6. Tension Wire: Weave through the fabric and tie to each post with minimum 7-gauge wire tomatch fabric finish.

7. Fabric: Stretch taut with equal tension on each side of line posts.

a. Install fabric on the outside face of the fence enclosure, and anchor to framework so thatfabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.

b. Position bottom of fabric at finished grade. Do not allow finished grade to encroach ontofabric.

c. Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to that attached, clasping pipe andfabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimizehazard to persons or clothing.

d. Fasten fabric to steel line posts with wire ties spaced twelve (12) inches O.C. maximum.

e. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11-gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced at 24 inchesO.C.

8. Stretcher Bars:

a. Thread through or clamp to fabric four inches O.C.

b. Secure to posts with galvanized steel tension bands spaced twelve (12) inches O.C.maximum.

c. Install at each end post and each side of corner post.

9. Post Tops: Install on each post.

10. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabricside. (Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts).

11. Gates:

a. Field verify gate opening dimensions for gate frame fabrication. Install gates inaccordance with ASTM F567. Proposed grades: Check cross slopes and grades alongfence lines to position gates. Maintain four (4) inches maximum clearance beneath gateframes to finished grade.

b. Install gates with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, dropbolt foot bolts and sockets, torsion spring, retainer, and locking clamp. Install a centerstop in concrete for swing gate drop rods. Install gate catcher with post at full gateopenings.

12. No Trespassing Signage:

a. Attach signs to fence fabric.


13. Field welds will not be allowed, except for attachment of posts to anchor plates on structurewalls, without prior written authorization from the DISTRICT.

B. Repairing Damaged Coatings:

1. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces as a result of welding with paint containing zinc dust inaccordance with ASTM A780. Prior to painting, the damaged surface shall be prepared usingmechanical means to remove all flux residues and weld spatter. Paint to minimum eight (8) mildry thickness.

2. Apply per MANUFACTURER’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 02920 SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, equipment and materials necessary toestablish a stand of grass within the specified areas by furnishing and placing sod, and rolling,fertilizing, watering and maintaining the sodded areas to ensure a healthy stand of grass.



2. SECTION 01600 – Equipment and Materials


A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the standards of the organizations listed below in effect at the timeof the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. In the case of aconflict between the requirements of this SECTION and those of the listed document, the requirementsof this SECTION shall prevail.


a. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge, latest edition

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with SECTION 01300 and the General Terms and Conditions of theContract.

B. Sod certification for grass species and location of sod source.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five (5) yearsexperience, and certified by the State of Florida.

B. Installer: Company approved by the sod producer.

C. Sod: Minimum age of eighteen (18) months, with root development that will support its own weight,without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.

D. The DISTRICT reserves the right to test, reject or approve all materials before application.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver products to Site in accordance with the provisions of SECTION 01600.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with the provisions of SECTION 01600.

C. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.

D. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 48 hours.

E. Deliver fertilizer in water proof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name ofMANUFACTURER.


F. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the DISTRICT with the MANUFACTURER’sapplication/installation instruction for all materials received in order that the minimum application rateof materials may be determined.

1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICE: Maintain sodded areas immediately after placement until grass is wellestablished and exhibits a vigorous growing condition.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Sod:

1. The sod shall be Argentine Bahia, to closely match existing as directed, with well matted roots.

2. The sod shall be commercial size rectangular measuring twelve (12) inches by 24 inches orlarger.

3. The sod shall be sufficiently thick to secure a dense stand of live grass, with a minimumthickness of two (2) inches.

4. The sod shall be live, fresh and uninjured at the time of planting.

5. The sod shall have a soil matt of sufficient thickness adhering firmly to the roots to withstandall necessary handling and be reasonably free of weeds and other grasses.

6. The sod shall be planted as soon as possible after being harvested, and shall be shaded andkept moist from the time of harvesting until it is planted.

7. The source of the sod may be inspected for approval by the DISTRICT prior to construction.

B. Topsoil:

1. Excavated from Site and free of weeds.

C. Fertilizer:

1. Commercial fertilizer shall be Ammonium Sulfate (21-0-0-24S) containing 21 percent nitrogenand 24 percent sulfur.

a. Fertilizer containing phosphorus is not acceptable.

D. Water:

1. Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter which could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SOIL PREPARATION:

A. Any growth, rocks, or other obstructions which might interfere with maintenance operations shall beremoved and disposed of properly. Remove stones over two (2) inches in any dimension and sticks,roots, rubbish and other extraneous matter.

B. Areas to be sodded are to be graded to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Rolland rake, remove ridges and fill depressions, to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas whichcan be planted within immediate future.


C. Moisten prepared areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry beforeplanting.

D. If prepared areas are eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting they shall berestored to specified condition prior to planting.

E. Immediately upon completion of construction, sod shall be planted in all disturbed areas and asdesignated in the Drawings.

3.02 FERTILIZING:

A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with MANUFACTURER’s instructions.

B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.

C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.

D. Mix thoroughly into upper two (2) inches of topsoil.

E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.

3.03 LAYING SOD:

A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.

B. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible. Do not overlap. Stagger end joints twelve (12) inchesminimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.

C. Do not use sod which has been cut for more than 48 hours

D. Peg sod at locations where sod may slide, as directed by the DISTRICT.

E. Roll sod using a lightweight turf roller to provide and true and even surface.

3.04 MAINTENANCE:

A. Water all newly grassed areas at least once a week, at a rate equivalent to ½” to ¾” per week, toprevent grass and soil from drying out.

B. Immediately replace sod in areas which show deterioration or bare spots.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall include in pricing, water and equipment to insure adequate survival of thesod and such maintenance as filling, leveling and repairing of any washed or eroded areas as may benecessary, for sixty days after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials and equipment for the following:

1. Design and construction of all necessary formwork including the required bracing, supports,scaffolding, shoring, and other falsework to produce cast-in-place concrete in the finishedstructure within the required tolerances for line, grade dimension and detail.

2. Joints in concrete, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. Joints inconcrete structures shall be the types defined below and will be permitted only where indicated,unless specifically accepted by the DISTRICT.


1. SECTION 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

2. SECTION 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete

3. SECTION 03600 Grout

4. SECTION 07920 Sealants and Caulking

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The following standard specifications shall apply to the WORK of thisSECTION:

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

2. 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A775 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars

2. C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealant

3. D412 - Standard Test Method for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

4. D624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber andThermoplastic Elastomers

5. D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

6. D746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact

7. D747 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plastics by Means of aCantilever Beam

8. D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber

9. D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving andStructural Construction

10. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

11. D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

12. D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)

C. US Product Standards (PS)


1. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood for Concrete Forms

2. PS-20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard

D. NSF International:

1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects

E. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE):

1. CRD-C572 - PVC Waterstops

F. Federal Specifications:

1. TT-S-0227 E(3) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multicomponent, for Caulking,Sealing, and Glazing Buildings and Other Structures

G. Occupational Safety and Health Association (OSHA)

1. CFR Title 29 Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Construction Joints:

1. When fresh concrete is placed against a hardened concrete surface, the joint between the twopours is called a construction joint. If indicated on the drawings, joints in water bearingmembers shall be provided with a waterstop and/or sealant groove of the shape indicated. Thesurface of the first pour may also be required to receive a coating of bond breaker as indicated.

B. Contraction Joints:

1. Contraction joints are similar to construction joints except that the fresh concrete shall not bondto the hardened surface of the earlier pour, which shall be coated with a bond breaker. The slabreinforcement shall be stopped 4-1/2 inches from the joint, which is provided with a sleeve-typedowel, to allow shrinkage of the concrete of the later pour. Waterstop and/or sealant grooveshall also be provided when indicated.

C. Expansion Joints:

1. To allow the concrete to expand freely, a space is provided between the two pours, and the jointshall be formed as indicated. The space is obtained by placing a filler joint material against theearlier pour, to act as a form for the later pour. Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints inwater bearing members shall be provided with a center-bulb type waterstop as indicated.

2. Premolded expansion joint material shall be installed with the edge at the indicated distancebelow or back from finished concrete surface, and shall have a slightly tapered, dressed, andoiled wood strip secured to or placed at the edge thereof during concrete placement, which shalllater be removed to form space for sealing material.

3. The space so formed shall be filled with a joint sealant material as indicated herein. In order tokeep the two walls or slab elements in line the joint shall also be provided with a sleeve-typedowel as indicated.

D. Control Joints:

1. The function of the control joint is to provide a weaker plane in the concrete, where shrinkagecracks will probably occur. A groove, of the shape and dimensions indicated, is formed or saw-cut in the concrete. This groove is afterward filled with a joint sealant material.


1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Falsework Calculations and Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit calculations and drawingsprepared and sealed by a Professional Civil Engineer registered in the State of Florida, which indicatethe falsework complies with the requirements of OSHA Title 29, Part 1926.703. The submission ofdesign details and calculations for falsework is for information only.

B. The plans of falsework proposed to be used shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the general layout,sizes of members, anticipated stresses, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, means ofprotecting existing construction which supports falsework, and typical soil conditions.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit placement drawings showing the location and type of all joints foreach structure.

D. Prior to production of the waterstop materials required under this SECTION, qualification samples ofwaterstops shall be submitted which represent in all respects the material proposed. Such samplesshall consist of extruded or molded sections of each size or shape to be used. The balance of thematerial to be used shall not be produced until after the DISTRICT has reviewed the qualificationsamples.

E. Prior to use of the waterstop material in the field, a sample of a prefabricated (shop made fitting)mitered cross and a tee constructed of each size or shape of material to be used shall be submitted.These samples shall be prefabricated (shop made fitting) so that the material and workmanshiprepresent in all respects the fittings to be provided. Field samples of prefabricated (shop made fitting)fittings (crosses, tees, etc.) may also be selected at random by the DISTRICT for testing by alaboratory at the DISTRICT's expense. When tested, tensile strength across the joints shall be at least1120 psi.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall submit MANUFACTURER’s information demonstrating compliance withrequirements for the following:

1. Form ties and related accessories, including taper tie plugs, if taper ties are used

2. Form gaskets

3. Form release agent, including NSF certification if not using mineral oil

4. List of form materials and locations for use

5. Preformed Joint Filler

6. Backing Rod

7. Bond Breaker

8. Waterstops

9. Slip Dowels

10. PVC Tubing

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: Every person responsible for waterstop installation is required to have a currentindividual Certification from the waterstop MANUFACTURER on file with the DISTRICT, which states saidindividuals are certified and trained to install waterstop per MANUFACTURER’s recommendations andspecifications.

1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES: The CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the design and construction of all formsand falsework to be in compliance with all applicable OSHA requirements, and the requirements of allagencies having jurisdiction on the project. The submission of design details and calculations for falsework isfor information only.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare adhesion and cohesion test specimens for construction joint sealantas required herein, at intervals of 5 working days while sealants are being installed.

B. The sealant material shall show no signs of adhesive or cohesive failure when tested in accordancewith the following procedure in laboratory and field tests:

1. Sealant specimen shall be prepared between 2 concrete blocks (1-inch by 2-inch by 3-inch).Spacing between the blocks shall be 1-inch. Coated spacers (2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1/2-inch)shall be used to insure sealant cross-sections of 1/2-inch by 2 inches with a width of 1-inch.

2. Sealant shall be cast and cured according to MANUFACTURER’s recommendations exceptthat curing period shall be not less than 24 hours.

3. Following curing period, the gap between blocks shall be widened to 1-1/2-inch. Spacers shallbe used to maintain this gap for 24 hours prior to inspection for failure.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS:

A. Form materials, which may remain or leave residues on or in the concrete, shall be certified ascompliant with NSF 61.

B. Joint materials shall be certified as compliant with NSF 61.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall submit certified test reports from the sealant MANUFACTURER on theactual batch of material being supplied indicating compliance with requirements herein before thesealant is used on the job.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of the Waterstop Welding Certifications provided byMANUFACTURER or authorized agent of MANUFACTURER for every person who is to be involvedwith waterstop installation.

1.08 INSPECTIONS:

A. Falsework shall be inspected for conformance with the accepted submittal. No workers will beallowed to use falsework for access and no concrete placement to related forms will be permitted untilthe falsework is inspected by the CONTRACTOR for conformance with the submittals andappropriately tagged. No variations or alterations to falsework, as compared to the reference submittal,will be allowed without certification of the variation by the original Professional Engineer.

B. All waterstop field joints shall be subject to rigid inspection, and no such WORK shall be scheduled orstarted without having made prior arrangements with the DISTRICT for the required inspections. Notless than 24 hours advance notice shall be given for scheduling such inspections.

C. Field joints in waterstops shall be subject to rigid inspection for misalignment, bubbles, inadequatebond, porosity, cracks, offsets, and other defects, which would reduce the potential resistance of thematerial to water pressure at any point. Defective joints shall be replaced with material, which passesinspection; faulty material shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of.

D. The following waterstop defects represent a partial list of defects which shall be grounds for rejection:

1. Offsets at joints greater than 1/16-inch or 15 percent of material thickness, at any point,whichever is less

2. Exterior crack at joint, due to incomplete bond, which is deeper than 1/16-inch or 15 percent ofmaterial thickness, at any point, whichever is less

3. Any combination of offset or exterior crack which will result in a net reduction in the crosssection of the waterstop in excess of 1/16-inch or 15 percent of material thickness at any point,whichever is less


4. Misalignment of joint which results in misalignment of the waterstop in excess of 1/2-inch in10 feet

5. Porosity in the welded joint as evidenced by visual inspection

6. Bubbles or inadequate bonding which can be detected with a penknife test (If, while proddingthe entire joint with the point of a penknife, the knife breaks through the outer portion of theweld into a bubble, the joint shall be considered defective.)

7. Visible signs of separation when the cooled splice is bent by hand at any sharp angle

8. Any evidence of burned material


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS:

A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the DISTRICT, lumber brought on the Site for use as forms,shoring, or bracing shall be new material. Forms shall be smooth surface forms and shall be of thefollowing materials:

Walls - Steel, fiberglass, or plywood panelColumns - Steel, plywood, PVC, fiberglass, or spiral wound fiber formsRoof and floor - PlywoodAll other work - Steel panels, fiberglass, or plywood

B. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Plywood shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type, manufacturedespecially for concrete formwork and shall conform to Plyform Class I, B-B EXT, of PS-1, andshall be edge sealed.

2. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, inconformance with PS 20.

3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not adversely affectthe concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line, and gradeindicated. Metal forms shall accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be paintedshall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO EXT Grade.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4-inchchamfers or be tooled to 1/2-inch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have filletsunless otherwise indicated.

D. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed in accordance with ACI 347.

2.02 FORM TIES:

A. Ties shall be standard crimped snap ties with one-inch (1”) snapback. Ties shall be provided with aplastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may bebroken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, orof other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches;and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops that tightly fit the form tie so that they cannot bemoved from mid-point of the tie.


B. Removable taper ties may be used when approved by the DISTRICT. A preformed neoprene orpolyurethane tapered plug sized to seat at the center of the wall shall be inserted in the hole left by theremoval of the taper tie.

2.03 FORM RELEASING AGENT: Form release agent shall be non-staining and shall leave no residues on or inthe concrete unless certified as compliant with NSF 61 and shall not adversely affect the adhesion of paint orother coatings.

2.04 WATERSTOPS:

A. PVC Waterstops:

1. PVC Waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric polyvinyl chloride compound containingthe plasticizers, resins, stabilizers, and other materials necessary to meet the requirements ofthis SECTION. No reclaimed or scrap material shall be used. The CONTRACTOR shallobtain from the waterstop MANUFACTURER and shall furnish to the DISTRICT for review,current test reports and a written certification of the MANUFACTURER that the material to beshipped to the job meets the physical requirements as outlined in the USACE CRD-C572, andthose listed herein.

2. Flatstrip and Center-Bulb Waterstops: The thickness of waterstops, including the center bulb,shall not be less than 3/8-inch. Waterstop shall be provided with factory installed hog rings at12 inches on centers along the waterstop.

3. Multi-Rib Waterstops: Multi-rib waterstops where required shall have prefabricated (shopmade fitting) joint fittings at all intersections of the ribbed-type waterstops.

4. Retrofit Waterstops: Retrofit waterstops and batten bars shall be manufactured as a completesystem including waterstop, SS batten bar, SS anchor bolts, and epoxy gel.

5. Waterstop Testing Requirements: When tested in accordance with the test standards, thewaterstop material shall meet or exceed the following requirements:

Property Value ASTM Standard

Physical Property, Sheet Material

Tensile Strength-min (psi) 2000 D 638, Type IVUltimate Elongation-min (percent) 350 D 638, Type IVLow Temp Brittleness-max (degrees F) -35 D 746Stiffness in Flexure-min (psi) 600 D 747

Accelerated Extraction (CRD-C572)

Tensile Strength-min (psi) 1500 D 638, Type IVUltimate Elongation-min (percent) 300 D 638, Type IV

Effect of Alkalies (CRD-C572)

Change in Weight (percent) + 0.25/- 0.10 ------Change in Durometer, Shore A +/- 5 D 2240

Finish Waterstop

Tensile Strength-min (psi) 1400 D 638, Type IVUltimate Elongation-min (percent) 280 D 638, Type IV

B. Other Types of Waterstops:

1. When types of waterstops not listed above are indicated, they shall be subjected to the samerequirements as those listed herein.

2.05 JOINT SEALANT FOR WATER BEARING JOINTS:


A. Joint sealant shall be polyurethane polymer designed for bonding to concrete, which is continuouslysubmerged in water. No material will be acceptable which has an unsatisfactory history as to bond ordurability when used in the joints of water retaining structures.

B. Joint sealant material shall meet the following requirements (73 degrees F and 5percent R.H.):

Requirement Value ASTM StandardWork Life (minutes) 45 - 180 -----Time to Reach 20 Shore "A" Hardness (at 77 degrees F,200 gr quantity) - max (hours)

24 -----

Ultimate Hardness 20 - 45 Shore "A" D 2240Tensile Strength - min (psi) 175 D 412Ultimate Elongation - min (percent) 400 D 412Tear Resistance - min (pounds per inch of thickness) 75 D 624 (Die C)Color Light Gray -----

C. Polyurethane sealants for waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Sealant shall be 2-part polyurethane with the physical properties of the cured sealantconforming to or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 920, or TT-S-0227 E(3) for 2-partmaterial, as applicable.

2. For vertical joints and overhead horizontal joints, only "non-sag" compounds shall be used; allsuch compounds shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 920 Class 25, Grade NS, orTT-S-0227 E(3), Type II, Class A.

3. For plane horizontal joints, the self-leveling compounds which meet the requirements of ASTMC 920 Class 25, Grade P, or TT-S-0227 E(3), Type I shall be used. For joints subject to eitherpedestrian or vehicular traffic, a compound providing non-tracking characteristics, and having aShore "A" hardness range of 35 to 45, shall be used.

4. Primer materials, if recommended by the sealant MANUFACTURER, shall conform to theprinted recommendations of the MANUFACTURER.

D. Sealants for non-waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to SECTION 07920.

2.06 JOINT MATERIALS:

A. Joint Filler

1. Joint filler for expansion joints in waterholding structures shall be neoprene conforming toASTM D1056, Type 2C5-E1.

2. Joint filler material in other locations shall be of the preformed non-extruding type joint fillerconstructed of cellular neoprene sponge rubber or polyurethane of firm texture. Bituminousfiber type will not be permitted. All non-extruding and resilient-type preformed expansion jointfillers shall conform to the requirements and tests set forth in ASTM D 1752, for Type I, exceptas otherwise indicated.

2.07 BACKING ROD: Backing rod shall be an extruded closed-cell, polyethylene foam rod. The material shallbe compatible with the joint sealant material and shall have a tensile strength of not less than 40 psi and acompression deflection of approximately 25 percent at eight (8) psi. The rod shall be 1/8-inch larger indiameter than the joint width except that a one-inch diameter rod shall be used for a 3/4-inch wide joint.

2.08 BOND BREAKER:

A. Bond breaker shall contain a fugitive dye so that areas of application will be readily distinguishable.

B. Bonding agent for hydrophilic waterstop shall be the MANUFACTURER’s recommended adhesive forwet, rough concrete.


2.09 SLIP DOWELS: Slip dowels in joints shall be smooth epoxy-coated bars, conforming to ASTM A 775.

2.10 PVC TUBING: PVC tubing in joints shall be Schedule SDR 13.5, conforming to ASTM D 2241.

2.11 CHAMFER STRIP: Provide three quarter inch triangular fillets, milled clear straight grained wood, surfacedeach side, or extruded vinyl type, with or without nail flange to form all exposed concrete edges such ascolumns, pilasters, beams, curbs, equipment pads, tops of walls, and as indicated. Unless otherwiseindicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4” chamfers. Re-entrant corners inconcrete members shall not have fillets, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMS:

A. Forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and shall besubstantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Forms shall be properly braced or tied so as tomaintain position and shape. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement andshall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by CONTRACTOR's personnel and bythe DISTRICT and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement,the CONTRACTOR shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediatelycorrect deficiencies.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the adequacy of the formwork in its entirety andany forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the WORK andreplaced. The CONTRACTOR shall provide worker protection from protruding reinforcement bars inaccordance with applicable safety codes.

C. The CONTRACTOR may reuse forms only if in good condition and only if acceptable to theDISTRICT. Reused forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and may require light sanding between uses toobtain a uniform surface texture on all exposed concrete surfaces. Forms shall not be reused if theyhave developed defects that would affect the surface texture of exposed concrete. Exposed concretesurfaces are defined as surfaces, which are permanently exposed to view. In the case of forms for theinside wall surfaces of hydraulic/water retaining structures, unused tie rod holes in forms shall becovered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the DISTRICT.

D. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together tomaintain their position and shape under a load of freshly-placed concrete. If adequate foundation forshores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided.

E. Immediately before the placing of reinforcing, faces of all forms in contact with concrete shall receivea thorough coating of form release agent. Any excess agent shall be satisfactorily removed beforeplacing concrete. If using mineral oil, the CONTRACTOR shall oil the forms at least two weeks inadvance of their use. Care shall be exercised to keep oil/release agent off the surfaces of steelreinforcement and other items to be embedded in concrete.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall supply sufficient number of forms of each kind to permit the required rateof progress to be maintained.

G. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicablelocal, state, and Federal regulations.

3.02 WATERSTOPS:

A. Waterstops shall be embedded in the concrete across joints as indicated. Waterstops shall be fullycontinuous for the extent of the joint. Splices necessary to provide such continuity shall beaccomplished in conformance to printed instructions of MANUFACTURER of the waterstops. TheCONTRACTOR shall take suitable precautions and means to support and protect the waterstops during


the progress of the WORK and shall repair or replace at its own expense any waterstops damagedduring the progress of the WORK. Waterstops shall be stored so as to permit free circulation of airaround the waterstop material.

B. When any waterstop is installed in the concrete on one side of a joint, while the other half or portion ofthe waterstop remains exposed to the atmosphere for more than 2 days, suitable precautions shall betaken to shade and protect the exposed waterstop from direct rays of the sun during the entire exposureand until the exposed portion of the waterstop is embedded in concrete.

3.03 SPLICES IN PVC WATERSTOPS:

A. Splices in PVC waterstops shall be performed by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop sections inaccordance with the MANUFACTURER’s printed recommendations. It is essential that:

1. The material not be damaged by heat sealing.

2. The splices have a tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced material tensilestrength.

3. The continuity of the waterstop ribs and of its tubular center axis be maintained. No edgewelding is allowed.

B. Butt joints of the ends of 2 identical waterstop sections may be made while the material is in the forms.

C. All joints with waterstops involving more than 2 ends to be jointed together, and all joints whichinvolve an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining of 2 dissimilar waterstop sections shall beprefabricated (shop made fitting) prior to placement in the forms, allowing not less than 24-inch longstrips of waterstop material beyond the joint. Upon being inspected and approved, such prefabricated(shop made fitting) waterstop joint assemblies shall be installed in the forms and the ends of the 24-inch strips shall be butt welded to the straight run portions of waterstop in place in the forms.

D. Where a centerbulb waterstop intersects and is jointed with a non-centerbulb waterstop, care shall betaken to seal the end of the centerbulb, using additional PVC material if needed.

3.04 FORM DESIGN:

A. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the establishedalignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position andshape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. Suitable andeffective means shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels andsections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins,offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete.

B. Plywood, 5/8-inch and greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are spacedclose enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. The forms shall be tight so as toprevent the loss of water, cement, and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically,the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket toprevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1- to1-1/2-inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate clean-out holes at the bottom of each lift of forms. Thesize, number, and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to the DISTRICT. Wheneverconcrete cannot be placed from the top of a wall form in a manner that meets the requirements of theContract Documents, form windows shall be provided in the size and spacing needed to allowplacement of concrete to the requirements of SECTION 03300. The size, number, and location of suchform windows shall be as acceptable to the DISTRICT.

3.05 FORM CONSTRUCTION:


A. Vertical Surfaces: All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placementof the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to theindicated thickness of a concrete member, where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmedground, in lieu of forms. Permission to do this on other concrete members will be granted only formembers of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can betrimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete hasbeen placed.

B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than thoseindicated, except as may be acceptable to the DISTRICT. When a second lift is placed on hardenedconcrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location, and tightening of ties atthe top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on theconcrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required.

C. Form Ties

1. Embedded Ties: Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitabletoothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled withmortar. Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form-tying device or part thereof,other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in suchmanner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use ofsnap-ties, which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal, will not bepermitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties passthrough the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending throughthe concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded andshall terminate not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete.

2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, the larger end of the taper tie shall beon the wet side of walls in water retaining structures. After the taper tie is removed, the holeshall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast neoprene or polyurethanetapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole shall be completely filled withnon-shrink grout for water bearing and below-grade walls. The hole shall be completely filledwith non-shrink or regular cement grout for above-grade walls, which are dry on both sides.Exposed faces of walls shall have the outer 2 inches of the exposed face filled with a cementgrout, which shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface.

3.06 JOINT CONSTRUCTION:

A. Setting Waterstops:

1. In order to eliminate faulty installation that may result in joint leakage, the CONTRACTORshall be particularly careful to get the correct positioning of the waterstops during installation.Adequate provisions must be made to support and anchor the waterstops during the progress ofthe WORK and to insure the proper embedment in the concrete. The symmetrical halves of thewaterstops shall be equally divided between the concrete pours at the joints. The center axis ofthe waterstops shall be coincident with the joint openings. Maximum density andimperviousness of the concrete shall be insured by thoroughly working it in the vicinity of alljoints.

2. In placing PVC waterstops in the forms, the CONTRACTOR shall provide means to preventthe waterstop from being folded over by the concrete as it is placed. Waterstops shall be held inplace with light wire ties on 12-inch centers which shall be passed through hog rings at the edgeof the waterstop and tied to the curtain of reinforcing steel. Horizontal waterstops, with theirflat face in a vertical plane, shall be held in place with continuous supports to which the topedge of the waterstop shall be tacked. In placing concrete around horizontal waterstops, withtheir flat face in a horizontal plane, the CONTRACTOR shall work concrete under thewaterstops by hand so as to avoid the formation of air and rock pockets.


3. In placing centerbulb waterstops in expansion joints, the centerbulb shall be centered on thejoint filler material.

4. Waterstop in vertical wall joints shall stop 6 inches from the top of the wall where suchwaterstop does not connect with any other waterstop and is not to be connected to a futureconcrete placement.

B. Joint Location:

1. Construction joints and other types of joints shall be provided where indicated. When notindicated, construction joints shall be provided at 25-foot maximum spacing for all concreteconstruction. Where joints are indicated spaced greater than 40 feet apart, additional jointsshall be provided to maintain the 25-foot maximum spacing. The location of all joints, of anytype, shall be submitted for acceptance by the DISTRICT.

C. Joint Preparation:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall take special care in preparing concrete surfaces at joints wherebonding between 2 sections of concrete is required. Unless otherwise indicated, such bondingwill be required at all horizontal joints in walls. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance withthe requirements of SECTION 03300. Except on horizontal wall construction joints, wall toslab joints, or where otherwise indicated, at all joints where waterstops are required, the jointface of the first pour shall be coated with a bond breaker as indicated herein.

D. Retrofit Joint Preparation:

1. Existing surfaces to receive a retrofit waterstop shall be clean and free from any loose orforeign material. Surface shall be given a light sandblast or hydroblast finish to 1/8-inchamplitude prior to application of epoxy and waterstop.

E. Construction Joint Sealant:

1. Construction joints in water-bearing floor slabs, and elsewhere as indicated, shall be providedwith tapered grooves which shall be filled with a construction joint sealant. The material usedfor forming the tapered grooves shall be left in the grooves until just before the grooves arecleaned and filled with joint sealant. After removing the forms from the grooves, all laitanceand fins shall be removed, and the grooves shall be sandblasted. The grooves shall be allowedto become thoroughly dry, after which they shall be blown out; immediately thereafter, theyshall be primed, bond breaker tape placed in the bottom of the groove, and filled with theconstruction joint sealant. The primer shall be furnished by the sealant MANUFACTURER.No sealant will be permitted to be used without a primer. Care shall be used to completely fillthe sealant grooves. Areas designated to receive a sealant fillet shall be thoroughly cleaned, asoutlined for the tapered grooves, prior to application of the sealant.

2. The primer and sealant shall be placed strictly in accordance with the printed recommendationsof the MANUFACTURER, taking special care to properly mix the sealant prior to application.The sides of the sealant groove shall not be coated with bond breaker, curing compound, or anyother substance which would interfere with proper bonding of the sealant. Sealant shall achievefinal cure at least 7 days before the structure is filled with water.

3. Sealant shall be installed by a competent waterproofing specialty contractor who has asuccessful record of performance in similar installations.

4. Thorough, uniform mixing of 2-part, catalyst-cured materials is essential; special care shall betaken to properly mix the sealer before its application. Before any sealer is placed, theCONTRACTOR shall arrange to have the crew doing the WORK carefully instructed on theproper method of mixing and application by a representative of the sealant MANUFACTURER.

5. Any joint sealant which fails to fully and properly cure after the MANUFACTURER’srecommended curing time for the conditions of the WORK hereunder shall be completelyremoved; the groove shall be thoroughly sandblasted to remove all traces of the uncured or


partially cured sealant and primer, and shall be re-sealed with the indicated joint sealant. Costsof such removal, joint treatment, re-sealing, and appurtenant WORK shall be theCONTRACTOR’s responsibility.

F. Retrofit Waterstop:

1. Retrofit waterstops shall be set in a bed of epoxy over a sandblasted surface with stainless steelbatten bars and 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel anchors at 6 inches on center, staggered, and inaccordance with the MANUFACTURER’s written recommendations.

3.07 REMOVAL OF FORMS:

A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this WORK shall be donewith care so as to avoid injury to the concrete or workers. In the case of roof slabs and above-groundfloor slabs, forms shall remain in place until test cylinders for the roof concrete attain a minimumcompressive strength of 75 percent of the 28-day strength (0.75f'c) in SECTION 03300. No formsshall be disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit before the concrete in all the adjacentpanels or units have attained 0.75f'c strength and have been in place for a minimum of 7 days. Thetime required to establish said strength shall be determined by the DISTRICT, who will make severaltest cylinders for this purpose from concrete used in the first group of roof panels placed. If the timeso determined is more than the 7-day minimum, then that time shall be used as the minimum length oftime. Forms for vertical walls of waterholding structures shall remain in place at least 36 hours afterthe concrete has been placed.

B. Forms for parts of the WORK not specifically mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods oftime as recommended in ACI 347.

3.08 FALSEWORK:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance, andsafety of all falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and similar appurtenances, whichshall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of the OSHA Safety and HealthStandards for Construction, and the requirements herein.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall design and construct falsework to provide the necessary rigidity and tosupport the loads. Falsework for the support of a superstructure shall be designed to support the loadsthat would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall place falsework upon a solid footing, safe against undermining, andprotected from softening. When the falsework is supported on timber piles, the maximum calculatedpile loading shall be as recommended by the CONTRACTOR’s geotechnical engineer and shall notexceed 20 tons. When falsework is supported on any portion of the structure which is alreadyconstructed, the load imposed by the falsework shall be spread, distributed, and braced in such a wayas to avoid any possibility of damage to the structure.

3.09 TOLERANCES: The variation from plumb, level and required lines shall not exceed 1/4-inch in any ten feet(10’) of length, non cumulative, and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. Allother tolerances shall be within the tolerances of ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Constructionand Materials.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to provide and properly place allconcrete reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers, and concrete inserts for use in thereinforced concrete and masonry construction and all appurtenant work, including all the wires, clips,supports, chairs, spacers, and other accessories as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.


1. SECTION 03100 - Concrete Formwork and Accessories

2. SECTION 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

3. SECTION 03410 - Precast Concrete Products

4. SECTION 03600 - Grout

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The most recent revision of the following standard specifications shallapply to the WORK of this SECTION:


1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

2. SP-66 - Detailing Manual

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

2. A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

3. A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement

4. A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars

D. Florida Building Code, Latest Edition


1.04 SUBMITTALS: The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following:

A. Mill Certifications of Grade 60 reinforcing steel or stainless steel, as required

B. Complete bar schedule, bar details and erection drawings in conformance with ACI SP-66

C. Mill certificates shall be delivered with each shipment of reinforcing bars.



1.06 RESPONSIBILITIES: The CONTRACTOR shall perform Pull tests to 50 percent of five percent of drilleddowels, randomly selected by the DISTRICT. If any tested dowels slip or yield, an additional five percent ofdrilled dowels shall be tested until an entire five percent sample is tested without slipping or yielding.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS:

A. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) Certifications for mechanical couplers, ifallowed

B. Mill Certifications of Grade 60 reinforcing steel

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient notice and opportunity tothe DISTRICT to review the placement of the reinforcing steel before the concrete is placed. TheCONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for the DISTRICT as requested for inspection. TheCONTRACTOR shall provide 48 hours advance notice of its intention to begin new WORK activities.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 REINFORCING BARS:

A. Metal reinforcement shall be deformed type bars conforming to ASTM A615, Specifications forDeformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Grade 60, unless otherwisespecified. Reinforcing steel shall be fabricated for the shapes and dimensions indicated on theDrawings and in compliance with ACI 318. All bars shall be bent cold.

B. Replace all reinforcement with bends and kinks not shown on fabrication Shop Drawings. Removefrom job site all such reinforcing and replace with new fabricated steel. Field bending ofreinforcement at the work site is prohibited.

C. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A185, and the detailsindicated. Do not use fabric that has been rolled. Install flat sheets only.

D. Spiral reinforcement shall be cold-drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of ASTM A82.

E. Mechanical couplers shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the DISTRICT. Thecouplers shall develop a tensile strength that exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of thereinforcement bars being spliced at each splice. Where the type of coupler used is composed of morethan one component, all components required for a complete splice shall be provided. This shall applyto all mechanical splices, including those splices intended for future connections. Reinforcement steeland coupler used shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection. Straightthreaded type couplers shall require the use of the next larger size reinforcing bar or shall be used withreinforcing bars with specially forged ends which provide upset threads which do not decrease thebasic cross section of the bar.

F. Epoxy for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for themoisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. Epoxy grout shallmeet the requirements in SECTION 03600.

2.02 ACCESSORIES: All chairs and bolsters shall conform to ACI SP-66 and the CRSI Manual of StandardPractices and shall have galvanized or plastic legs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT AND ANCHORAGE:


A. Bar supports shall be spaced in accordance with CRSI.

1. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or metal supports, spacers or metalhangers that are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcement steel.Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall beused in sufficient numbers to support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall suchsupport be continuous. Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to thesteel with wire ties that are embedded in the blocks. For concrete over formwork, theCONTRACTOR shall provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs andspacers.

2. Limitations on the use of bar support materials shall be as follows.

a. Concrete Dobies: permitted at all locations except where architectural finish is required.

b. Wire Bar Supports: permitted only at slabs over dry areas, interior non-hydraulic wallsurfaces, and exterior wall surfaces.

c. Plastic Bar Supports: permitted at all locations except on grade.

B. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed in accordance with the Drawings and shall be adequatelysecured in position with not less than 16-gauge annealed wire. The placement tolerances shall be inaccordance with ACI 318, paragraph 7.5, Placing Reinforcement and the CRSI Manual of StandardPractices.

C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete coverage.

D. Bars additional to those indicated which may be found necessary or desirable by the CONTRACTORfor the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at itsown expense.

E. Additional reinforcement around openings:

1. Place an equivalent area of steel around pipe or opening and extend on each side and top andbottom sufficiently to develop bond in each bar.

2. Refer to details on Drawings for bar extension length on each side of opening.

3. Where welded wire fabrics are used, provide extra reinforcing using fabric or deformed bars.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits in Section 7.5 ofACI 318 except where in conflict with the requirements of the Building Code.

G. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel continuouslyacross the entire width of the reinforcement mat, and shall support the reinforcement mat in the planeindicated.

H. Welded wire fabric placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks (dobies) spacednot more than three (3) feet on centers in any direction. Welded wire fabric shall not be placed on theground and hooked into place in the freshly placed concrete.

I. Welded wire fabric reinforcement placed over horizontal forms shall be supported on slab bolsters.Slab bolsters shall be spaced not more than 30 inches on center. The construction practice of placingwelded wire fabric on the ground and hooking it into place in the freshly placed concrete shall not beused.

3.02 CONCRETE COVER: The concrete cover over reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318, paragraph 7.7,Concrete Protection for Reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated. Tie wires shall be bent away from theforms in order to provide the required concrete coverage.

3.03 SPLICING:


A. All lap splices of bar reinforcement shall be as indicated and conform to Chapter 12 of ACI 318 or asotherwise approved by the DISTRICT. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size andspacing of the spliced bar.

B. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be securelytied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each two running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tiedin such a manner that they cannot slip.

C. Splices in column spiral reinforcement, when necessary, shall be made by a lap of 1-1/2 turns.

D. Reinforcing shall not be straightened or rebent in a manner which will injure the material. Bars shallbe bent or straight as indicated. Do not use bends different from the bends indicated. Bars shall bebent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the DISTRICT. No bars partially embedded in concrete shallbe field-bent except as indicated or specifically permitted by the DISTRICT.

E. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be a type which can be set either flush or recessed fromthe face as indicated. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to completely eliminateconcrete or cement paste from entering. Couplers intended for future connections shall be recessed aminimum of 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. After the concrete is placed, the coupler shall beplugged with plastic plugs which have an O-ring seal and the recess filled with sealant to prevent anycontact with water or other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Unless indicated otherwise, mechanical coupler spacing and capacity shall match the spacing andcapacity of the reinforcing indicated for the adjacent section.

B. Reinforcement shall be free of all materials that will reduce bond.

C. Reinforcement steel shall at all times be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion untilconcrete is placed around it.

D. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall bethoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substancesimmediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, reinforcementshall be re-inspected and, if necessary, re-cleaned or sandblasted.

E. Properly cap all vertical reinforcement steel if area is subject to having workers above thereinforcement area.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRILLED REINFORCING STEEL DOWELS: For drilling and grouting informationsee SECTION 03600.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and materials necessaryfor the proper placement, curing, finishing, protection, and repair of the cast-in-place concrete requiredby the Contract Documents.

1. SECTION 02200 Earthwork

2. SECTION 03100 Concrete Formwork and Accessories

3. SECTION 03200 Concrete Reinforcement

4. SECTION 03600 Grout

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The following standard specifications shall apply to the Work of thisSection:


1. 117 - Standard Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials

2. 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings

3. 304.2R - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

4. 305 - Committee Report on Hot-Weather Concreting

5. 306 - Committee Report on Cold-Weather Concreting

6. 308 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete

7. 309 - Consolidation of Concrete

8. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

9. 350 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures


1. C31 - Making and Curing Concrete compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field

2. C33 - Concrete Aggregates

3. C39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

4. C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete

5. C127 - Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

6. C128 - Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate

7. C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

8. C143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

9. C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement

10. C156 - Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials

11. C157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement Mortar and Concrete

12. C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the VolumetricMethod


13. C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the PressureMethod

14. C260 - Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

15. C309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

16. C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

17. C566 - Test Method for Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

18. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Useas a Mineral Admixture in Concrete

19. C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

20. C1077 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for use inConstruction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

21. C1157 – Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cements

22. C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout

23. D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving andStructural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

24. D2419 - Test Methods for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

25. E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

26. E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earthor Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs

C. Federal Specifications:

1. UU-B-790A - Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellant and FireResistant)

D. Florida Building Code and Local Building Codes, as appropriate

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Structural Concrete: Concrete to be used in all cases except where indicated otherwise in the ContractDocuments.

B. Sitework Concrete: Concrete to be used for access gate and fence post anchors and footers.

C. Tremie Concrete: Concrete to be placed underwater and used for the tremie slab which will form thefoundation for the gravity wall.

D. Flowable Fill: Flowable fill may be used to substitute the 4” bedding stone leveling layer undergavions and endwalls at no additional cost to the DISTRICT.

E. Hydraulic Structure: An environmental engineering concrete structure for the containment, treatment,or transmission of water, wastewater, other fluids, or gases.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Mix Designs:

1. Prior to beginning the WORK and within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, theCONTRACTOR shall submit preliminary concrete mix designs which shall show theproportions and gradations of all materials proposed for each class and type of concrete. Mix


designs shall be checked by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the DISTRICT. Allcosts related to such checking shall be CONTRACTOR’S responsibility.

2. Test data relating to the cement, aggregate, and admixtures shall be less than six months old.Furnish the submittals in accordance with ACI 301 for the following:

a. Mill tests for cement

b. Admixture certification. Chloride ion content shall be included.

c. Aggregate gradation test results and certification

d. Delivery Tickets:

3. Where ready-mix concrete is used, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish delivery tickets at the timeof delivery of each load of concrete. Each ticket shall show the state certified equipment usedfor measuring and the total quantities, by weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate,admixtures, and the amounts of water in the aggregate added at the batching plant, and theamount allowed to be added at the Site for the specific design mix. In addition, each ticket shallstate the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day, to the nearest minute,corresponding to the times when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when itarrived at the Site, when unloading began, and when unloading was finished.

B. Other

1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit materials and methods for curing.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit product specifications, data, and installation instructions forall miscellaneous products called for in this specification.

3. Tremie Concrete:

a. Placement Plan: The CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed plans for concreteplacement, which shall include method and equipment used, pipe spacing, and locationthroughout the duration of placement, and the planned locations to be used for relocatingpipes as placement progresses. The plan shall be submitted at least 20 days prior tocommencing of concrete placement. No concrete shall be placed until theCONTRACTOR has received approval.

b. Placement Procedures: The CONTRACTOR shall submit placement procedures whichinclude details of stable platform for support of tremie operations, and procedures forpreventing water flowing across or through the underwater placement site duringconcreting.

4. Flowable Fill:

a. Placement: The CONTRACTOR shall follow placement plan and procedures submittal inaccordance with Section 121 (Flowable Fill) of FDOT’s Technical Specifications 2013Edition.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically actuated counters by which thenumber of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable,recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of startingmixers at mixing speeds.


1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING:

A. General


1. Concrete and other materials for testing shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR, and theCONTRACTOR shall assist the DISTRICT in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup ofexcess material.

2. The testing laboratory will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1077.

3. The cost of trial batch, laboratory, and shrinkage tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, willbe the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility.

B. Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests

1. Tests for determining slump shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C143.

2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities, abrasionresistance, and soundness, according to ASTM C33.

3. A testing laboratory approved by the DISTRICT shall prepare a trial batch of each class ofconcrete, based on the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the CONTRACTOR. Duringthe trial batch the aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using the twocoarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces anacceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments will be consideredrefinements to the mix design and will not be the basis for extra compensation to theCONTRACTOR. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether theaggregate proportions are from the CONTRACTOR'S preliminary mix design, or whether theproportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. The trial batch shall be preparedusing the aggregates, cement, and admixture proposed for the project. The trial batch materialsshall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain 3 drying shrinkage, and 6compression test specimens from each batch.

4. The determination of compressive strength shall be made in accordance with ACI 318, Section5.3.

5. A sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch shall be performed according tothe requirements of ASTM C136. Values shall be given for percent passing each sieve.

6. The final selection of the Tremie Concrete mix design shall be based upon test placementsunderwater in a placement box or in a pit that can be de-watered after placement. Testplacements shall be examined for concrete flatness, amount of laitance present, quality ofconcrete at the extreme flow distance of the test. The DISTRICT shall determine theacceptance or rejection of the mix based on the results of the test.

7. The final selection of the Flowable Fill mix design shall be based upon test placements in aplacement box or in a pit that can provide easy access to the examination of the Flowable Fillafter placement. Test placements shall be examined for fill flatness and quality of fill at theextreme flow distance of the test. The DISTRICT shall determine the acceptance or rejection ofthe mix based on the results of the test.

C. Field Tests

1. The responsibility to retain the services of an independent testing laboratory shall be as definedin SECTION 01410.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost of any additional tests and investigation on WORK thatdoes not meet the specifications.

3. Tests on pumped concrete shall be taken at the point of final placement.

4. Compressive Test:

Compressive test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each class ofconcrete placed each day and for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof each day.


a. Each set of test specimens shall consist of 5 cylinders. Specimens shall be made inaccordance with ASTM C31. Specimens shall be 6-inch diameter by 12-inch highcylinders.

b. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C39. Two (2) cylindersshall be broken at 7 days and two (2) at 28 days, and the remaining cylinder shall be heldto verify test results, if needed.

c. The acceptance of the test results shall be the average of the strengths of the twospecimens tested at 28 days as per ACI 318. Evaluation and acceptance of the concreteshall be per ACI 318, Chapter 5.

5. Slump Tests: One (1) slump test shall be taken per truckload in accordance with ASTM C143.

6. Air Content: Air content shall be determined for each compressive test taken in accordancewith ASTM C231 or by ASTM C173.

7. Aggregate testing shall be made every 12 months during construction to insure continuedcompliance with these Specifications.

8. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject to removaland replacement.

9. Temperature: Concrete temperature shall be recorded in accordance with ASTM C1064.

10. During placement of concrete underwater, sampling and testing of slump, air content, andtemperature shall be taken every hour, or for every 200 cubic yards of concrete placed.Sounding in various locations shall also be conducted at the same interval.


PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 GENERAL:

A. All materials shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use according to NSF Standard 61.

B. Cement for concrete that will contact potable water shall not be obtained from kilns that burn metalrich hazardous waste fuel.

C. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or breakage.Cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers shall not be used. Cement shall be used inthe sequence of receipt of shipments.

D. Materials shall comply with the requirements of Sections 201, 203, and 204 of ACI 301, as applicable.

E. Storage of materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 205 of ACI 301.

2.02 CEMENT:

A. Cement shall be standard Portland Cement Type I conforming to ASTM C150 and C1157.

B. A minimum of 85 percent of cement by weight shall pass a 325 screen.

C. A single brand of cement shall be used throughout the WORK, and prior to its use, the brand shall beaccepted by the DISTRICT.

D. Sacked cement shall be stored in such a manner so as to permit access for inspection and sampling.Certified mill test reports, including fineness, for each shipment of cement to be used shall besubmitted to the DISTRICT, if requested, regarding compliance with these Specifications.


2.03 AGGREGATES:

A. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the DISTRICT, shall be non-reactive, and shallconform to the requirements of ASTM C33.

B. When tested in accordance with ASTM C33, the loss resulting after 5 cycles of the soundness test,shall not exceed 10 percent for fine aggregate and 12 percent for coarse aggregate, when using sodiumsulfate.

C. When tested in accordance with ASTM C33, the ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity shallnot exceed 1.0.

D. Course Aggregates:

1. Coarse aggregates shall be crushed stone, gravel or other approved inert material having clean,hard, durable, uncoated particles conforming to ASTM C33.

2. The coarse aggregates shall be prepared and handled in 2 or more size groups for combinedaggregates with a maximum size greater than 3/4-inch. When the aggregates are proportionedfor each batch of concrete, the 2 size groups shall be combined.

3. When tested in accordance with ASTM C33, the coarse aggregate shall show a loss notexceeding 42 percent after 500 revolutions, or 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions.

E. Fine Aggregates:

1. Fine aggregates shall be clean sand conforming to ASTM C33.

2. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2419, the sand equivalency shall not be less than 75percent for an average of 3 samples, nor less than 70 percent for an individual test. Gradationof fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 forthe fineness modulus of the sand used, including the optional grading in Section 6.2. Thefineness modulus of sand used shall not be over 3.1.

3. When tested in accordance with ASTM C33, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in thesupernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution.

2.04 WATER:

A. The water used in the concrete mix and for curing shall be clean, potable, and in accordance with ACI318. Water shall be free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and otherimpurities.

B. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets therequirements of the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids(over 1000 mg/l TDS) shall not be used.

2.05 ADMIXTURES:

A. General: All admixtures shall be compatible and be furnished by a single manufacturer capable ofproviding qualified field service representation. Admixtures shall be used in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. If the use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, theCONTRACTOR shall discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall not contain thiocyanates ormore than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non-toxic after 30 days.

B. Air Entraining Admixtures:

1. Air entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C260. Air content shall be tested at the pointof placement.

2. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. Thesolution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement.


3. Tremie Concrete shall have an air content of 3 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent.

4. Flowable Fill shall have an air content in accordance with the Excavatable Mix Design inSection 121 (Flowable Fill) of FDOT’s Technical Specifications 2013 Edition.

C. Set Controlling and Water Reducing Admixtures:

1. Admixtures may be added at the CONTRACTOR'S option, subject to the DISTRICT'Sapproval, to control the set, effect water reduction, and increase workability. The cost of addingan admixture shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. Concrete containing an admixtureshall be first placed at a location determined by the DISTRICT. Admixtures shall conform tothe requirements of ASTM C494. The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mixregardless of whether or not an admixture is used.

2. Concrete shall not contain more than one water-reducing admixture.

3. Set retarding admixture may be either with or without water-reducing properties. Where the airtemperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently greater than 80 degrees F, aset retarding admixture shall be used. Set retarding admixture shall conform to ASTM C494Type B or D.

4. Set accelerating admixture may be either with or without water-reducing properties. Where theair temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently less than 40 degrees F, anon-corrosive set accelerating admixture shall be used. Set accelerating admixture shallconform to ASTM C494 Type C or E.

5. Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A. The quantity of admixtureused and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions andrecommendations.

6. High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G. High range water reducershall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump hasbeen verified. No more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement shall be used.Water reducer shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating thewater/cement ratio.

a. If the high range water reducer is added to the concrete at the Site, it may be used inconjunction with the same water reducer added at the batch plant. Concrete shall have aslump of 3 inches plus or minus 1/2-inch prior to adding the high range water reducingadmixture at the Site. The high range water reducing admixture shall be accuratelymeasured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experiencedtechnician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation ofthe primary system.

b. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 70 mixer revolutions or 5minutes after the addition of the high range water reducer, unless recommendedotherwise by the manufacturer.

F. Anti-washout admixture may be used for concrete placed underwater. The admixture shall be added atthe manufacturer’s recommended dosage rate. The admixture shall be an aqueous solution and thewater in such solution shall be counted as mixing water for the purpose of determining the watercement ratio of the concrete. Trial batches shall be made to verify compatibility of the materials andmix design performance.

2.06 CURING MATERIALS:

A. Curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309, Type I. Curing compound shall be white pigmented,resin based and compliant with local VOC requirements. When curing compound must be removed forfinishes or grouting, it shall be of a dissipating type. Sodium silicate compounds shall not be allowed.


B. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thicknessof 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156,shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface.

C. Polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket shall consist of whitepolyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in appearance, have a minimum thickness of 2mils, and be permanently bonded to waterproof paper conforming to the requirements of FederalSpecification UU-B-790A. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with therequirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface.

D. Polyethylene-coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be minimum 4-mil thick, whiteopaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap. Burlap shall weigh notless than 9 ounces per square yard. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with therequirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface.

E. Curing mats for use in Curing Method 6 below, shall be heavy shag rugs or carpets or cotton matsquilted at 4-inches on center. Curing mats shall weigh a minimum of 12 ounces per square yard whendry.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:

A. Damp proofing agent shall be an asphalt emulsion conforming to ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1.

B. Evaporation retardant shall create a monomolecular film on the concrete. The retardant shall have noeffect on cement hydration and shall meet local VOC requirements. Evaporation retardant shall notaffect adhesion of curing compounds or other treatments and shall not affect the color of the concrete.

C. Reinforcement shall be per SECTION 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.

D. Water Stops shall be per SECTION 03100 Concrete Formwork.

E. Damp proofing agent shall be a waterborne emulsified-asphalt. Damp proofing shall be suitable for"green" or slightly damp surfaces and shall withstand normal expansion and contraction of theconcrete. Damp proofing agent shall breath to allow vapors to escape. Damp proofing agent shallmeet local VOC requirements.

F. Bonding agents shall be 100% solids, epoxy adhesives conforming to the following:

1. For bonding freshly-mixed, plastic concrete to hardened concrete, bonding agent shall be amedium viscosity adhesive conforming to ASTM C881 Type II, Grade 2, Class C,

2. For bonding hardened concrete or masonry to steel, bonding agent shall be a non-sagging geladhesive conforming to ASTM C881 Type I or IV, Grade 3, Class C.

G. Vapor Barrier:

1. Vapor Barrier shall consist of a composite of heavy kraft paper, asphalt, fiberglassreinforcement, and polyethylene film. The composite shall be laminated under heat andpressure.

2. Vapor Barrier shall comply with federal specification UU-B-790A, Type I, Grade A, Style 4.Vapor Barrier shall have a water vapor permeance of less than 0.30 perms when tested perASTM E96.

3. Vapor Barrier shall be installed under concrete slabs of all habitable spaces. Barrier shall beinstalled per the manufacturer recommendations and per ASTM E1643.

H. Non-Waterstop Joint Material:

1. Preformed Joint Material: Preformed asphalt-impregnated fiber conforming to ASTM D1751.


2. Bond Breaker: All bond breakers shall be roofing felt or 15 mils minimum dry film thicknessof bituminous paint as indicated.

I. Flyash for Tremie Concrete

1. Flyash shall be Class F pozzolan conforming to the requirements of ASTM C618. Thepozzolan shall be obtained from a single source and shall comprise 15 percent of the volume ofthe cementitious material in the Tremie Concrete. The remaining 85 percent of the cementitiousmaterial volume shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type II.

2.08 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the qualitiesindicated. The exact proportions in which these materials are to be used for different parts of theWORK will be determined during the trial batch process. In general, the mix shall be designed toproduce a concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimumshrinkage, and, where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximumsmoothness of surface. The aggregate gradations shall be formulated to provide fresh concrete thatwill not promote rock pockets around reinforcing steel or embedded items. The proportions shall bechanged whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results. All changes shall be subject toreview by the DISTRICT.

B. Fine Aggregate Composition:

1. In mix designs for structural concrete, the percentage of fine aggregate in total aggregate byweight shall be as indicated in the following table.

Fine Aggregate

Fineness Modulus Maximum Percent

2.7 or less 41

2.7 to 2.8 42

2.8 to 2.9 43

2.9 to 3.1 44

2. For other concrete, the maximum percentage of fine aggregate of total aggregate, by weight,shall not exceed 50.

3. Fine aggregate shall be 50 percent, plus or minus 5 percent by volume of total aggregates forTremie Concrete.

C. High range water reducer shall not be used in Tremie Concrete except in conjunction with an anti-washout admixture to provide the degree of workability required for proper placement andconsolidation.

D. Duct bank concrete shall contain an integral red-oxide coloring pigment. Concrete shall be dyed redthroughout. Surface treatment to color duct banks will not be acceptable.

E. Water/Cement Ratio and Compressive Strength:

1. Water/cement ratio is given for aggregates in saturated-surface dry condition, and total moistureof all aggregates, calculated by ASTM C566, less the absorption of the aggregate as calculatedby ASTM C127 and C128, shall represent total free moisture in the aggregate to determine thewater/cement ratio. Total free moisture of aggregates shall be added to batch water to estimatewater content of concrete. Concrete shall have the following minimum properties:

F. Concrete Proportions:


Type of Work Min 28-DayCompressiveStrength(psi)

MaximumSizeAggregate(in)

* Cement Contentper cubic yd(lbs)

* MaximumW/CRatio(by weight)

Sitework Concrete:Concrete DrivingSurface, Sidewalks,Gate & Fence Footers

3,000 1 470 minimum 0.50

Flowable FillExcavatable Design Mix in accordance to Section 121of FDOT’s

Technical Specifications 2013 Edition.

* The cement content and water cement ratio are based on total cementitious material including silicafume, slag or flyash.

NOTE: The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that the limiting parameters above are not a mix design.Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the CONTRACTOR'S constructionmethods and aggregates. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing concrete with the requiredworkability and strength.

G. Adjustments to Mix Design: The CONTRACTOR may elect to decrease the water/cement ratio toachieve the strength and shrinkage requirements and/or add water reducers, as required to achieveworkability. The mixes shall be changed whenever such change is necessary or desirable to secure therequired strength, density, workability, and surface finish, and the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled tono additional compensation because of such changes. Any changes to the accepted concrete mixdesign shall be submitted to the DISTRICT for review and shall be tested again in accordance withthese Specifications.

H. When using a floor hardener, the water/cement ratio shall not be greater than specified by the hardenermanufacturer.

2.09 CONSISTENCY:

A. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period, toproduce a concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation and which can becompacted by vibratory methods to give the desired density, impermeability, and smoothness ofsurface. The quantity of water shall be changed as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisturecontent of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. The consistency ofthe concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143.The slumps shall be as follows:

Part of Work Slump (in)All concrete, unless indicated otherwise 3-inches plus or minus 1-inch

With high range water reducer added 7-inches plus or minus 2-inches

Pea gravel mix 7-inches plus or minus 2-inches

Ductbank and pipe encasement 5-inches plus or minus 1-inch

Concrete with hardener Per Hardener Manufacturer

Tremie Concrete 7-inches plus or minus 1 1/2-inches

2.10 MEASUREMENT:

A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch of concrete shallbe determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to theDISTRICT.

B. Weighing tolerances:


Material Percent of Total Weight

Cement 1

Aggregates 3

Admixtures 3

C. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or othermeasuring device of a type acceptable to the DISTRICT and capable of measuring the water invariable amounts within a tolerance of one percent. The water feed control mechanism shall becapable of being locked in position so as to deliver constantly any required amount of water to eachbatch of concrete. A positive quick-acting valve shall be used for a cut-off in the water line to themixer. The operating mechanism shall prevent leakage when the valves are closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING:

A. Proportioning of the mix shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 3 "Proportioning" of ACI 301.

B. Mixing shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 7 of ACI 301.

C. Slumps shall be as indicated herein.

D. Retempering of concrete or mortar that has partially hardened shall not be permitted.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING:

A. General: Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of any concrete,and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon.The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete.

B. Joints in Concrete:

1. All joints shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings or where otherwise approved bythe DISTRICT. The surface of the construction joint shall be rough and prior to placement shallbe cleaned and moistened with water.

2. Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of theconcrete has been stopped or interrupted so that, as determined by the DISTRICT, the newconcrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed, are defined asconstruction joints. The surfaces of horizontal joints shall be given a compacted, roughenedsurface for good bonding. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, thejoint surfaces shall be cleaned of all laitance, loose or defective concrete, foreign material, andbe roughened to a minimum 1/4-inch amplitude. Such cleaning and roughening shall beaccomplished by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate) followed by thoroughwashing. Pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction joints before thenew concrete is placed.

3. After the surfaces have been prepared, all approximately horizontal construction joints shall becovered with a 6-inch lift of a pea gravel mix. The mix shall be placed and spread uniformly.Wall concrete shall follow immediately and shall be placed upon the fresh pea gravel mix. Ifhigh range water reducer is used in the wall concrete, then the pea gravel joint topping does notneed to be used.

C. Placing Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete totake a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means that will secureproper union with subsequent work; provided that construction joints shall be made only whereacceptable to the DISTRICT.


D. Embedded Items:

1. No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded,reinforcement steel, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been completedand accepted by the DISTRICT at least 4 hours before placement of concrete. Surfaces offorms and embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from previous usageshall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed.

2. Inserts or other embedded items shall conform to the requirements herein.

3. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in theforms at locations indicated on the Drawings or shown by Shop Drawings and shall beacceptable to the DISTRICT before any concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is theresponsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concretewhich is greater than 60 days of age), the surface of the old concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned androughened by hydroblasting or sandblasting to expose aggregate. The joint surface shall be coatedwith an epoxy bonding agent unless indicated otherwise by the DISTRICT.

F. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until all water entering the space to be filled with concretehas been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means, and carried out of the forms,clear of the WORK. No concrete shall be deposited underwater nor shall the CONTRACTOR allowstill water to rise on any concrete until the concrete has attained its initial set. Water shall not bepermitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injurethe surface finish of the concrete. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removingground water, if required, shall be subject to the review of the DISTRICT.

G. Corrosion Protection: Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded inconcrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that therewill be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between said items and any part of the concretereinforcement. Securing such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement willnot be permitted.

H. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall, where practicable, beprovided during the placing of concrete.

I. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates while beingembedded in concrete.

J. Cleaning: The surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of alldirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before theconcrete is placed.

3.03 CONVEYING:

A. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods that will preventseparation or loss of material.

B. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete.

C. Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and all other points of concrete discharge throughout theCONTRACTOR'S conveying, hoisting, and placing system shall be designed and arranged so thatconcrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it.Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the DISTRICT. Chutes longer than 50 feet willnot be permitted. Minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the indicated consistencywill readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated insuch a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyor belts andchutes shall be covered.


D. Pumping:

1. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the CONTRACTOR shalldiscontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventionalmethods.

2. The pumping equipment shall have 2 cylinders and be designed to operate with one cylinder incase the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the CONTRACTOR mayhave a standby pump on the Site during pumping.

3. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.

4. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced.

5. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted.

6. Concrete samples for slump, air content, and test cylinders will be taken at the placement end ofthe hose.

E. Tremie Equipment

1. Tremie pipes shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel pipe to withstand all anticipated handlingstresses, and shall be sized to prevent aggregate-caused locking. Pipes shall be fabricated insections such that the upper sections can be removed as the placement progresses. The pipesections shall be joined with flanges and gasket to prevent water being sucked in the concreteduring placement. The tremie pipe shall be marked to facilitate quick determination of thedistance from the water surface to the mouth of the tremie.

2. Suitable sized funnel or hopper shall be provided for the tremie to allow transfer of adequatevolume of concrete from the delivery device to the tremie. A stable platform shall be providedfor the tremie support during the placement operation.

3.04 DELIVERY:

A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, transported and delivered in accordance with thesespecifications and ASTM C94 including the following supplementary requirements.

1. Concrete shall be discharged within 1-1/2 hours from the time concrete was mixed, if centrallymixed, or from the time the original water was added, if transit-mixed, or before the drum hasbeen revolved 300 revolutions, whichever is first.

2. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch asdischarged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix, andgrading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load duringdischarge give slumps differing by more than one-inch when the required slump is 3-inches orless, or if they differ by more than 2-inches when the required slump is more than 3-inches, themixer shall not be used on the WORK unless the causative condition is corrected andsatisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. Mechanical details of the mixer,such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation,general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before afurther attempt to use the unit will be permitted.

3. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not bepermitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed concrete and in batchaggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the DISTRICT.

4. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of thedrum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additionalmixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment asagitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum beforeactuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolution of mixing.


3.05 PLACING:

A. Non-Conforming Work or Materials: Concrete which during or before placing is found not to conformto the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately removed from the WORK.Concrete which is not placed in accordance with these Specifications, or which is of inferior quality,shall be removed and replaced.

B. Unauthorized Placement: No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly authorizedrepresentative of the DISTRICT. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the DISTRICT in writing at least24 hours in advance of placement of any concrete.

C. Concrete shall not be dropped more than four feet (4’) without use of chutes or tremies. Concretingshall be a continuous operation until placement of the section is complete. All concrete shall beworked around reinforcement and embedded items. If vibrators are used, care shall be taken not tosegregate concrete. Vibrators will not be allowed to move concrete within the form. All forms andsubgrade shall be dampened prior to placement and excess water removed.

D. Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and therequirements of this Section.

E. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form, nor shall concrete beplaced in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces above theplaced concrete. In such cases, means such as hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas,rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it may reach the placeof final deposit without separation. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process ofdepositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6-feetin horizontal direction. Concrete in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers notdeeper than 2-feet; and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction jointsexcept where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previouslayer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5-feet of vertical rise perhour. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of all forms so that the concrete at theplaces of deposit is visible from the deck or runway.

F. Concrete with hardener shall be placed per the hardener manufacturers written recommendations.

G. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Epoxy adhesive bonding agent shall be applied to the old surfacesaccording to the manufacturer's written recommendations. This provision shall not apply to jointswhere waterstop is provided, see SECTION 03100 Concrete Formwork.

H. Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than90 degrees F or less than 55 degrees F for sections less than 12-inches thick, nor less than 50 degreesfor all other sections. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no additional compensation on accountof the temperature requirements.

I. Hot Weather Placement

1. Placement of concrete in hot weather shall conform to ACI 305 and the following:

2. When the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between theintroduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 60 minutes.

3. If concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete wouldexceed 90 degrees F, the CONTRACTOR shall employ effective means, such as pre-cooling ofaggregates and mixing water using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain thetemperature of the concrete below 90 degrees F as it is placed.

J. Cold Weather Placement

1. Placement of concrete in cold weather shall conform to ACI 306.1, and the following:


2. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep thetemperature of the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below the minimum temperature.

3. Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against whichconcrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement, thaw the subgrade to aminimum depth of 6-inches. Reinforcement and embedded items shall be warmed to above 32degrees F prior to concrete placement.

4. Maintain the concrete temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72 hours after placement.

K. Order of Placing Concrete

1. The order of placing concrete in all parts of the WORK shall be acceptable to the DISTRICT.In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as boundedby construction joints at the indicated locations. The placing of units shall be done by placingalternate units in a manner such that each unit placed shall have cured at least 5 days forhydraulic structures and 2 days for all other structures before the contiguous unit or units areplaced, except that the corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until the 2 adjacentwall panels have cured at least 10 days for hydraulic structures and 4 days for all otherstructures.

2. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To insure alevel, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick shall betacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried about 1/2-inch above theunderside of the strip. About one hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be removedand any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel and laitanceshall be removed.

L. Placing Concrete Underwater

1. Tremie Concrete shall be placed per ACI 304.2 Chapter 8 for placing concrete underwater.

2. Starting Placement

a. Prior to Tremie Concrete placement, the CONTRACTOR shall use proper means toprevent flow of water across or through the placement site.

b. The CONTRACTOR shall determine the spacing of tremie pipes for concrete placement,but shall maintain a minimum of one pipe for each 300 square feet of concrete placed.

c. Tremie started using the end plate, dry pipe technique shall be filled with concrete beforebeing raised off the bottom. The pipe shall be initially raised sufficiently to establish amound around the mouth of the tremie pipe.

d. Tremie started using a go-devil shall be lifted a maximum of 6-inches to allow water toescape, then concrete shall be added to the tremie slowly to force the go-devil downward.Once the go-devil reaches the mouth of the tremie, the tremie shall be lifted to allow theescape of the go-devil, and the forming of a mound around the mouth of the pipe.

e. Tremie pipe shall be adequately embedded in the fresh concrete, and slowly raised so asto prevent "loss of seal". Should a "loss of seal" occur in a tremie, placement throughthat tremie must be terminated immediately, and the tremie pipe removed. The flow mustbe restarted with the end plate, dry pipe technique, a go-devil shall not be used to restart atremie after loss of seal.

3. Placing

a. Placement of concrete shall be as continuous as possible through the tremie. Placementinterruptions less than 30 minutes are allowed to restart without any special procedure.Placement interruptions between 30 minutes and the initial setting time shall be treatedby removal, resealing, and restarting the tremie.


b. Placement interruptions longer than the initial setting time are to be treated as horizontalconstruction joints. The concrete surface shall be "green cut" by a diver after it sets. Theconcrete surface shall be water jetted immediately prior to resuming concrete placement.

c. The rate of concrete rise shall be established based on the concrete production of the localarea and the spacing of the pipes. The volume of concrete shall be monitored throughoutthe placement to detect placement problems, such as underrun or overrun. Shouldunderrun or overrun occur, corrective actions such as readjusting the rate of concrete rise,and alternating the pipe spacing shall be taken to ensure proper placement.

d. Tremie blockage shall be cleared with caution to prevent "loss of seal".

e. The pipe delivering concrete must be secured and remain fixed horizontally whileconcrete is flowing, so as not to damage the concrete surface, and create additionallaitance, and lead to "loss of seal".

4. Post-Placement Evaluation

a. Concrete placed underwater shall be evaluated after completion of placing with, but notlimited to the methods below.

b. Coring in area of maximum concrete flow, or in area where "loss of seal" occurred duringplacement.

c. After de-watering, accurately surveying the entire concrete surface to evaluate theadequacy of the concrete placement, such as cracks, voids, and honeycomb. The defectsshall be clearly marked for repair. The concrete shall be protected from dryness, ordamages until repairs are completed.

d. As determined by the DISTRICT, the area of questionable concrete quality shall be coredand tested for compressive strength.

M. Placing Flowable Fill

1. Placing of Flowable Fill shall conform to Section 121 of FDOT’s Technical Specification 2013Edition.

3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING:

A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compactedthroughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass,filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, andbringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be Group 3per ACI 309, high speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficientnumber and with at least one standby unit as required. Group 2 vibrators may be used only at specificlocations when accepted by the DISTRICT. Tremie concrete shall not be vibrated.

B. Care shall be used in placing concrete around waterstops. The concrete shall be carefully worked byrodding and vibrating to make sure that all air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-striptype waterstops are placed horizontally, the concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand,making sure that air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Concrete surrounding the waterstops shallbe given additional vibration over and above that used for adjacent concrete placement to assurecomplete embedment of the waterstops in the concrete.

C. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or worked withsuitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills the forms orexcavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placeduntil the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly. Vibrators shall be provided insufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the required results within 15minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall


not contact the surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or towork it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents.

3.07 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING: Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of five (5) days after placementin accordance with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the WORK.

Surface to be Cured or Dampproofed MethodUnstripped forms 1

Wall sections with forms removed 6

Construction joints between footings and walls, andbetween floor slab and columns

2

Encasement and ductbank concrete and thrust blocks 3

All concrete surfaces not specifically indicated in thisParagraph

4

Floor slabs on grade in hydraulic structures 5

Slabs on grade to receive an adhered floor finish 6 (Omit curing compound)

Slabs not on grade 6

Concrete with hardener Per manufacture's written recommendations

Tremie Concrete 8

Flowable FillPer Section 121 of FDOT Technical

Specifications 2013 Edition

A. Method 1: Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be keptwet with water until removal. If steel forms are used the exposed concrete surfaces shall be keptcontinuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms are removed within 7 days of placing theconcrete, curing shall be continued in accordance with Method 6 below.

B. Method 2: The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with water for theduration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. No curing compoundshall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2.

C. Method 3: The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours or more than 24 hoursafter the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin untilat least 7 days after placement of concrete.

D. Method 4: The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound.

1. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a maximumcoverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to cover the surface with auniform film that will seal thoroughly.

2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the sealduring the 7-day curing period. If the seal is damaged or broken before the expiration of thecuring period, the break shall be repaired immediately by the application of additional curingcompound over the damaged portion.

3. Wherever curing compound has been applied by mistake to surfaces against which concretesubsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, compound shall be entirely removedby wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete.

4. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to preventmarring on unformed surfaces and within 2 hours after removal of forms. Repairs to formedsurfaces shall be made within the 2 hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs whichcannot be made within the said 2 hour period shall be delayed until after the curing compoundhas been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has beenapplied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the curing compound.


5. At locations where concrete is placed adjacent to a panel which has been coated with curingcompound, the panel shall have curing compound reapplied to an area within 6-feet of the jointand to any other location where the curing membrane has been disturbed.

6. Prior to final acceptance of the WORK, all visible traces of curing compound shall be removedfrom all surfaces in such a manner that does not damage the surface finish.

E. Method 5:

1. Until the concrete surface is covered with curing compound, the entire surface shall be keptdamp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred orwashed. The concrete shall be given a coat of curing compound in accordance with Method 4above. Not less than one hour or more than 4 hours after the curing compound has beenapplied, the surface shall be wetted with water delivered through a fog nozzle, and concrete-curing blankets shall be placed on the slabs. The curing blankets shall be polyethylene sheet,polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap. The blanketsshall be laid with the edges butted together and with the joints between strips sealed with 2-inchwide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped not less than 3-inches and fastened togetherwith a waterproof cement to form a continuous watertight joint.

2. The curing blankets shall be left in place during the 7-day curing period and shall not beremoved until after concrete for adjacent work has been placed. If the curing blankets becometorn or otherwise ineffective, the CONTRACTOR shall replace damaged sections. During thefirst 3 days of the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing, temporary orotherwise, of any materials shall be permitted on the curing blankets. During the remainder ofthe curing period, foot traffic and temporary depositing of materials that impose light pressurewill be permitted only on top of plywood sheets 5/8-inch minimum thickness, laid over thecuring blanket. The CONTRACTOR shall add water under the curing blanket as often asnecessary to maintain damp concrete surfaces at all times.

F. Method 6: This method applies to both walls and slabs.

1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum periodof at least 7 consecutive days beginning immediately after the concrete has reached final set orforms have been removed.

2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface shall be keptdamp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred orwashed.

3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curingperiod. The curing medium shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact withthe concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind or any other causes. Edges shall becontinuously held in place.

4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers orother means both during and after normal working hours.

5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, thecuring medium shall be removed, the entire concrete surface shall be wetted, and curingcompound shall be immediately applied to the entire surface in accordance with Method 4above.

6. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to avoid damageto the WORK.

G. Method 8: This method applies to Tremie Concrete. Concrete shall be cured for not less than 14 daysafter placing, by continuous submerging of the top surface with a minimum of 6-inches of water for thefull duration of curing period. Curing compound shall not be used for curing. If a reinforced slab is to


be placed over the Tremie Concrete, then the concrete surface shall be kept damp by applying of waterusing nozzles, or extending the submerging period until the placement of the slab.

H. Damp proofing

1. The exterior surfaces of backfilled dry well walls and buried roof slabs shall be damp proofedas follows.

2. Immediately after completion of curing the surface shall be sprayed with a damp proofing agentconsisting of an asphalt emulsion. Application shall be in 2 coats. The first coat shall bediluted to one-half strength by the addition of water and shall be sprayed on so as to provide amaximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon of dilute solution. The second coat shallconsist of an application of the undiluted material, and shall be sprayed on so as to provide amaximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon. Damp proofing material shall be asindicated above.

3. As soon as the material has taken an initial set, the entire area thus coated shall be coated withwhitewash. Any formula for mixing the whitewash may be used if it produces a uniformlycoated white surface and remains until placing of the backfill. If the whitewash fails to remainon the surface until the backfill is placed, the CONTRACTOR shall apply additionalwhitewash.

3.08 CONCRETE FINISHES:

A. General: Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of anykind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable deviations from plumbor level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions indicated are defined as tolerances and areindicated herein. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as describedherein. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used.

B. Formed Surfaces:

1. No treatment is required after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, andtreatment of surface defects. Where architectural finish is required, it shall be as indicated.

C. Unformed Surfaces:

After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, the unformed top surface of the gravity wall aswell as the top of the fence and gate footers shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable

tools. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, it shall be treated with a liquidevaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each work operation as necessary

to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The class of finish for unformed concrete surface of thegravity wall and top of fence and gate footers are designated and defined as follows: Unformed

Surface Finish Schedule

Area FinishTop of Gravity Wall and top of fence and gate footers U3

1. Finish U2 - (Float Finish)

a. Compact, accurately screed and float to a true uniform surface.

b. Surfaces shall be floated with wood or metal floats or a finishing machine using floatblades. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of drycement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted.

c. Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screedmarks and is uniform in texture. Test surface with straightedge and eliminate high andlow spots of more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/4-inch.


d. Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined by the DISTRICT.

2. Finish U3 - (Hand-Troweled Finish)

a. Finish surface as in Finish U2 - Float Finish and after the surface has hardenedsufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, trowelwith steel trowel to obtain a smooth dense finish after concrete has hardened to ringunder the trowel.

b. The finish shall produce a smooth dense uniform surface free of all irregularities,blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks.

3.09 PROTECTION:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury until final acceptance.

B. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. The CONTRACTORshall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminentor occurring.

3.10 DEFECTIVE SURFACE TREATMENTS:

A. Patching Concrete:

1. Patch all tie holes, honeycombs or other defects with a Portland Cement and sand grout.

2. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of 1/2-inchover the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. Where chipping or cutting tools arenot required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding bythe removal of all laitance or soft material, plus not less than 1/32-inch depth of the surface filmfrom all hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast.

3. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shootingwith shotcrete or with cement mortar so that while the repair material is being applied, thesurfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which agood bond depends.

4. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave thesurfaces of the holes clean and rough. Holes then shall be repaired in an approved manner withdry-packed cement grout. Holes left by form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-sectionand other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension shall not bereamed but shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout.

5. The grout shall not be richer than one (1) part cement and three (3) parts sand with the amountof mixing water enough to produce a workable mix. For exposed walls, the cement shallcontain such a proportion of white Portland cement as is required to make the color of the patchmatch the color of the surrounding concrete. The patch shall be finished in such a manner as tomatch the adjoining surfaces.

6. Surfaces of repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required forthe concrete in the repaired section.

B. Defective Concrete:

1. Any concrete which is not formed as shown on the Drawings or does not conform to theContract tolerances or shows defects which reduce its structural adequacy, shall be removedfrom the job by the CONTRACTOR at his expense unless the DISTRICT grants permission topatch the defective area.

C. Exposed Concrete Surfaces:


1. As soon as forms are removed, exposed surfaces shall be carefully examined and all ridges, ribsand other imperfections shall be rubbed with an abrasive stone or ground in a satisfactorymanner in order to secure a smooth, uniform and continuous surface. Plastering or coating ofsurfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted

2. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the DISTRICT.

3. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted

4. Concrete containing minor voids, pinholes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shallbe repaired as indicated below.

5. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shallbe completely removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly.

D. Repairs to Tremie Concrete

1. After the post-placement evaluation, and with the defects clearly identified, and inspected bythe DISTRICT, repair can proceed prior to or after the curing period. Concrete must beprevented from dryness before the starting of repair, and if repair is to be completed aftercuring, the repaired area and the total surface are shall be cured in accordance with thesespecifications. Plastering or coating of surfaces will not be permitted.

2. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from true line a minimum depth of 1/2-inchover the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted.

3. Cracks 1/16-inch or wider shall be repaired by injection of epoxy grout, injection proceduresshall be as recommended by the grout manufacturer.

4. Laitance, soft materials, voids, and honeycombs shall be completely removed, and cut back to aminimum of 1/2-inch below the sound concrete surface.

5. Depressions greater than 3-inches, including those formed as a result of cut backs of laitance,voids, and honeycombs, shall be repaired with concrete. Depressions less than 3-inches shall befilled with non-shrink grout per SECTION 03600.

6. When the compressive strength of the cored concrete specimens failed to meet the acceptancecriteria of this Section, the DISTRICT may require the CONTRACTOR to take additional coresfor further testing, repair, remove, or replace part or all of the concrete at no additional cost tothe DISTRICT. All cored holes shall be filled with concrete.

3.11 REINFORCEMENT: Reinforcement shall be in accordance with SECTION 03200 Concrete Reinforcement,of these Specifications. Concrete protection for the reinforcement shall conform to the requirements ACI318, paragraph 7.7.1.

3.12 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations to ensurethat the completed WORK is within tolerances. Surface defects and irregularities are defined asfinishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines,grades, or dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications,permissible deviations will be in accordance with ACI 117.

B. The following non-cumulative construction tolerances apply to finished walls and slab unlessotherwise indicated:

Item ToleranceVariation of the constructed linear outline from theestablished position in plan.

In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch

Variation from the level or from the grades indicated. In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch


Variation from plumb In 10-feet: 1/4-inch;In 20-feet or more: 1/2-inch

Variation in the thickness of slabs and walls. Minus 1/4-inch;Plus 1/2-inch

Variation in the locations and sizes of slabs and wallopenings

Plus or minus 1/4-inch

Tremie Concrete Plus or Minus 1-inch

Flowable Fill Plus or Minus 1-inch

3.13 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack ofmoisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular care shall be taken to preventthe drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Any concretefound to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at anytime prior to the final acceptance of the completed WORK, or which departs from the established lineor grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the ContractDocuments, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03410 PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS FOR BELOW-GRADE CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The work of this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, supplies, and equipment necessaryfor design, construction, delivery, and installation of plant-precast concrete products for below gradeconstruction, including connections, required by the Drawings or as specified herein.

1. SECTION 02431 - Catch Basins, Frames and Grates


3. SECTION 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement

4. SECTION 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

5. SECTION 03600 - Grout

6. SECTION 07920 - Sealants & Caulking


The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications arereferred to within the text by the basic designation only.

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

1. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges

2. Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. 211.1 (1991; R 2002) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, andMass Concrete

2. 211.2 (1998; R 2004) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural LightweightConcrete

3. 305R (1999) Hot Weather Concreting

4. 318/318R (2005) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary

5. 350/350R-01 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures andCommentary

6. 517.2R (1987; R 1992) Accelerated Curing of Concrete at Atmospheric Pressure

C. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA):

1. 01-102 (2000) Concrete Pipe Handbook

2. 01-110 (1984) Design Manual for Sulfide and Corrosion Prediction and Control

3. QPC (2005; Ver 3.0) QCast Plant Certification Manual

D. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. D1.1 (2006; Errata 2006) Structural Welding Code - Steel

2. D1.4 (2005; E 2005) Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel

E. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A 36 (2005) Carbon Structural Steel

2. A 82 (2005a) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

3. A 153 (2005) Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

4. A 184 Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Mats for Concrete Reinforcement

5. A 185 (2006; E 2006) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete


6. A 36 (2005) Carbon Structural Steel

7. A 496 (2005) Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement

8. A 497 (2006; R 2006) Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete

9. A 615 (2006a) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for ConcreteReinforcement

10. A 706 (2006a) Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

11. A 767 (2005) Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

12. A 775 (2006) Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars

13. A 82 (2005a) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

14. A 884 (2006) Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement

15. C14 Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe

16. C 31 (2006) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

17. C 33 (2003) Concrete Aggregates

18. C 39 (2005e1) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

19. C 40 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

20. C 42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete

21. C 70 Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate

22. C 76 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe

23. C 78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)

24. C 94 Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

25. C 117 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in MineralAggregates by Washing

26. C 123 Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate

27. C 125 Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

28. C 136 Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

29. C 138 (2001a) Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete

30. C 142 Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates

31. C 143 (2005a) Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

32. C 150 (2005) Portland Cement

33. C 171 (2003) Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

34. C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

35. C 173 (2001e1) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method

36. C 192 (2006) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory

37. C 231 (2004) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

38. C 260 (2006) Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

39. C 309 (2006) Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

40. C 330 (2005) Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete

41. C 361 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure Pipe

42. C 403 Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance

43. C 443 (2005a) Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets

44. C 478 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

45. C 494 (2005a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

46. C 497 Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile


47. C 506 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and SewerPipe

48. C566 Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

49. C 595 (2006) Blended Hydraulic Cements

50. C 617 Standard Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

51. C 618 (2005) Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a MineralAdmixture in Concrete

52. C 655 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and SewerPipe.

53. C 685 Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing

54. C 805 Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete

55. C 822 Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete Pipe and Related Products

56. C 825 Specification for Precast Concrete Barriers

57. C 857 Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast ConcreteUtility Structures

58. C 858 Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

59. C 877 (2002; E 2005) External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast BoxSections

60. C 890 Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Monolithic or Sectional PrecastConcrete Water and Wastewater Structures

61. C 891 (1990; R 2003) Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures

62. C 913 Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures

63. C 920 (2005) Elastomeric Joint Sealants

64. C 923 (2002) Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes andLaterals

65. C 979 Specifications for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

66. C 985 Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Specified Strength Culvert, StormDrain, and Sewer Pipe

67. C 990 (2006) Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using PreformedFlexible Joint Sealants

68. C 1018 Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First-Crack Strength of Fiber-ReinforcedConcrete (Using Beam with Third-Point Loading)

69. C 1064 (2005) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland CementConcrete

70. C 1107 (2005) Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

71. C 1116 (2003) Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete

72. C 1157 Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cements

73. C 1227 Rev A Standards Specifications for Precast Concrete Septic Tanks

74. C 1231 Standard Practice for Use of Unbonded Caps in Determination of Compressive Strengthof Hardened Concrete Cylinders

75. C 1240 (2005) Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures

76. C 1244 (2005a; E 2006) Test Method for Concrete Sewer Manholes by the Negative Air Pressure(Vacuum) Test Prior to Backfill

77. C 1260 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)

78. C 1293 Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction

79. C 1399 Test Method for Obtaining Average Residual-Strength of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete


80. C 1433 Standard Specifications for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts, Storm Drains andSewers

81. C 1478 (2006) Storm Drain Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Storm SewerStructures, Pipes and Laterals

82. C 1504 Standard Specification for Manufacture of Precast Reinforced Concrete Three-SidedStructures for Culverts, Storm Drains

83. C 1550 Standard Test Method for Flexural Toughness of Fiber Reinforced Concrete (UsingCentrally Loaded Round Panel)

84. C 1577 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, StormDrains, and Sewers Designed according to AASHTO LRFD.

85. C 1582 Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced Corrosion ofReinforcing Steel in Concrete

86. C 1602 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic CementConcrete

87. C 1603 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Solids in Water

88. C 1611 Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete

89. C 1613 Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Grease Interceptors

90. D 2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness

91. G 109 Standard Test Method for Determining the Effects of Chemical Admixtures on theCorrosion of Embedded Steel Reinforcement in Concrete Exposed to Chloride Environments

F. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. Manual of Standard Practice Placing Reinforcing Bars

G. State of Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT):

1. Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition

H. National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA):

1. QC Manual (2005; R 2006) Quality Control Manual for Precast Plants

I. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):

1. MNL-116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast ConcreteProducts

2. MNL-120 Design Handbook

3. MNL-127 Recommended Practice for Erection

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Preconstruction Submittals

1. Quality Control Procedures

a. Quality control procedures established by the precast manufacturer in accordance withNPCA QC Manual and/or ACPA QPC.

B. Shop Drawings

1. Standard Precast Units

a. The drawings for standard precast concrete units shall be shop drawings furnished by theprecast concrete producer for approval by the DISTRICT. These drawings shalldemonstrate that the applicable industry design standards have been met. Includeinstallation and construction information on shop drawings. Include details of steelreinforcement size and placement as well as supporting design calculations, ifappropriate. The precast concrete units shall be produced in accordance with theapproved shop drawings. The shop drawings shall indicate assumptions used in the


design of standard units. The DISTRICT will verify that the design assumptions aresuitable for the proposed application.

2. Custom-Made Precast Units

a. The drawings for custom-made precast concrete units shall be shop drawings furnishedby the precast concrete producer for approval by the DISTRICT. Show on thesedrawings complete design, installation, and construction information in such detail as toenable the DISTRICT to determine the adequacy of the proposed units for the intendedpurpose. Include details of steel reinforcement size and placement as well as supportingdesign calculations, if appropriate. The precast concrete units shall be produced inaccordance with the approved shop drawings.

C. Product Data

1. Standard Precast Units

a. Cut sheets, for standard precast concrete units, showing conformance to project drawingsand requirements, and to applicable industry design standards listed in this specification.

2. Proprietary Precast Units

a. Standard plans or informative literature, for proprietary precast concrete units. Makeavailable supporting calculations and design details upon request. Provide sufficientinformation as to demonstrate that such products will perform the intended task.

3. Embedded Items

a. Product data sheets and proper installation instruction for anchors, lifting inserts andother devices. Clearly indicate the products dimensions and safe working load.

4. Accessories

a. Proper installation instructions and relevant product data for items including, but notlimited to, sealants, gaskets, connectors, steps, cable racks and other items installedbefore or after delivery.

D. Design Data

1. Design Calculations

a. The precast concrete producer shall supply precast concrete unit design calculations andconcrete mix design proportions and appropriate mix design test data. Structural designcalculations shall be signed by a licensed professional engineer registered in the State ofFlorida.

E. Test Reports

1. Copies of material certifications and/or laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all othertest data, for portland cement, aggregate, admixtures, and curing compound proposed for use onthis project.

2. Copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete withthe properties specified and will be suitable for the job conditions. Such tests may includecompressive strength, flexural strength, plastic or hardened air content, abrasion and absorption.

3. Sufficient documentation, when the use of self-consolidating concrete (SCC) is proposed,showing a minimum of 30-days production track records demonstrating that SCC is appropriatefor casting of the product.

4. Copies of in-plant QA/QC inspection reports, upon the request of the DISTRICT

F. Certificates


a. Quality control procedures established in accordance with the NPCA “Quality ControlManual for Precast Concrete Plants” and/or the ACPA QCast Plant Certification Manual.

1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Furnish precast concrete units designed and fabricated by an experienced andacceptable precast concrete manufacturer who has been regularly and continuously engaged in the


manufacture of precast concrete work similar to that indicated on the drawings for at least five (5) years.Coordinate precast work with the work of other trades.

1.05 DESIGN:

A. Standard Precast Units - Design standard precast concrete units to withstand indicated design loadconditions in accordance with the applicable industry design standards of ACI 318/318R, ASTM,AASHTO, FDOT, and ACPA. Design must also consider stresses induced during handling, shippingand installation as to avoid product cracking or other handling damage. Indicate design loads forprecast concrete units on the Shop Drawings and submit all design calculations and drawings preparedand sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida, for approval prior tofabrication.

B. Non Standard Precast Units - Submit design calculations and drawings of non-standard custom-madeprecast units, prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida, forapproval prior to fabrication. Include in the calculations the analysis of units for lifting stresses and thesizing of lifting devices. Design analysis shall indicate which codes the design was based on.

C. Proprietary Precast Units - Products manufactured under franchise arrangements must conform to allthe requirements specified by the franchiser. Items not included in the franchise specification, butincluded in this specification, must conform to the requirements in this specification. Submit designcalculations and drawings of proprietary precast units, prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineerregistered in the State of Florida, for approval prior to fabrication.

D. Joints and Sealants - Provide joints and sealants between adjacent units of the type and configurationindicated on shop drawings meeting specified design and performance requirements.

E. Concrete Mix Design

1. Concrete Mix Proportions - Base selection of proportions for concrete on the methodologypresented in ACI 211.1 for normal weight concrete and ACI 211.2 for lightweight concrete.Develop the concrete proportions using the same type and brand of cement, the same type andbrand of pozzolan, the same type and gradation of aggregates, and the same type and brand ofadmixture that will be used in the manufacture of precast concrete units for the project. At aminimum of thirty days prior to precast concrete unit manufacturing, the precast concreteproducer will submit a mix design for each strength and type of concrete that will be used.Furnish a complete list of materials, including quantity, type, brand and applicable data sheetsfor all mix design constituents as well as applicable reference specifications. The use of self-consolidating concrete is permitted, provided that mix design proportions and constituents meetthe requirements of this specification.

2. Concrete Strength - Provide precast concrete units with a 28-day compressive strength (f'c) of5000 psi.

3. Water-to-Cement Ratio - The cement content shall not be less than 564 pounds per cubic yard.The water cement ratio shall be not greater than 0.45.

4. Air Content - The air content of concrete that will be exposed to freezing conditions shall bewithin the limits given below.

NOMINAL MAXIMUM AIR CONTENT %

AGGREGATE SIZE MODERATE EXPOSURE

3/8 inch 4.5 to 7.5

1/2 inch 4.0 to 7.0

3/4 inch 3.5 to 6.5

1.0 inch 3.0 to 6.0

1.5 inch 3.0 to 6.0

5. Corrosion Control - Follow design recommendations outlined in Chapter 7 of ACPA 01-102 orthe ACPA 01-110 when hydrogen sulfide is indicated as a potential problem.


6. Sulfate Resistance: Follow the guidelines outlined in ACI 350-01, Code Requirements forEnvironmental Engineering Concrete Structures and ACI 350R-01, Commentary when thepotential for sulfate attack exists due to injurious concentrations of sulfates from soil or water.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL: Demonstrate adherence to the standards set forth in NPCA QC Manual and/or ACPAQPC. Meet requirements written in the subparagraphs below:

A. NPCA and ACPA Plant Certification - The precast concrete producer shall be certified by the NationalPrecast Concrete Association's and/or the American Concrete Pipe Association's Plant CertificationProgram prior to and during production of the products for this project.

B. Qualifications, Quality Control and Inspection

1. Qualifications - Select a precast concrete producer that has been in the business of producingprecast concrete units similar to those specified for a minimum of five (5) years. The precastconcrete producer must maintain a permanent quality control department or retain anindependent testing agency on a continuing basis.


a. Show that the following QC tests are performed as required and in accordance with theASTM standards indicated.

i. Slump: Perform a slump test for each 150 cu yd of concrete produced, or once aday, whichever comes first. Perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143.

ii. Temperature: Measure the temperature of fresh concrete when slump or aircontent tests are made and when compressive test specimens are made inaccordance with ASTM C1064.

iii. Compressive Strength: Make at least four compressive strength specimens foreach 150 cubic yards of concrete of each mix in accordance with the followingStandards: ASTM C31, ASTM C192, ASTM C39.

iv. Air Content: Perform tests for air content on air-entrained, wet-cast concrete foreach 150 cu yd of concrete, but not less often than once each day when air-entrained concrete is used. Determine the air content in accordance with eitherASTM C231 or ASTM C173 for normal weight aggregates and ASTM C173 forlightweight aggregates.

v. Unit Weight: Perform tests for unit weight a minimum of once per week to verifythe yield of batch mixes. Perform unit weight tests for each 100 cu yd oflightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C138.

b. Submit test reports as specified in the Submittals paragraph and documentation todemonstrate compliance with the above subparagraphs.

3. Inspection - The DISTRICT may place an inspector in the plant when the units covered by thisspecification are being manufactured. The burden of payment for plant inspection will beclearly detailed in the specification. The precast concrete producer shall give notice 14 daysprior to the time the units will be available for plant inspection. Neither the exercise nor waiverof inspection at the plant will affect the DISTRICT'S right to enforce contractual provisions afterunits are transported or erected.

1.07 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY:

A. Handling - Handle, transport, and store products in a manner to minimize damage. Lifting devices orholes shall be consistent with industry standards. Perform lifting with methods or devices intended forthis purpose as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Storage - Store units off the ground or in a manner that will minimize potential damage.

C. Delivery - Deliver precast units to the site in accordance with the delivery schedule to avoid excessivebuild-up of units in storage at the site. Upon delivery to the jobsite, all precast concrete units will beinspected by the DISTRICT for quality and final acceptance.


1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION - The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 48-hour notice of its intention tobegin new WORK activities.

1.09 WARRANTY - The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one year from the date ofSubstantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Cement - Furnish cement conforming to ASTM C150 and C1157, Type I, or AASHTO M85 Type I.Only one brand of cement shall be used. “Low alkali” requirement may be waived if aggregates arenot reactive as defined in Appendix to ASTM C33. Submit laboratory test reports.

B. Water - Furnish water potable or free of deleterious substances in amounts harmful to concrete orembedded metals.

C. Aggregates

1. Selection: Furnish aggregates conforming to ASTM C33. Provide aggregates not containingany substance, which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement.

2. Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete: ASTM C330

D. Admixtures - No admixture may contain chlorides, bromides, fluorides, or other corrosive chemicals.

1. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260

2. Accelerating, Retarding, Water Reducing Moderate to High: ASTM C494

3. Pigments: Non-fading and lime-resistant

E. Reinforcement

1. Reinforcing Bars

a. Deformed Billet-steel: ASTM A615

b. Deformed Low-alloy steel: ASTM A706

2. Reinforcing Wire

a. Plain Wire: ASTM A82

b. Deformed Wire: ASTM A496

3. Welded Wire Fabric

a. Plain Wire: ASTM A185

b. Deformed Wire: ASTM A497

4. Epoxy Coated Reinforcement

a. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A775

b. Wires and Fabric: ASTM A884

5. Galvanized Reinforcement

a. Provide galvanized reinforcement conforming to ASTM A767

F. Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement - Synthetic fiber shall be polypropylene with a denier less than 100 anda nominal fiber length of 2 inch.

G. Grout - Nonshrink Grout shall conform to ASTM C1107. Cementitious grout shall be a mixture ofportland cement, sand, and water. Proportion one part cement to approximately 2.5 parts sand, withthe amount of water based on placement method. Provide air entrainment for grout exposed to theweather.


2.02 Inserts and Embedded Metal - All items embedded in concrete shall be of the type required for the intendedtask, and meet the following standards.

A. Structural Steel Plates, Angles, etc.: ASTM A36

B. Hot-dipped Galvanized: ASTM A153

C. Proprietary Items: In accordance with manufacturers published literature

2.03 Accessories

A. Rubber Gaskets for Circular Concrete Sewer Pipe and Culvert Pipe: ASTM C443.

B. External Sealing Bands for Noncircular Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe: ASTM C877.

C. Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Manufactured Box Sections:ASTM C990.

D. Elastomeric Joint Sealants: ASTM C920

2.04 Pipe Entry Connectors - Pipe entry connectors shall conform to ASTM C923 or ASTM C1478.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION AND PLACEMENT:

Perform fabrication in accordance with NPCA QC Manual and/or ACPA QPC unless specified otherwise.

A. Forms - Use forms, for manufacturing precast concrete products, of the type and design consistent withindustry standards and practices. They should be capable of consistently providing uniform productsand dimensions. Construct forms so that the forces and vibrations to which the forms will be subjectedcan cause no product damage. Clean forms of concrete build-up after each use. Apply form releaseagents according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not allow form release agent to build upon the form casting surfaces.

B. Reinforcement - Follow applicable ASTM Standards or ACI 318/318R for placement and splicing.Fabricate cages of reinforcement either by tying the bars, wires or welded wire fabric into rigidassemblies or by welding, where permissible, in accordance with AWS D1.4. Position reinforcing asindicated on the Drawings. Ensure that the concrete cover conforms to specified requirements. Thetolerance on concrete cover shall be one-third of that specified but not more than 1/2 inch. Provideconcrete cover not less than 1/2 inch. Take positive means to assure that the reinforcement does notmove significantly during the casting operations.

C. Embedded Items - Position embedded items at locations specified in the design documents. Performwelding in accordance with AWS D1.1 when necessary. Hold rigidly in place inserts, plates,weldments, lifting devices and other items to be imbedded in precast concrete products so that they donot move significantly during casting operations.

3.02 CONCRETE:

A. Concrete Mixing - Mixing operations shall produce batch-to-batch uniformity of strength, consistency,and appearance.

B. Concrete Placing - Deposit concrete into forms as near to its final location as practical. Keep the freefall of the concrete to a minimum. Consolidate concrete in such a manner that segregation of theconcrete is minimized and honeycombed areas are kept to a minimum. Use vibrators to consolidateconcrete with frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to produce well consolidated concrete.

1. Hot Weather Concreting - Recommendations for hot weather concreting are given in detail inACI 305R. During hot weather, give proper attention to constituents, production methods,handling, placing, protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water


evaporation that could impair required strength or serviceability of the member or structure. Thetemperature of concrete at the time of placing shall not exceed 90 degrees F.

C. Concrete Curing - Commence curing immediately following the initial set and completion of surfacefinishing.

1. Curing by Moisture Retention - Prevent moisture evaporation from exposed surfaces untiladequate strength for stripping is reached by one of the following methods:

a. Cover with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 6 mils thick per ASTM C171.

b. Cover with burlap or other absorptive material and keep continually moist.

c. Use of a membrane-curing compound applied at a rate not to exceed 200 square ft/gallon,or per manufacturers' recommendations according to ASTM C309.

2. Curing with Heat and Moisture –

Do not subject concrete to steam or hot air until after the concrete has attained its initial set.Apply steam, if used, within a suitable enclosure which permits free circulation of the steam inaccordance with ACI 517.2R. If hot air is used for curing, take precautions to prevent moistureloss from the concrete. The temperature of the concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 150degrees F. These requirements do not apply to products cured with steam under pressure in anautoclave.

D. Surface Finish - Finish unformed surfaces of wet-cast precast concrete products as specified in thecontract documents. If no finishing procedure is specified, finish such surfaces using a strike-off tolevel the concrete with the top of the form.

1. Formed Non-Architectural Surfaces - Cast surfaces against approved forms following industrypractices in cleaning forms, designing concrete mixes, placing and curing concrete. Normalcolor variations, form joint marks, small surface holes caused by air bubbles, and minor chipsand spalls will be accepted but no major imperfections, honeycombs or other major defects willbe permitted.

2. Unformed Surfaces - Finish unformed surfaces with a vibrating screed, or by hand with a float.Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips and spalls will be accepted but nomajor imperfections, honeycombs, or other major defects shall be permitted.

3. Special Finishes - Troweled, broom or other finishes shall be according to the requirements ofproject documents and performed per industry standards or supplier specifications. Submitfinishes for approval when required by the project documents. The sample finishes shall beapproved prior to the start of production.

E. Stripping Products from Forms - Do not remove products from the forms until the concrete reaches thecompressive strength for stripping required by the design. If no such requirement exists, products maybe removed from the forms after the final set of concrete provided that stripping damage is minimal.

F. Patching and Repair - No repair is required to formed surfaces that are relatively free of air voids andhoneycombed areas, unless the surfaces are required by the design to be finished.

1. Repairing Minor Defects - Defects that will not impair the functional use or expected life of aprecast concrete product may be repaired by any method that does not impair the product.

2. Repairing Honeycombed Areas - When honeycombed areas are to be repaired, remove all loosematerial and cut back the areas into essentially horizontal or vertical planes to a depth at whichcoarse aggregate particles break under chipping rather than being dislodged. Use proprietaryrepair materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If a proprietary repairmaterial is not used, saturate the area with water. Immediately prior to repair, the area should bedamp, but free of excess water. Apply a cement-sand grout or an approved bonding agent to thechipped surfaces, followed immediately by consolidating an appropriate repair material into thecavity.

3. Repairing Major Defects - Products with major defects will not be accepted by the DISTRICT.


G. Shipping Products - Do not ship products until they are at least 5 days old, unless it can be shown thatthe concrete strength has reached at least 75% of the specified 28-day strength, or that damage will notresult, impairing the performance of the product.

3.03 INSTALLATION:

A. Site Access - Provide adequate access to the site to facilitate hauling, storage and proper handling ofthe precast concrete products.

B. General Requirements

1. Install precast concrete products to the lines and grades shown in the contract documents orotherwise specified.

2. Lift products by suitable lifting devices at points provided by the precast concrete producer.

3. Install products in accordance with the precast concrete producer's instructions. In the absenceof such instructions, install underground utility structures in accordance with ASTM C891.Install pipe, inlets, manholes and drainage structures in accordance with the procedures outlinedby the American Concrete Pipe Association and Sections 425 and 430 of the FDOTSpecifications.

C. Water Tightness - Where water tightness is a necessary performance characteristic of the precastconcrete product's end use, watertight joints, pipe-entry connectors and inserts should be used to ensurethe integrity of the entire system.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 03600 GROUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all equipment, labor and material for the proper placement andcuring of grout as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein.



2. SECTION 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The following standard specifications shall apply to the WORK of thisSECTION:

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

2. C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, andMonolithic Surfacings

3. C496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

4. C531 - Test Method for Linear Shrinkable and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacing

5. C579 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and MonolithicSurfacings and Polymer Concretes

6. C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes

7. C827 - Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures

8. C881 - Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

9. C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concreteby Slant Shear

10. C939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete (Flow ConeMethod)

11. C1090 - Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens fromHydraulic-Cement Grout

12. C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)

13. C1339 - Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of Chemical-ResistantPolymer Machinery Grouts

14. D648 - Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load

15. D695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics

B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):

1. Technical Guide for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface preparation for Sealers,Coatings, and Polymer Overlays

C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. Manual of Steel Construction

D. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318, latest edition)

E. International Code Council (ICC), formerly the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO)



1.04 SUBMITTALS: The CONTRACTOR shall submit the following:

A. MANUFACTURER's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling,placement, curing, and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the WORK, and location of use.

B. Name and telephone number of grout MANUFACTURER's representative, who will give on-site jobservice. The representative shall have at least one (1) year of experience with the chosen grouts.



A. The CONTRACTOR shall assist the DISTRICT in obtaining specimens for testing and shall furnish allmaterials necessary for fabricating the test specimens.

B. The cost of laboratory tests on grout will be paid by the DISTRICT except where test results show thegrout to be defective. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall pay for the tests, removal andreplacement of defective WORK, and re-testing all at no increased cost to the DISTRICT.

C. The MANUFACTURER of prepackaged grouts shall provide on-site technical assistance within 72hours of request at no cost to the DISTRICT.

1.07 CERTIFICATIONS AND TESTING: The CONTRACTOR shall provide to the DISTRICT three (3) copiesof certified test results for all tests required herein.

A. Test results and service report from the field tests and the demonstration and training session verifyingthe requirements indicated herein.

B. Certification that all grout used on the project contains no chlorides or other chemicals that causecorrosion.

C. MANUFACTURER's certification that their non-shrink grout does not contain aluminum, zinc, ormagnesium powers, used as a method of expansion.

D. ICC certifications for all adhesive anchors.

1.08 INSPECTION COORDINATION: All adhesive anchor installations shall have special inspections asrecommended by the ICC report on the adhesive anchors and local codes.

1.09 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one year from the date ofSubstantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 APPLICATION:

A. Unless indicated otherwise, grouts shall be provided as listed below whether indicated on the Drawingsor not:

TYPE OF GROUT APPLICATION

Cement Grout Surface repairs

Non-Shrink - Class I All anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in grout inwhich the average working or operating temperature will be over100 degrees F, or in high fire risk areas.Beam and column (1 or 2 story) base plates less than 16 inches inthe least dimension.Storage tanks and other non-motorized equipment and machineryunder 30 horsepowerFilling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts,gate guide frames, etc. (Where placement time is less than 20 min.)Repair of holes and defects in concrete members which are notwater bearing and not in contact with soil or other fill material


TYPE OF GROUT APPLICATION

Any application not listed, where grout is called for on theDrawings

Non-Shrink - Class II Column base plates (greater than 2 story or larger than sixteen (16)inches in the least dimension)Filling blockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts,gate guide frames, etc. (where placement time exceeds 20min.)Under precast concrete elements

Repair of holes and defects in concrete members which are waterbearing or in contact with soil or other fill materials

Non-Shrink Epoxy Machinery over 30 horsepower and equipment under 30horsepower but subject to severe shock loads and high vibration

Epoxy Anchor Grout All anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to be set in groutthat are not in high temperature or high fire risk areas.

Topping Grout Toppings and concrete/grout fill less than three (3) inches thick

Structural Concrete per03300

Toppings and concrete/grout fill greater than three (3) inches thick

2.02 MATERIALS:

A. Cement Grout:

1. Cement grout shall be composed of one part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum amountof water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color ofadjacent concrete, white portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. Theminimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi, unless indicated otherwise.

2. Cement grout materials shall be as indicated in SECTION 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Non-Shrink Grouts (Cement Based):

1. General:

a. Cement Based Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non-gas-liberating, non-ferrous, grout, requiring only the addition of water.

b. MANUFACTURER's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container inwhich the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrinkgrout indicated herein shall be that recommended by the MANUFACTURER for theparticular application.

c. Grout shall not contain chlorides or additives, which may contribute to corrosion.

d. Grout shall be formulated to be used at any consistency from fluid to plastic.

e. Non-Shrink grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at a fluidconsistency at 28 days:

Tensile Splitting Strength ASTM C496 500 psi minimum

Flexural Strength ASTM C580 1000 psi minimum

Bond Strength (concrete togrout)

ASTM C882 modified 1900 psi minimum

f. Grout shall be certified for use in marine environments

2. Class I Non-Shrink Grout:

a. Class I Non-Shrink Grout shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000psi, when mixed at a fluid consistency.

b. Class I Non-Shrink grout shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107, Grade B or C,when mixed to fluid, flowable and plastic consistencies.


c. Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0 percent expansion, and shallhave no shrinkage (0.0 percent) in accordance with ASTM C827. The grout when testedshall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water.

d. Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.3 percent expansion inthe hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C1090.

e. Provide certification together with independent test data that the expansion at 3 or 14days does not exceed the 28-day expansion and that its non-shrink property is not basedon gas production or gypsum expansion.

3. Class II Non-Shrink Grout:

a. Class II Non-Shrink grout shall be a high precision, fluid, extended working time grout.The minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 7500 psi, when mixed at a fluidconsistency.

b. Grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0 percent expansion, and shallhave no shrinkage (0.0 percent) in accordance with ASTM C827.

c. Grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.3 percent expansion inthe hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C1090.

d. Class II grout shall have an extended working time of 30 minutes minimum when mixedto a fluid consistency as defined in ASTM C827 at temperature extremes of 45 to 90degrees F in accordance with ASTM C1107.

e. Class II Non-Shrink grouts shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107; Grade B or Cwhen tested using the amount of water needed to achieve fluid consistency per ASTMC939.

f. The grout when tested shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water.

g. Provide certification that its non-shrink property is not based on gas production orgypsum expansion.

C. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout:

1. Non-Shrink Epoxy grout shall be a flowable, non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxygrout system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, allpremeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non-reactivediluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardousreactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unlessspecifically recommended by the MANUFACTURER. MANUFACTURER's instructions shallbe printed on each container in which the materials are packaged.

2. Epoxy grout shall have a maximum early age height change of 4.0 percent expansion, and shallhave no shrinkage (0.0 percent) in accordance with ASTM C827, (modified for epoxy grouts byusing an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9 and 1.1).

3. Epoxy grout shall have a negligible (less than 0.0006 in/in) length change after hardening, and acoefficient of thermal expansion less than 0.00003 in/in F when tested according to ASTMC531.

4. The epoxy grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 9000 psi in 24 hours and13,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C579, method B.

5. The mixed epoxy grout shall have a minimum working life of 90 to 120 minutes at70 degrees F.

6. The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95% EBA in accordance with ASTM C1339.

7. The chemical formulation of the epoxy grout shall be that recommended by theMANUFACTURER for the particular application. Do not reduce aggregate loading or addsolvents to increase flowability.

8. Non-Shrink Epoxy grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at 7 days:

Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM C882 modified 3000 psi minimum


Bond Strength to Steel ASTM C882 modified 1700 psi minimumFlexural Strength ASTM C580 2500 psi minimumTensile Strength ASTM C307 2000 psi minimum

D. Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill:

1. Where fill is thicker than 3 inches, structural concrete, as specified in SECTION 03300, may beused if approved by the DISTRICT.

2. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete/grout fill for built-up surfaces of tank, channel, andbasin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, andadmixtures proportioned and mixed as specified herein. All materials and procedures indicatedfor normal concrete in SECTION 03300, shall apply unless indicated otherwise.

3. Topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement percubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45.

4. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows:

U.S. STANDARD SIEVE SIZE PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING1/2" 1003/8" 90-100

No. 4 20-55No. 8 5-30

No. 16 0-10No. 30 0

5. Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design as indicated in SECTION 03300,except that drying shrinkage tests are not required.

6. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of topping grout and concrete/grout fill at 28 daysshall be 4000 psi.

2.03 CURING: Curing materials shall be as specified in SECTION 03300, and as recommended by theMANUFACTURER of prepackaged grouts.

2.04 CONSISTENCY:

A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for theparticular application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will notflow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of thatconsistency; the type of grout to be used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application.

B. The slump for topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishingconditions but shall not exceed 4 inches.

2.05 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS:

A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovelmeasurements shall not be allowed.

B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by theMANUFACTURER.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL:

A. Grout shall not be placed until base concrete or masonry has attained its design strength, unlessauthorized otherwise by the DISTRICT.

B. When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, the concrete surface shall be saturated withwater for 24 hours prior to placement. Upon completion of saturation period excess water shall beremoved with clean, oil free compressed air prior to grouting. Concrete substrate shall not be wet priorto placement of epoxy grouts.


C. Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be in accordance with SECTION03300. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete unless otherwiseindicated.

D. All surfaces that will be in contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax, grease, curingcompounds, laitance, loose concrete or other deleterious materials.

E. Shade the WORK sites from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting.

F. Contact the grout MANUFACTURER's representative for assistance on hot and cold weather groutingtechniques and precautions if applicable.

3.02 GROUTING PROCEDURES:

A. General: All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and other means ofexecution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations ofthe MANUFACTURER.

B. All structural, equipment, tanks, and piping support bases shall be grouted, unless indicated otherwise.

1. The original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below the plate toprovide for a minimum one-inch thickness of grout, or a thickness as indicated on theDrawings.

2. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges or doublenuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the original pour ofconcrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout. The mixture shall be of a fluid consistencyand poured continuously into the space between the plate and the base concrete. Forms forgrout shall be tight against all surfaces, and joints shall be sealed as recommended by the groutMANUFACTURER to be liquid-tight. Forms shall be coated as recommended by the groutMANUFACTURER for easy form release. Where this method of placement is not practical orwhere required by the DISTRICT, alternate grouting methods shall be submitted for acceptanceby the DISTRICT.

C. Drilled anchors and Reinforcing Bars:

1. General: Drilled anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with theMANUFACTURER's instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a power drill, andcleaned. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the required 28-day compressive strength. Anchors shall not be loaded until the grout has reached its indicatedstrength in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions.

2. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors:

a. Grout shall be proportioned and mixed with automatic equipment.

b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the ultimate tensilestrength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the AISC Manual of Steel Construction andACI 318, Appendix D., but shall not be less than eight (8) diameters for threaded rod, or12 diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars.

c. The hole diameter shall be as recommended by the epoxy MANUFACTURER but shallbe no larger than 0.25 inch greater than the diameter of the outer surface of the boltthreads or the reinforcing bar deformations.

d. Holes shall be drilled by methods that do not interfere with the proper bonding of theepoxy.

e. Existing reinforcing steel in the vicinity of the proposed holes shall be located prior todrilling. The location of holes shall be adjusted to avoid drilling through or nicking anyexisting reinforcing bars.

f. Holes shall be blown clean with clean, dry compressed air to remove all dust and looseparticles. Holes shall be dry.

g. Reinforcing bars and anchors shall be installed per the MANUFACTURER's writteninstallation instructions.


3. Cement Based Non-Shrink Grout:

a. In places of high temperature or fire hazard, anchor bolts shall be grouted in usingCement Based Non-Shrink Grout, Class I.

b. Unless otherwise indicated, embedment shall be sufficient to develop the ultimate tensilestrength of the anchor or reinforcing bar per the AISC Manual of Steel Construction andACI 318, Appendix D., but shall not be less than sixteen (16) diameters for threaded rod,or 24 diameters for reinforcing or smooth bars.

c. When the bolt diameter is one inch or less, the hole diameter should be a minimum oftwo inches. When the bolt’s diameter is greater than one inch, the hole diameter shouldbe at least twice the bolt diameter.

d. Drilled holes shall be saturated with water for not less than 24 hours before installation ofanchor/rod/rebar.

e. The non-shrink grout should be placed in the holes in a non-sag (trowellable) consistency.The grout should be placed in the holes before the anchor and then the anchor insertedand vibrated to ensure proper coverage.

D. Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill:

1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish WORK shall be completed prior to placement of toppingor concrete/grout fill. To ensure bonding to the base slab, the base slab shall be given anexposed aggregate finish. Alternatively where accepted by the DISTRICT, the base slab shallbe given a roughened textured surface by a close-spaced rake while the surface is green. Aftercuring, high pressure washing shall expose the aggregates and produce not less than a 3/16-inchamplitude roughness. Jackhammers or chipping hammers shall not be used.

2. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete/grout fill shall be one inch. Where thefinished surface of concrete/grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degreeswith the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surfaceat the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 3-1/2-inches wide by 1-1/2-inchesdeep.

3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted to saturated surface dry (SSD) conditionper International Concrete Repair Institute Standards for Surface Preparations, prior to placingtopping and fill. No topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is completely free fromstanding pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat cement grout shall be broomed into thesurface of the slab just before topping or fill placement. The neat cement grout shall not beallowed to dry before topping placement. If it does dry, it must be immediately removed usingwet stiff brooms and reapplied. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or thoroughtamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottomswhere scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to therevolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by theequipment MANUFACTURER after the grout is brought to the established grade. Coat surfacewith evaporation retardant as needed to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks.

4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab tothe top, for the full width of the placement.

5. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots, which shall beimmediately eliminated. When the topping and/or fill have hardened sufficiently, it shall besteel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approvedtype of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over thesurface shall be by hand troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement, or mixture of drycement and sand shall be applied to the surface.

6. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After thetopping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the DISTRICT, the tankshall be filled with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for fourteen (14) days.

3.03 CONSOLIDATION: Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for eachapplication, to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled.


3.04 CURING: Cement based grouts shall be cured per SECTION 03300 and per the MANUFACTURER'srecommendations.

3.05 FIELD TESTING:

A. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of each type ofgrout, and at intervals thereafter as selected by the DISTRICT to ensure continued compliance withthese specifications. The specimens will be made by the DISTRICT or its representative.

B. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and cement based non-shrink groutwill be performed in accordance with ASTM C109 (Using 2-in or 50mm Cube Specimens), at intervalsduring construction selected by the DISTRICT. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at 7days, 28 days, and each additional time period as appropriate.

C. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for topping grout, and concrete/grout fill will beperformed as specified in SECTION 03300, at intervals during construction as selected by theDISTRICT.

D. All material, already placed, which fails to meet the requirements of these specifications, is subject toremoval and replacement at the cost of the CONTRACTOR.

E. The cost of all laboratory tests on mortar and grout will be borne by the DISTRICT, but theCONTRACTOR shall assist the DISTRICT in obtaining specimens for testing. However, theCONTRACTOR shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on WORKperformed which does not meet the specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all servicesnecessary to conduct the compression tests.

F. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grouts will be performed in accordance withASTM C579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the DISTRICT. A set of threespecimens will be made for testing at 7 days, and each earlier time period as appropriate.

3.06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES: Construction tolerances shall be as indicated in SECTION 03300, unlessindicated otherwise.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 07920 SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for sealing andcaulking as specified herein.

1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extentreferenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: C920-79 Elastomeric JointSealants.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Certifications of Conformance of Compliance: Submit certificates from the manufacturers attestingthat materials meet the specified requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Descriptive Data: Submit complete descriptive data for each type of material. Clearlymark data to indicate the type the CONTRACTOR intends to provide. Data shall state conformance tospecified requirements. Data for sealant and caulking shall include application instructions, shelf life,mixing instructions for multi-component sealants, and recommended cleaning solvents.

C. Colors: Submit one (1) sample of each color for each sealant and caulking type to verify that productsmatch the colors indicated. Where colors are not indicated, submit not less than four (4) differentsamples of manufacturers' standard colors for selection by the DISTRICT.

1.04 SAMPLE JOINTS: Before sealant and caulking work is started, provide a sample of each type of finishedjoint where directed on the project. The sample shall show the workmanship, bond, and color of sealant orcaulking. The workmanship, bond, and color of sealant or caulking work throughout the project shall matchthe approved sample joints.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: The ambient temperature shall be within the limits of 40 and 100degrees F. when the sealant and caulking are applied.

1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's external shippingcontainers, unopened, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and materials designated clearly thereon.Containers of elastomeric sealant shall be labeled as to type, class, grade and use. Carefully handle and storeall materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 100degrees Fahrenheit or less than 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

1.07 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one year from the date ofSubstantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: Products shall conform to the reference documents listed for each use. Color of sealant andcaulking shall match adjacent surface color unless specified otherwise. For ASTM C920 sealants, use asealant that has been tested on the type(s) of substrate to which it will be applied.

A. Interior Caulking or Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5 or 25, Use NT. Color ofcaulking or sealant shall be white.

B. Exterior Sealant: For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25,


Use T. Color of sealant shall be gray unless in contact with window frame where it shall be dark brownor bronze.

C. Exterior sealants used adjacent to or above roof surfaces shall be compatible with asphaltic bituminousroofing products, should contact be made with the roofing system, that would not have adverse affectsto either product.

D. Floor Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Color of sealant shall be gray.

E. Primer for Sealant: Use a non-staining, quick-drying, of type and consistency as recommended by thesealant manufacturer for the particular application.

F. Bond Breakers: Use the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for theparticular application.

G. Backstops: Use a closed cell polyurethane or polyethylene foam free from oil or other stainingelements as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Backstop material shall be compatible with thesealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as backstops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from frost, moisture, grease,oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Whereadequate grooves have not been provided, clean out grooves to a depth of ½-inch and grind to a minimumwidth of ¼-inch without damage to the adjoining work. No grinding shall be required on metal surfaces.

A. Steel Surfaces: Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical or woulddamage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or usinga solvent that leaves no residue.

B. Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces: Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be incontact with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove tape and any residualadhesive just prior to sealant application. Use non-staining solvents recommended by the itemmanufacturer.

3.02 SEALANT PREPARATION: Do not modify the sealant by addition of liquids, solvents or powders. Mixmulti-component elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.03 APPLICATION:

A. Backstops: Where joint cavities are constructed deeper than indicated, tightly pack the back or bottomwith backstop material to provide a joint of the depth indicated. Install backstops dry and free of tearsor holes.

B. Primer: Just prior to application of the sealant or caulking compound, clean out all loose particles fromjoints. Apply primer in accordance with compound manufacturer's directions. Do not apply primer toexposed finish surfaces.

C. Bond Breaker: Provide bond breakers as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type ofjoint and sealant used.

D. Sealant and Caulking Compounds: Use a compound that is compatible with the material to and againstwhich it is applied. Do not use a compound that has exceeded its shelf life or has become too jelled tobe discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the compound in accordance with themanufacturer's printed instructions. Force the compound into joints with sufficient pressure to fill thejoints solidly. Compound shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles.


1. Interior Sealant and Caulking: Provide sealant or caulking at all exposed joints in the buildingand at all joints indicated to receive sealants or caulking.

2. Exterior Sealant: Provide sealant at all joints around the perimeter of openings and at allexposed joints on the building and at all joints indicated to receive sealant.

3. Floor Joint Sealant: Provide sealant in all control joints and in other floor joints indicated orspecified.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:

A. Protection: Protect areas adjacent to joints from compound smears. Masking tape may be used for thispurpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.

B. Cleaning: Immediately scrape off fresh compound that has been smeared on masonry and rub cleanwith a solvent as recommended by the compound manufacturer. Upon completion of compoundapplication, remove all remaining smears and stains resulting therefrom and leave the work in a cleanand neat condition.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09900 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. Summary of Work: The CONTRACTOR shall provide coating on exterior surfaces throughout theProject and which are listed in PART 2, with systems specified on "coating system" sheets at the end ofthis SECTION.

B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental protection,provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of the local and regional jurisdiction. Notifythe DISTRICT of any coating specified herein that fails to conform to the requirements for the locationof the Project or location of application.

1. Lead Content: Use only coatings that are totally lead free.

2. Chromate Content: Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium chromate.

3. Asbestos Content: Materials shall not contain asbestos.

4. Mercury Content: Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.

5. The specified maximum volatile organic compounds (VOC) content shall apply to the unthinnedproduct.


SECTION 01300 – Submittals


A. Standards or Codes: The edition of the publications of the organizations listed below in effect at the timeof the advertisement for bids form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. See the variousparagraphs for the specified standard. In the case of a conflict between the requirements of thisSECTION and those of the listed document, the requirements of this SECTION shall prevail.

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

b. Z535.1 - Safety Colors


a. C267 - Standard Test Methods for Chemical Resistance of Mortars, Grouts, and MonolithicSurfacings and Polymer Concretes

b. D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content ofPaints and Related Coatings

c. D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

d. D4259 - Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete

e. D4260 - Standard Practice for Acid Etching Concrete

f. D4261 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating

g. D5201 - Standard Practice for Calculating Formulation Physical Constants of Paints andCoatings

h. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications:

a. SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Removes oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, andother soluble contaminants.

b. SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Removes loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint and otherloose foreign matter.

c. SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Removes loose material. Not intended to remove all scale orrust.


d. SP5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removes all scale, rust, foreign matter. Leaves surfacegray-white uniform metallic color.

e. SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Two-thirds of each square inch free of all visibleresidues; remainder only light discoloration.

f. SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removes only loose material, remaining surface tight andabraded to give anchor pattern.

g. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning: At least 95% of each square inch shall be free of allvisible residues.

h. SP11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

4. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):

a. Guideline #03732: Surface preparation should comply with ICRI technical guidelinenumber 03732 (selecting and specifying concrete surface preparation for sealers, coatingsand polymer overlays).

5. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE):

a. CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Coating systems include surface preparation, prime coat (first coat), finish coats (second and third coats),inspection, cleaning, and touch-up of surfaces and equipment. Shop preparation, prime coat, and finishcoats to be shop-applied may be specified elsewhere or referenced to this SECTION so that a completesystem is specified and coordinated.

1. Where surface preparation and first (prime) coat are specified in other SECTIONs to be shop-applied, such as for structural steel, hollow metal doors or equipment, only the touch-up andfinish coats are a part of field painting. Surface preparation is the required degree of preparationprior to application of first (prime) coat regardless if done in shop or field.

2. If materials are provided without shop primer such as miscellaneous steel or sheet metal, thensurface preparation, first, second, and third coats are a part of field painting.

3. Concealed surfaces are generally not required to have finish-coats unless otherwise specified, butprime coat should be applied and touched up prior to concealment.

4. Where equipment and materials are provided with shop-applied finished coating system, onlytouch-up is a part of field painting.

5. Refer to applicable SECTIONs to determine whether surface preparation and first coat, orcomplete coating system, is to be shop-applied.

6. The term "DFT" means minimum dry film thickness, with no tolerance for thinner films.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:


B. Submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Schedule of products and paint systems to be used. Schedule shall include the followinginformation:

a. Surfaces for system to be applied

b. Surface preparation method and degree of cleanliness

c. Product MANUFACTURER, name, and number

d. Method of application

e. Dry film thickness per coat of coating to be applied

2. Color charts for selection and acceptance

3. Product information

a. MANUFACTURER's data sheet for each product proposed


b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the systemperformance and material requirements

c. MANUFACTURER's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation andapplication

d. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings (where applicable)

e. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) filled out completely according to the Florida Right-to-Know Law, Chapter 442, Florida Statutes, clearly identifying each product used.

4. Certification signed by coating MANUFACTURERs stating that each coating is suitable forservice intended as stated on each coating system sheet, and that the materials to be installedcomply in all respects with the requirements of this SECTION.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing to the DISTRICT that applicators have previouslyapplied all the systems in this SECTION and have the ability and equipment to prepare thesurfaces and apply the coatings correctly.

6. Samples

a. Painted Wood: Eight (8) inch square samples for each color and material on hardboard.

b. Sample of each paint, finish, and other coating material on 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch sheetmetal. Each sheet shall be completely coated over its entire surface with one coatingmaterial, type, or color.

c. Two (2) sets of color samples that match each color selected by the DISTRICT from theMANUFACTURER's color charts. The color designation shall be shown on the back ofthe color sample.

d. Two (2) 2-foot by 2-foot concrete panels shall be constructed at the Site in an areadesignated by the DISTRICT. On one panel, the C0NTRACTOR shall apply the coatingsystem required for water-retaining concrete interior surfaces and the system for concreteexterior surfaces on the other panel. The CONTRACTOR shall not begin coating thestructure surfaces until the DISTRICT has accepted both panels. If the DISTRICT doesnot approve either panel, at its own expense the CONTRACTOR shall erect another, coatit, and request DISTRICT approval.


A. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Coating WORK shall be performed by an SSPC certified CONTRACTOR having a minimum ofCategory QP 1 certification for WORK without hazardous paint removal, and Category QP 2certification for WORK involving hazardous paint removal. The certified CONTRACTOR shallmaintain in effect all required certifications for the duration of the Project. Any request forProject delay due to an expired certification will not be considered.

2. The applicator shall be certified in application of specified products and systems on projects ofsimilar size and scope, as demonstrated by previous successful installations, and shall beapproved by the MANUFACTURER in writing.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Provide products of MANUFACTURER with no less than ten (10) years experience inmanufacturing the materials for the required WORK.


1.07 INSPECTION COORDINATION:

A. Pre-painting Conference:

1. Before field painting starts, representatives for the DISTRICT, CONTRACTOR, coatingapplicator, and coating MANUFACTURER's technical representative shall meet with theDISTRICT's personnel.


2. Agenda for the meeting will include details of surface preparations and coating systems to ensureunderstanding and agreement by all parties for compliance.

B. In the event a problem occurs with coating system, surface preparation, or application, coating applicatorand coating MANUFACTURER’s technical representative shall promptly investigate the problem andsubmit results to the DISTRICT.

C. Whenever water tightness in a water-retaining structure is dependent upon WORK in other sections, theCONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for water tightness of the integrated assembly. Prior tostarting WORK, CONTRACTOR shall meet with installers involved and with MANUFACTURERs ofall materials involved to review Drawings and Specifications to insure that materials are being usedproperly and details are correct. A written report of this meeting shall be submitted to the DISTRICT.The report shall contain at least:

1. Meeting date and names and affiliations of those present and written statements from eachinstaller and MANUFACTURER of their acceptance of Drawings, Specifications and conditions,and of proposed use of their materials as proper for purposes shown.

1.08 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warranty the WORK against defects for one (1) year from thedate of Substantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of Section 00700 - General Terms andConditions.

A.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Proprietary names and product numbers are specified in most systems for material identification fromthese MANUFACTURERs.

1. PPG (Pittsburg Plate Glass Co.)2. Carboline Company, Inc.3. BASF Building Systems4. ICI Devoe Coating Company5. The Euclid Chemical Company6. Tnemec Company, Inc.7. Xypex Chemical, Ltd.8. Kryton International9. Sika Corporation10. GML Coatings, LLC11. Wasser Corporation12. Xymax Coatings, Inc.13. Benjamin Moore & Company14. Sherwin-Williams15. PPC Coatings16. International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.

2.02 GENERAL:

A. Materials furnished for each coating system must be compatible with the substrate.

B. Single Manufacturer: All materials in each coating system shall be by the same coatingMANUFACTURER to assure compatibility of coatings.

C. Compatibility: When shop-painted surfaces are to be field coated, the CONTRACTOR shall ascertainwhether finish materials will be compatible with shop coating. Coatings of uncertain composition shallbe removed completely before applying new coatings.

D. Colors:

1. Color of finish coatings shall match accepted color samples.


2. When second and finish coats of a system are of same type, CONTRACTOR shall tint or use aneasy distinguishable alternate color on second coat to enable visual coverage inspection of thethird coat. When first and second coats only are specified and are of same or different types, tintor use an easy distinguishable alternate color on first coat to enable visual coverage inspection ofthe second coat.

E. Include on label of material containers:

1. MANUFACTURER’s name, product name, and number

2. Type of paint and generic name

3. Color name and number

4. Storage and temperature limits

5. Mixing and application instructions, including requirements for precautions which must be taken

6. Drying, recoat, or curing time

2.03 COATING SYSTEMS: Specified on the "Coating System" sheets at the end of this SECTION.

2.04 SURFACES TO BE COATED:

A. Exterior Surfaces: All exterior surfaces extending one (1) foot above the maximum surface water leveland those that are submerged in fresh water or brackish water shall be provided with the followingadditional protective measures:

1. For all repair projects or for new, replacement or refurbishment projects located south of DistrictCanals C-43 and C-44, except structures on Lake Okeechobee and Herbert Hoover Dike and allcoastal structures, use Crystalline Capillary Waterproofing (CCW) coating. Refer to CoatingSystem C-3.

2. For new or replacement or refurbishment projects located north of District Canals C-43 and C-44, including all structures on Lake Okeechobee and Herbert Hoover Dike and all coastalstructures, also refer to Division 3 specifications to evaluate the need for CCW coating or additiveand propose the cost effective alternative.

B. Interior Surfaces: (Not Used)

Generic Description Specific Surfaces System

Steel, severe Exposure, Non-Immersion.Exterior or Interior. DTM Acrylic. SafetyYellow.

1. Bollards, guard posts, vehicle gates S-7

2.05 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED:

A. Factory finished equipment, except for touch-up or noted otherwise

B. Metal surfaces of stainless steel, bronze, aluminum, and fiberglass

C. Concrete, unless listed on specific surfaces above

D. Machined surfaces

E. Grease fittings

F. Glass

G. Equipment nameplates

H. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walking surfaces unless listed on specificsurfaces above

I. Concrete Floors unless listed above


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Manufacturer Recommendations: Unless this specification requires otherwise, CONTRACTOR shallstrictly follow the MANUFACTURER’s printed recommendations and instructions for storing andhandling coating system materials.

B. Delivery of Materials:

1. Deliver in sealed containers with labels and information legible and intact. Containers shall alsohave correct labels with required information.

2. CONTRACTOR shall allow sufficient time for testing, if required.

C. Storage of Materials: CONTRACTOR shall store under conditions recommended by the Material SafetyData Sheets:

1. All protective coating materials shall be used within the MANUFACTURER’s recommendedshelf life.

2. Store only acceptable materials on Project Site.

3. Store tightly sealed materials off ground and away from moisture, direct sunlight, extreme heat,and freezing temperatures. Provide separate area and suitable containers for storage of coatingsand related coating equipment.

4. Dispose of used or leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, and rollers in accordance withapplicable regulations.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR COATING:

A. General: All surfaces to receive protective coatings shall be clean prior to application of coatings. TheCONTRACTOR shall examine all surfaces to be coated, and shall correct all surface defects beforeapplication of any coating material. All marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finishedsurfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any coating application. Surfaces to be coated shallbe dry and free of visible dust.

B. Protection of surfaces not to be coated: Surfaces that are not to receive protective coatings shall beprotected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations.

C. Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates onmachinery, and other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected. Dropcloths shall be provided to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Theworking parts of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surfacepreparation and coating operations. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating orother materials.

D. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent work during blast cleaning operations. Spray paintingshall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsiblefor and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring fromblast cleaning or coating operations.

E. Protection of painted surfaces: Cleaning and coating shall be coordinated so that dust and othercontaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. General

1. Prepare surfaces for each coating system conforming to SSPC or ASTM surface preparationspecifications listed.

a. If grease or oils are present, SSPC-SP1 must precede any other method specified.

b. Remove surface irregularities such as weld spatter, burrs, or sharp edges, prior to specifiedsurface preparation.


2. Depth of profile shall be as specified for each system, but in no instance shall it exceed one-thirdof the total dry-film thickness of complete system.

3. Prepare only those areas which will receive the first coat of the system on the same day.

B. Metals

1. The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating systemsheets included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specificationsand the coating MANUFACTURER’s printed recommendations for the intended service, thehigher degree of cleaning shall apply.

2. All sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered, and all burrs, surface defects, and weld splattershall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning.

3. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the systemsheet requirements for the particular coating and service conditions. Abrasives for submergedand severe service coating systems shall be clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. Automatedblasting systems shall not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service. Metal shot orgrit shall not be used for surfaces that will be in submerged service, even if subsequent abrasiveblasting is planned to be one with hard, sharp cutting crushed slag.

4. Abrasive shall not be reused unless an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will bein non-submerged service. For automated blasting systems, clean oil-free abrasives shall bemaintained. The abrasive mix shall include at least 50 percent grit.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollutioncontrol regulations for blast cleaning.

6. Compressed air for air blast cleaning shall be supplied at adequate pressure from well maintainedcompressors equipped with oil and moisture separators that remove at least 95 percent of thecontaminants.

7. Surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry airblast cleaning, vacuuming, or another method prior to painting.

8. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum cleaned andwiped with a tack cloth.

9. Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean surfacerequirements before recoating.

10. If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent work, the area to be cleaned is lessthan 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then SSPC SP2 orSSPC SP3 may be used.

11. Shop applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the indicatedcoatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shallbe examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall becompletely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP1 before the abrasive blast cleaning workis started.

12. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied.

3.04 APPLICATION:

A. CONTRACTOR shall apply coatings in accordance with coating MANUFACTURER’srecommendations. Materials shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at uniform consistency duringapplication. Coatings from different MANUFACTURERs shall not be mixed together.

B. Use properly designed brushes, rollers, and spray equipment for all applications.

C. On unprimed surfaces apply first coat of the system the same day as surface preparation.

D. Cleaned surfaces and all coats shall be inspected prior to each succeeding coat. The CONTRACTORshall schedule such inspection with the DISTRICT in advance.


E. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of thesurface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the sameworking day.

F. Special attention shall be given to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other placeswhere insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present. Use stripe painting for these areas.

G. Dry-film thickness of each system shall be at least as thick as the minimum specified. Maximum dry-film thickness shall not exceed the minimum more than 20% or coating MANUFACTURER’srequirements, whichever is less. Where a dry-film thickness range is specified, the thickness shall notbe shall not be outside the range.

H. Shop and field painting shall not be applied within three (3) inches of unprepared surface of any substratesuch as areas to be welded or bolted.

I. Environmental Conditions:

1. Atmospheric temperature must be 50 degrees Fahrenheit or higher during application, unlessapproved in writing by coating MANUFACTURER. Do not apply coatings when inclementweather or freezing temperature may occur during the curing time interval.

2. Wind velocities for exterior applications shall be at a minimum to prevent overspray or falloutand not greater than coating MANUFACTURER’s limits.

3. Relative humidity must be less than 85% and the temperature of the surface to be painted mustbe at least five (5) degrees above the dew point.

4. Provide adequate ventilation in all areas of application to ensure that at no time does the contentof air exceed the Threshold Limit Value given on the MANUFACTURER’s Material Safety DataSheets for the specific coatings being applied.

J. Recoat Time: In the event a coating, such as an epoxy, has exceeded its recoat time limit, prepare thepreviously applied coating in accordance with MANUFACTURER’s recommendations.

K. Protection:

1. Cover or otherwise protect surfaces not to be painted. Remove protective materials whenappropriate.

2. Mask, remove, or otherwise protect finish hardware, machined surfaces, grilles, lighting fixtures,and prefinished units as necessary.

3. Provide cover or shields to prevent surface preparation media and coatings from entering orificesin electrical or mechanical equipment. Where ventilation systems must be kept in operation attime of surface preparation, take precautions to shield intakes and exhausts to prevent thematerials from entering system or being dispersed.

4. Provide signs to indicate fresh paint areas.

5. Provide daily cleanup of both storage and working areas and removal of all paint refuse, trash,rags, and thinners. Dispose of leftover containers, thinners, rags, brushes, and rollers that cannotbe reused in accordance with applicable regulations.

6. Do not remove or paint over equipment data plates, code stamps on piping, or UL fire-ratinglabels.

3.05 INSPECTION:

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and use a wet-film gauge to check each application approximately everyfifteen (15) minutes in order to immediately correct film thickness under or over that specified.

B. On ferrous surfaces, measurements shall be made with one of the thickness gauges listed below. Thegauge shall be calibrated on metal practically identical in composition and surface preparation to thatbeing coated and be of substantially the same thickness, except that for measurements on metal thickerthan 1/4 inch, the instrument may be calibrated on metal with a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. Whencalibrating any of the gauges for making film measurements of over three (3) mils, the calibratingthickness standards (shims) shall be of non-metallic composition. Where only one thickness criterion is


specified, the calibrating shim thickness shall closely approximate the specified thickness, but whereboth thicknesses are specified, the shim's thickness shall closely approximate an average of the two.Calibrating instructions, thickness standards and, in the case of the Mikrotest gauge, a calibrating tool,should obtained from the MANUFACTURER or supplier of the gauge. Authorized thickness gaugesare:

1. General Electric, Type B, General Electric Company

2. Mikrotest, Elektrophysik - Koln

3. Elcometer, Elcometer Instruments, Ltd.

4. Inspector Gage, Elcometer Instruments, Ltd.

5. Minitector, Elcometer Instruments, Ltd.

C. Use holiday or pinhole detector on systems over metal substrates to detect and correct voids whenindicated on system sheet.

D. Furnish a sling psychrometer and perform periodic checks on both relative humidity and temperaturelimits.

E. Check temperature of the substrate at regular intervals to be certain surface is five (5) degrees Fahrenheitor more above the dew point.

3.06 CLEANING AND REPAIRS:

A. Remove spilled, dripped, or splattered paint from surfaces.

B. Touch up and restore damaged finishes to original condition. This includes surface preparation andapplication of coatings specified.

END OF SECTION


South Florida Water Management District3301 Gun Club Road

West Palm Beach, Florida 33406

PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEM

System S-7

SERVICE: Steel; Severe Exposure, Non-Immersion. Exterior or Interior. DTMAcrylic. Safety Yellow.

Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP1 and SP6. Clean and dry.

First Coat: Direct to Metal Acrylic Safety Yellow. Apply a minimum of 2.5 milsdry film thickness, or greater as required by MANUFACTURER.

Second Coat: Same as first coat.

Third Coat: Not required.

System Total: 5.0 mils dry film thickness.

Volatile Organic Content: Maximum 2.08 lb per gal (< 250 g/L)

COATING MANUFACTURER PRODUCT DESIGNATION

Benjamin Moore & Co.Sherwin-Williams

FIRST COAT SECOND COATDTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel P28-15 Same as 1st coatB66Y37 DTM Acrylic Gloss Same as 1st coat


SECTION 16450 GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the electrical grounding system, complete and operable, inaccordance with the Contract Documents. Including but not limited to the building grounding grid, thegrounding rod system and ground riser extension to electrical equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES: The latest edition of the following codes or standards shall apply to the design andfabrication of the products and equipment to be supplied under this contract.

A. NEC Article 250 - Grounding

B. UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment

C. IEEE 837 - Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding

D. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of aGround System

E. AWWA C210 - Standard for Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of SteelWater Pipelines

F. NETA (International Acceptance Testing Specifications)

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with CONTRACTOR Submittals.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product information for connections, clamps, grounding rods andgrounding system components, showing compliance with the requirements of this SECTION.

C. “As-built” Drawings: Provide the DISTRICT with “as-built” drawings of actual grounding systeminstallation. The “as-built” drawings of the grounding system shall be signed and sealed by a State ofFlorida licensed land surveyor.


1.05 RESPONSIBILTIES:

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not conceal or cover any ground connections until the DISTRICT hasestablished that every grounding connection conforms to the Contract Documents and has given theCONTRACTOR written confirmation.

1.06 TESTING:

A. Measure and test the ground impedance in accordance with IEEE Standard 81 after installation butbefore connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system. Verify all ground potentials onplan drawings and submit to the DISTRICT for final approval.

B. Test the grounding system per NETA ATS section 7.13.

C. INSPECTIONS COORDINATION: The CONTRACTOR shall provide access to the WORK for theDISTRICT as requested for inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 48 hours advance notice ofits intention to begin new WORK activities.

1.07 WARRANTY: The CONTRACTOR shall warrant the WORK against defects for one (1) year from the dateof Substantial Completion and as described in Article 13 of SECTION 00700 - General Terms andConditions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL: Components of the grounding electrode system shall be manufactured in accordance withANSI/UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment, and shall conform to the applicablerequirements of National Electrical Code Article 250 and local codes.

2.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM:

A. Ground Rods

1. Unless indicated otherwise, the ground rod shall be a minimum of 3/4-inch in diameter, 20-feetlong with pointed end to facilitate driving, and have a uniform covering of electrolytic coppermetallically bonded to a rigid steel core. The copper to steel bond shall be corrosion resistant.The rod length shall be clearly stamped near the top of the rod.

2. Conform to ANSI/UL 467.

3. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings.

B. Buried cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod connections shall be made using exothermic welds orcompression connectors suitable for direct burial.

C. Exposed grounding connectors shall be of the compression type (connector to cable), made of highcopper alloy, and be manufactured specifically for the particular grounding application.

D. Grounding clamps shall be used to bond each separately derived system to the grounding electrodeconductors.

2.03 COATINGS:

A. Coal Tar:

1. All underground grounding connections shall be coated with coal tar as specified herein.

2. Coating shall be of Polyamide Epoxy-Coal Tar with high build corrosion resistance. Resultingcoat shall conform to the performance requirements of AWWA C 210.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS:

A. Ground Rods

1. Ground rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall install rods as indicated by driving and not by drilling or jetting.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall drive rods into unexcavated portion of the earth where possible.

4. In excavated areas, the CONTRACTOR shall drive grounding rods after compaction andbackfill is completed.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall drive to a depth such that top of rods will be approximately 30inches below final grade, or subgrade, and connect main grid ground cable thereto.

END OF SECTION